JP7765851B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a presentation control means for controlling presentations.

For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters the starting slot, a determination is made as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player will be executed, and after the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a special symbol indicating the result of this determination is displayed in a static manner. When the special symbol indicating that a special game will be executed is displayed in a static manner, a special game in which the player can win gaming media is executed. Among these types of gaming machines, there are those that display a variable presentation symbol in conjunction with the display of the variable special symbol, and execute various presentations such as step-up announcements that can progress in stages up to any number of steps up to a predetermined number of steps, dialogue announcements that show a character speaking lines, group announcements that show multiple characters moving in a predetermined direction, and cut-ins that superimpose a predetermined cut-in image on the currently displayed presentation image (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-80893

However, the effects used in conventional gaming machines are not necessarily sufficiently entertaining, and there is room for improvement in terms of increasing entertainment value.

Therefore, the object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can execute highly entertaining effects.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems comprises:
A movable stage body that can be operated,
a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player;
a symbol display control means for, when the determination is made, causing a predetermined symbol display means to variably display a special symbol and then statically display a special symbol indicating the result of the determination;
a special game execution means for executing the special game when a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined that the special game will be executed is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means ;
A gaming machine comprising a performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means
It is possible to execute a predetermined leading performance, a following performance that can be executed after the leading performance, and a swing performance that swings the performance movable body,
The swing performance includes a first swing performance that swings the performance movable body during the preceding performance, and a second swing performance that swings the performance movable body during the following performance,
When the preceding performance is executed and then the following performance is executed, there are a time when the second rocking performance is executed without executing the first rocking performance, and a time when the first rocking performance is executed and then the second rocking performance is executed ,
The performance control means
In accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, a performance symbol that notifies the result of the judgment is displayed in a variable manner,
During the variable display of the performance symbols, a first attention performance that draws attention to the performance symbols when a reach is achieved, and a second attention performance that draws attention to the performance symbols of a mode indicating that the special game will be executed can be executed.
During the variable display of the performance pattern, there are times when the performance pattern is displayed in a first display mode and times when the performance pattern is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode,
When the performance pattern is displayed in the second display mode, the second swing performance and the second attention performance are more likely to be executed than when the performance pattern is displayed in the first display mode,
The effect symbols displayed when the reach is established include a first effect symbol and a second effect symbol,
The performance control means
The first attention effect that draws attention to the second effect pattern can be executed, but the first attention effect that draws attention to the first effect pattern is not executed,
The first swinging performance swings the performance movable body in a first operation pattern,
The performance control means
The device is characterized in that , prior to the first rocking performance, after power is turned on to the gaming machine, it is possible to rock the performance movable body in a second operating pattern different from the first operating pattern .

With this gaming machine, even if the first shaking effect is not executed during the preceding performance, the second shaking effect may be executed during the following performance. This prevents the player's anticipation for the second shaking effect being reduced due to the first shaking effect not being executed, while achieving a high performance effect through the synergistic effect of the first shaking effect and the second shaking effect.

This invention makes it possible to create highly entertaining performances.

Front view of gaming machine 1 Front view of game board 2 An enlarged view of the main display 40 in FIG. An explanatory diagram for explaining the opening and closing control of the second large winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control device provided in the gaming machine 1. An explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot random number and the symbol random number FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game in the gaming machine 1. An explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of main effects in normal gaming mode An explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of a series of effects after the reach establishment effect following the reach establishment provocation effect Screen diagram showing a specific example of a series of effects from the start of the fluctuation to the reach-establishment effect in a normal gaming state A screen diagram showing a specific example of the first performance route of the SPSP reach Screen diagram showing specific examples of the first performance pattern attention performance and the second performance pattern attention performance Screen diagram showing a specific example of a reach pattern noteworthy performance Screen diagram showing a specific example of the second performance route of the SPSP reach (part 1) Screen diagram showing a specific example of the second performance route of the SPSP reach (part 2) A screen diagram showing a specific example of a double-digit pattern attention effect that draws attention to three patterns that show the double digits "222" A screen diagram showing a specific example of a series of effects in which a reach symbol attention effect is followed by a reach symbol reduction movement effect. Screen diagrams showing a specific example of a series of effects when a miss notification effect is executed after a reach-establishment failure effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the characteristics of each noteworthy effect and its related effects executed in the normal effect mode. A screen diagram showing an example of a presentation when a V win is announced during a jackpot game. An explanatory diagram for explaining the robot-type gimmick 15 and the swinging effect using the robot-type gimmick 15. An explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of a series of effects in the target pre-change An explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of a series of effects in the pre-read target change FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the characteristics of each swing effect and its related effects executed in the normal effect mode. An explanatory diagram for explaining the advance shaking effect FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram illustrating storage areas of a main RAM 83 and information stored in each storage area. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an interrupt process executed on the main control board 80. Detailed flowchart of the sensor detection process in step S2 of FIG. 27 Detailed flowchart of the preliminary determination process in steps S211 and S219 of FIG. 28 Detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the big win determination process in step S308 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S309 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the special drawing stop processing in step S317 of FIG. Detailed flowchart (part 1) of the big prize opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 27 Detailed flowchart (part 2) of the big prize opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 27 Detailed flowchart (part 3) of the big prize opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 27 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an interrupt process executed on the sub-control board 90. Detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. 37 Detailed flowchart of the pending command receiving process in step S13 of FIG. 38. Detailed flowchart of the icon change effect pattern setting process in step S135 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the chance eye effect pattern setting process in step S136 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the effect symbol attention effect pattern setting process in step S137 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the preliminary shaking effect pattern setting process in step S138 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of fluctuation start command reception processing in step S16 of FIG. 38 Detailed flowchart of the variable performance pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the preview effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the process of setting a noteworthy effect pattern in step S165 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the swing effect pattern setting process in step S169 of FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an interrupt process executed in the image and sound control board 100. Detailed flowchart of the image display control process in step S71 of FIG. 49 1 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an interrupt process executed on the lamp control board 120.

The following describes a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1 according to one embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, with appropriate reference to the drawings.

[Configuration example of gaming machine 1]
First, an example of the configuration of a gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Here, Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, and Figure 2 is a front view of the gaming board 2. As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 30 and a gaming board 2 mounted within the gaming machine frame 30. The gaming machine frame 30 includes a front frame 31 having a decorative surface, a main frame for mounting the gaming board 2, etc., and an outer frame for fixing the gaming machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. The front frame 31 supports a glass plate arranged parallel to the gaming board 2 at a predetermined distance, and the glass plate and the gaming board 2 form a gaming area 3 into which gaming balls can flow.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front frame 31 is provided with a launch handle 32 for launching game balls, an upper tray 33 for storing game balls to be supplied to the launching device (not shown), and a lower tray 34 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 33. When a player grips the launch handle 32 and rotates it clockwise, the game balls stored in the upper tray 33 are guided to the launching device and launched with a launch strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32. The launched game ball travels along a rail member 4 located on the left side of the play area 3 and is then guided to an upper position in the play area 3. It flows down the play area 3 along the play board 2, changing its direction of movement as it comes into contact with game nails, windmills, etc. provided in the play area 3.

A ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the end of the rail member 4, which prevents a game ball that has entered the play area 3 from returning to the launching device. A stop button is also provided near the launching handle 32, and by operating this stop button, the player can temporarily stop the launch of game balls without having to return the launching handle 32 to its initial position.

When the player rotates the launch handle 32 by a small angle (a "left hit"), the game ball is launched with a relatively weak launch strength and flows down the left game area 3L. On the other hand, when the player rotates the launch handle 32 by a large angle (a "right hit"), the game ball is launched with a relatively strong launch strength and flows down the right game area 3R after traveling along the rail member 4 located in the upper right corner of the center decorative body 10.

In the left game area 3L, the path through which the game ball passes is provided with devices related to winning and judgment, including a first start opening 21, a second start opening 22, an opening/closing member 23, and three general winning openings 24 (see Figure 2). In addition, in the right game area 3R, the path through which the game ball passes is provided with devices related to winning and judgment, including the second start opening 22, the opening/closing member 23, one general winning opening 24, a gate 25, a first large winning opening 26, an opening/closing member 27, a second large winning opening 28, and an opening/closing member 29 (see Figure 2).

As a gaming ball launched from the launching device flows down the gaming area 3 along the gaming board 2, it may enter any of the first starting opening 21, second starting opening 22, general winning opening 24, first large winning opening 26, and second large winning opening 28. In this case, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the winning position are paid out to the upper tray 33 or lower tray 34. For example, four prize balls are paid out for each gaming ball that enters the first starting opening 21, one prize ball is paid out for each gaming ball that enters the second starting opening 22, and five prize balls are paid out for each gaming ball that enters the general winning opening 24. Furthermore, ten prize balls are paid out for each gaming ball that enters the first large winning opening 26, and ten prize balls are paid out for each gaming ball that enters the second large winning opening 28. Any balls that do not win are discharged from the game area 3 through a discharge port formed at the bottom end of the game board 2.

A center decorative body 10 is provided in the opening formed in the center of the gaming board 2. This center decorative body 10 is composed of a stage section 11 having a gaming ball rolling surface on which gaming balls can roll, and a warp section 12 with a warp entrance and a warp exit at both ends. Gaming balls flowing down the left gaming area 3L may enter the warp section 12 from the warp entrance, and these gaming balls are discharged from the warp exit and guided to the stage section 11. A guide groove is formed in the center of the left and right sides of the stage section 11, allowing gaming balls rolling on the stage section 11 to fall toward the first starting opening 21. For this reason, gaming balls guided to the stage section 11 via the warp section 12 are more likely to enter the first starting opening 21 than gaming balls flowing down the left gaming area 3L without passing through the warp section 12.

The first start opening 21 is a start area that is always open. The second start opening 22 is a start area that is closed when the opening/closing member 23, which is a normal electric device, is not operating and is opened when the opening/closing member 23 is operating. In the gaming machine 1, when a gaming ball enters the first start opening 21 (or the second start opening 22), a determination is made as to whether a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player will be executed. Then, the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), described below, displays a variable pattern, and a pattern (jackpot symbol or losing symbol) indicating the result of the determination is displayed as a frozen pattern. If a jackpot symbol is displayed as a frozen pattern, a jackpot game is executed, opening the first large prize opening 26 and the second large prize opening 28.

In the following explanation, the judgment made in response to a game ball winning through the first starting hole 21 will be referred to as the "first special pattern judgment," and the judgment made in response to a game ball winning through the second starting hole 22 will be referred to as the "second special pattern judgment," and these will be collectively referred to as the "special pattern judgment."

The first large prize opening 26 is a special prize area that opens depending on the result of the special symbol determination. The opening of this first large prize opening 26 is provided with an opening/closing member 27, which is a plate that opens and closes the first large prize opening 26. The first large prize opening 26 is normally blocked by the opening/closing member 27, which maintains a closed position that forms the same plane as the gaming board 2. In contrast, when the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is statically displayed as a jackpot symbol on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), the opening/closing member 27 is activated to open the first large prize opening 26, resulting in a jackpot game. During this jackpot game, a long open round game is played in which the opening/closing member 27 maintains the open position (see FIG. 2) that opens the first large prize opening 26, and then returns to the closed position that blocks the first large prize opening 26. The long-open round game in which the first large prize opening 26 is opened continues until a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) enter the first large prize opening 26, or until a predetermined time (e.g., 25 seconds) has passed since the first large prize opening 26 was opened (without the predetermined number of game balls entering the first large prize opening 26). In this way, during a jackpot game, a long-open round game in which the first large prize opening 26 is left open for a long time is played. For this reason, by hitting the right side during a long-open round game in which the first large prize opening 26 is left open for a long time, the player can obtain more prize balls than when a jackpot game is not being played.

The second large prize opening 28 is a special prize area that opens depending on the results of the special symbol determination. The opening of this second large prize opening 28 is provided with an opening/closing member 29, which is a blade member that opens and closes the second large prize opening 28. The second large prize opening 28 is normally blocked by this opening/closing member 29 (see FIG. 4(A)). In contrast, when the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is statically displayed as a jackpot symbol on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), the opening/closing member 29 is activated to open the second large prize opening 28, resulting in a jackpot game. During this jackpot game, a round of play is played in which the opening/closing member 29 maintains the open position (see FIGS. 2, 4(B), and (C)) that opens the second large prize opening 28, and then returns to the closed position that blocks the second large prize opening 28.

As will be described in more detail later, round games in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened and closed include a long-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened long so that a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) can easily enter the second large prize opening 28, and a short-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened short so that it is extremely difficult for game balls to enter the second large prize opening 28. In a long-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened long, 100 prize balls (= 10 balls x 10 counts) are paid out when the player hits the ball to the right. Therefore, by hitting the ball to the right during a long-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened long, the player can obtain more prize balls than when a jackpot game is not being played.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game will be executed, the operation of the opening/closing members 27 and 29 is controlled to execute a jackpot game in which the player can win gaming balls as gaming media.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, with regard to the short-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is briefly opened, the opening time, which is the time during which the opening/closing member 29 maintains the open position that opens the second large prize opening 28, is set to an extremely short time of 0.1 seconds. For this reason, even if a player hits the ball to the right during the short-open round game of the second large prize opening 28, the game ball will not generally enter the second large prize opening 28, and no prize balls will be paid out.

For ease of explanation, Figure 2 shows the opening/closing members 27, 29 in an open position that opens the large prize openings 26, 28 when the effect symbols are displayed in a changing manner on the display screen 70 of the image display device 7. However, in reality, the opening/closing members 27, 29 are never in an open position while the effect symbols are displayed in a changing manner. Also, since either the first large prize opening 26 or the second large prize opening 28 is used in each round of play during a jackpot game, in reality, these large prize openings are never open at the same time as shown in Figure 2.

An opening/closing member 23 (see Figure 2) is positioned adjacent to the second starting port 22. This opening/closing member 23 can be changed between a closed position in which the opening/closing member 23 blocks the second starting port 22 and an open position (see Figure 2) in which the opening/closing member 23 opens the second starting port 22.

The second starting opening 22 is normally blocked by the opening/closing member 23. In contrast, when a game ball hit by a player to the right passes through the gate 25, a determination is made as to whether or not to open the second starting opening 22, although no prize balls are paid out. If it is determined that the second starting opening 22 should be opened, the opening/closing member 23 remains in an open position for a predetermined period of time and then returns to a closed position a predetermined number of times. In this way, when the opening/closing member 23 is not operating, the second starting opening 22 is in a state where it is difficult for game balls to pass through, but when the opening/closing member 23 is operating, it becomes easier for game balls to pass through.

In the following explanation, the determination that is performed when the gaming ball passes through gate 25 will be referred to as the "normal symbol determination."

The general winning opening 24, like the first starting opening 21, is always open and is a winning opening from which a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, five) are paid out when a game ball enters the general winning opening 24. However, unlike the first starting opening 21, no judgment is made even if a game ball enters the general winning opening 24.

[Configuration example of main display 40]
Figure 3 is an enlarged view of the main display 40 in Figure 2. As illustrated in Figure 3, the main display 40 is configured to have a first special symbol display 41, a second special symbol display 42, a normal symbol display 43, a first special symbol reserve display 44, a second special symbol reserve display 45, a normal symbol reserve display 46, a round display 47, a game status display 48, a firing direction display 49, etc.

The first special pattern display 41 is composed of eight LEDs designated "i-p," and when a first special pattern determination is made, it notifies the result of the first special pattern determination by displaying a fluctuating pattern followed by a static display of a pattern indicating the result of the first special pattern determination. Specifically, for example, the eight LEDs are sequentially lit to display a fluctuating pattern, and the static display of the pattern is achieved by lighting each LED in combination according to the result of the first special pattern determination for a predetermined fixed time (e.g., 0.5 seconds).

The second special symbol display 42 is composed of eight LEDs designated "a-h," and when a second special symbol determination is made, it notifies the result of the second special symbol determination by displaying a fluctuating pattern followed by a static display of a pattern indicating the result of the second special symbol determination. Specifically, for example, the eight LEDs are sequentially lit to display a fluctuating pattern, and the static display of the pattern is achieved by lighting each LED in a combination according to the result of the second special symbol determination for a predetermined fixed time (e.g., 0.5 seconds).

The first special symbol display 41 (or second special symbol display 42) displays a "jackpot symbol" indicating a jackpot, or a "miss symbol" indicating a miss, as a symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination). The gaming machine 1 provides multiple different jackpot symbols depending on the type of jackpot, and when a jackpot symbol is displayed, a jackpot game is played in which the first large prize opening 26 and the second large prize opening 28 are opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol.

The normal symbol display 43 is composed of two LEDs indicated by "s-t." When a normal symbol determination is made, the result of the normal symbol determination is notified by displaying a fluctuating symbol followed by a static symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Specifically, for example, the fluctuating symbol display is performed by alternately lighting the two LEDs, and the static symbol display is performed by lighting each LED for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a lighting pattern corresponding to the result of the normal symbol determination. Here, when a winning symbol is displayed statically, an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting hole 22 is opened by operating the opening/closing member 23 in an opening pattern corresponding to the current game state.

In the following explanation, the patterns displayed on the first special pattern display device 41 and the second special pattern display device 42 will be referred to as "special patterns," and the patterns displayed on the normal pattern display device 43 will be referred to as "normal patterns." Furthermore, the special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 41 may be referred to as the "first special pattern," and the special pattern displayed on the second special pattern display device 42 may be referred to as the "second special pattern" to distinguish between the two.

The first special symbol pending indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs indicated by "u-v," and displays the number of pending first special symbol determinations depending on the lighting status of these LEDs. The second special symbol pending indicator 45 is composed of two LEDs indicated by "w-x," and displays the number of pending second special symbol determinations depending on the lighting status of these LEDs. Note that in this embodiment, the upper limit for these pending numbers is set to "4." The regular symbol pending indicator 46 is composed of two LEDs indicated by "q-r," and displays the number of pending regular symbol determinations depending on the lighting status of these LEDs.

When a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, the round indicator 47 displays the number of rounds to indicate how many rounds will be played in the jackpot game that is executed in response to the jackpot corresponding to that jackpot symbol. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, there are cases where a jackpot game including three rounds is played, and cases where a jackpot game including ten rounds is played. For this reason, in this embodiment, the round indicator 47 is configured with a 3R LED and a 10R LED, and the number of rounds is indicated by lighting up either of these LEDs.

The game status indicator 48 is composed of three LEDs, designated "a1-a3," and indicates the game status of the gaming machine 1 based on the lighting patterns of these LEDs. The launch direction indicator 49 is composed of two LEDs, designated "y-z," and indicates the direction in which the gaming ball will be launched based on the lighting patterns of these LEDs. In other words, it indicates whether the game is in a state where a left-handed shot or a right-handed shot is to be made.

[Configuration example of presentation means provided in gaming machine 1]
1 and 2, the game board 2 is provided with decorative members 13, movable decorative members 14, a performance indicator 125, a first special symbol reserve indicator 126, a second special symbol reserve indicator 127, and the like to perform various effects, and an image display device 7 is provided behind the game board 2. In addition, the front frame 31 is provided with frame lamps 37, speakers 38, robot-type gimmicks 15, and the like to perform various effects.

The decorative member 13 incorporates a panel lamp 5 (see Figure 5) that is composed of multiple colored LEDs, and various lighting effects can be created by changing the lighting and flashing patterns of each LED and by changing the color of each LED's light.

The movable decorative member 14 is positioned in front of the display screen 70 of the image display device 7 and behind the decorative member 13. This movable decorative member 14 incorporates multiple colored LEDs, and the movable decorative member 14 creates a predetermined effect through its own movement and/or light. In this embodiment, a predetermined space is provided between the game board 2 and the display screen 70 to allow the movable decorative member 14 to move, and the movable decorative member 14 is configured to be able to move up and down along the display screen 70. The movable decorative member 14 is normally positioned in an initial position (see Figure 2) where most of it is hidden behind the decorative member 13 and only the bottom end of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. In contrast, when a preview effect suggesting a relatively high probability of a jackpot is executed using the display screen 70 or speaker 38, for example, the movable decorative member 14 emits light in a predetermined light pattern and falls to an operating position that covers most of the display screen 70.

The frame lamp 37 is composed of multiple LEDs built into various parts of the front frame 31, and various lighting effects can be created by changing the lighting and flashing patterns of each LED and by changing the color of each LED's light.

The robot-type gimmick 15 (an example of a "movable effect body") is located on the front frame 31 in a position that allows it to be looked down upon by a seated player. Specifically, the robot-type gimmick 15 is located on the front frame 31 to the left of the first effect button 35 when viewing the gaming machine 1 from the front, at the rear of the upper tray 33. Because the robot-type gimmick 15 is located on the rear of the upper tray 33, the robot-type gimmick 15 will not get in the way, for example, when a player places a game ball removed from the lower tray 34 into the upper tray 33 or touches a game ball stored in the upper tray 33, as if the player's hand were to touch the robot-type gimmick 15. This robot-type gimmick 15 has multiple colored LEDs built in, and the robot-type gimmick 15 performs predetermined effects through the movement of the robot-type gimmick 15 itself and/or light. In this embodiment, the robot gimmick 15 is configured to be able to perform a swinging effect in which the upper body 151 (see Figure 21) swings alternately from left to right while emitting light in a predetermined lighting pattern. This swinging effect will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 21 etc.

The image display device 7 is a liquid crystal display device that displays effect images on its display screen 70, and the player can view the display screen 70 through an opening formed in the center of the gaming board 2. This display screen 70 displays effect images including various display objects such as effect images that notify the results of the special pattern determination, characters and items, reserved images (reserved icons) displayed in the same number as the number of reserved first special pattern determinations (or second special pattern determinations), and change suggestion images (icons) that indicate that special pattern changes are being displayed. Note that the image display device 7 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another image display device such as an EL display device, as long as it is capable of displaying effect images.

The speaker 38 outputs musical pieces, voices, sound effects, and other sound effects either synchronized with or asynchronous to the display effects on the display screen 70, thereby creating an audio effect.

The effect display 125 is composed of two LEDs, and displays changing patterns in accordance with the changing display of special and effect patterns, and displays a static pattern that notifies the result of the special pattern determination in accordance with the static display of special and effect patterns. This effect display 125 notifies the result of the special pattern determination by the combination of the on/off status and lighting colors of each LED.

The first special symbol pending indicator 126 for effect is configured with two LEDs, and by combining the on/off states of each LED, it displays the same number of pending first special symbol determinations as displayed on the first special symbol pending indicator 44. The second special symbol pending indicator 127 for effect is configured with two LEDs, and by combining the on/off states of each LED, it displays the same number of pending second special symbol determinations as displayed on the second special symbol pending indicator 45.

[Configuration example of input means provided in gaming machine 1]
1 , the front frame 31 is provided with a first effect button 35 and a second effect button 36 as input means that can be used by the player. The first effect button 35 is a push button that the player presses to input operation information. The second effect button 36 is a push button that the player presses to input operation information by grasping the grip of the second effect button 36 and pressing the second effect button 36. In the gaming machine 1, effects may be generated in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 or the second effect button 36.

The configuration of the input means is not limited to that exemplified in this embodiment, and may be other. That is, for example, in this embodiment, a case is described in which the gaming machine 1 is equipped with two input means, but the input means may be one or three or more. Furthermore, the input means is not limited to push buttons, and may be other input means such as a touch panel that can detect touch operations by the player, an optical sensor that can detect, for example, the player's hand held over the display screen 70, a joystick that can be moved back and forth and left and right to specify position and direction, or an operating means that the player can hold and change its position.

[Example of internal configuration of second large winning slot 28]
4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening and closing control of second large prize opening 28 and V prize opening 287. An opening/closing member 29 that opens and closes second large prize opening 28 is provided at the opening of second large prize opening 28 (see FIGS. 1 and 4A). Also, as illustrated in FIGS. 4A to 4C, a second large prize opening sensor 281, a V prize opening sensor 283, an outlet sensor 284, a slide member 285, etc. are provided inside second large prize opening 28.

The second large prize opening sensor 281 detects game balls that enter the second large prize opening 28, and in this embodiment, 10 prize balls are paid out each time a game ball passes the second large prize opening sensor 281. The V prize opening sensor 283 detects the passage of a game ball through the V prize opening 287 defined by the V prize opening sensor 283. The outlet sensor 284 detects the passage of a game ball through the outlet defined by the outlet sensor 284. The sliding member 285 guides game balls that have passed through the second large prize opening sensor 281 to the V prize opening 287 or the outlet, and is configured to be slidable left and right in FIG. 4 (the width direction of the gaming machine 1). Figures 4(A) and (B) show an example of a state in which the slide member 285 is positioned in the right position to close the V winning opening 287, and Figures 4(C) and (D) show an example of a state in which the slide member 285 is positioned in the left position to open the V winning opening 287.

When no jackpot game is being played, or during a long-open round game in which the first large prize opening 26 is left open for a long time, the second large prize opening 28 is blocked by the opening/closing member 29, and the V prize opening 287 is blocked by the slide member 285 (see Figure 4 (A)). In contrast, during a round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened and closed, the second large prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 can be in the following states:

Specifically, in a round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in Figures 4(A) and (B), the opening/closing member 29 may rotate while the slide member 285 remains in the right position, opening the second large prize opening 28. In this case, even though the second large prize opening 28 is open, the V prize opening 287 is still blocked by the slide member 285. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the second large prize opening 28, the game ball will not pass through the V prize opening 287, but will pass through the outlet sensor 284.

Furthermore, in a round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in Figures 4(B) and (C), the slide member 285 may move from the right position to the left position while the second large prize opening 28 remains open, opening the V prize opening 287. In this case, since both the second large prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 are open, a game ball that enters the second large prize opening 28 will pass through the V prize opening 287 (i.e., be detected by the V prize opening sensor 283).

The V entry port sensor 283 functions as a so-called probability variable switch, and as described above, if a game ball enters the V prize when both the second large prize port 28 and the V entry port 287 are open (the game ball is detected by the V entry port sensor 283), the game will be controlled in the "probability variable game state" described below after the jackpot game in which this V prize occurred ends. On the other hand, if a game ball does not enter the V prize when both the second large prize port 28 and the V entry port 287 are open, the game will be controlled in the "time-limited game state" described below after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in a round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in FIG. 4(D), the opening/closing member 29 may not be operating, causing the second large prize opening 28 to be closed, and the slide member 285 may move from the right position to the left position, causing the V prize opening 287 to be open. In this case, although the V prize opening 287 is open, the second large prize opening 28 is in an entry-resistant state, so game balls cannot enter the second large prize opening 28.

In addition, the letter "V" is written in a position corresponding to the V prize opening sensor 283 on a transparent member provided in a position corresponding to the area containing the second large prize opening sensor 281, V prize opening sensor 283, outlet sensor 284, slide member 285, etc. (see Figure 2). Therefore, a player can easily identify the position of the V prize opening sensor 283 (the position of the V prize opening 287) by looking at this letter "V."

[Configuration of the control device provided in the gaming machine 1]
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the control device provided in the gaming machine 1.
A control device that controls the operation of the gaming machine 1 is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2. As illustrated in FIG. 5 , the control device of the gaming machine 1 is composed of a main control board 80 that controls the progress of a game using game balls, a sub-control board 90 that comprehensively controls the effects based on information from the main control board 80, an image and sound control board 100 that controls the effects using images and sounds, and a lamp control board 120 that controls the effects using various lamps and movable members. In this embodiment, the main control board 80 functions as a game control unit that controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control board 90, image and sound control board 100, and lamp control board 120 function as an effect control unit that controls the effects. Note that the configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the sub-control board 90, image and sound control board 100, and lamp control board 120 may be configured on a single board.

<Configuration example of main control board 80>
The main control board 80 includes a main CPU 81, a main ROM 82, and a main RAM 83. The main CPU 81 performs various arithmetic processing related to judgments and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on programs stored in the main ROM 82. The main RAM 83 is used as a memory area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 81 executes the programs, and as a working area for data processing, etc.

Connected to the main control board 80 are the first start opening sensor 211, the second start opening sensor 221, the gate sensor 251, the first large prize opening sensor 261, the second large prize opening sensor 281, the V prize opening sensor 283, the outlet sensor 284, the general prize opening sensor 241, the second start opening solenoid 222, the first large prize opening solenoid 262, the second large prize opening solenoid 282, and the V prize opening solenoid 286. Note that the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with four general prize opening sensors 241 corresponding to the four general prize openings 24, but for ease of explanation, only one general prize opening sensor 241 is shown in Figure 5.

The first start opening sensor 211 detects that a game ball has entered the first start opening 21 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The second start opening sensor 221 detects that a game ball has entered the second start opening 22 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The gate sensor 251 detects that a game ball has passed through the gate 25 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The first large prize opening sensor 261 detects that a game ball has entered the first large prize opening 26 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The second large prize opening sensor 281 detects that a game ball has entered the second large prize opening 28 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The V prize opening sensor 283 detects that a game ball has passed through the V prize opening 287 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The outlet sensor 284 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the outlet and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The general winning opening sensor 241 detects that a gaming ball has entered the general winning opening 24 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80.

The second starting opening solenoid 222 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 23 so as to transmit driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 23 based on control signals from the main control board 80 to open and close the second starting opening 22. The first large winning opening solenoid 262 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 27 so as to transmit driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 27 based on control signals from the main control board 80 to open and close the first large winning opening 26. The second large winning opening solenoid 282 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 29 so as to transmit driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 29 based on control signals from the main control board 80 to open and close the second large winning opening 28. The V winning opening solenoid 286 is an electric solenoid connected to the sliding member 285 so as to transmit driving force, and operates the sliding member 285 based on control signals from the main control board 80 to open and close the V winning opening 287.

Although not shown in the figure, the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a payout control board that controls a drive motor that sends out gaming balls from a ball tank located on the back side of the gaming board 2, thereby supplying gaming balls to the upper tray 33 or the lower tray 34. When a detection signal is input from the first start opening sensor 211, the second start opening sensor 221, the first large prize opening sensor 261, the second large prize opening sensor 281, or the general prize opening sensor 241, the main CPU 81 instructs the payout control board to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the location where the gaming ball entered, and also manages the number of prize balls to be paid out based on information from the payout control board.

The main CPU 81 also acquires various random numbers as acquired information when a detection signal is input from the first start gate sensor 211, and uses the acquired random numbers to perform a first special symbol determination. The main CPU 81 also acquires various random numbers as acquired information when a detection signal is input from the second start gate sensor 221, and uses the acquired random numbers to perform a second special symbol determination. The various random numbers here specifically refer to jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers.

The jackpot random number is a random number used to determine whether a jackpot or a miss is achieved. The pattern random number is a random number used to determine the type of jackpot (such as the number of rounds of jackpot play and the game state after the jackpot play ends) when a jackpot is determined. The reach random number is a random number used to determine whether a reach effect or a no-reach effect is performed when a miss is determined. The variation pattern random number is a random number used to determine the variation pattern of the special pattern when it is displayed in a varying manner.

The main CPU 81 acquires these random numbers when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21 (or the second starting hole 22), and first determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on whether the acquired jackpot random number matches a predetermined random number value (winning value) stored in the main ROM 82. If it determines to execute a jackpot game based on the jackpot random number matching the winning value, it determines the type of jackpot based on which of the predetermined random number values (compared to the pattern random number) stored in the main ROM 82 the pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number matches.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines not to execute a jackpot game because the acquired jackpot random number does not match the winning value, it determines whether to perform a reach effect or a non-reach effect based on whether the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number matches a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 82 (which is compared with the reach random number). Furthermore, regardless of the result of the determination based on the jackpot random number, the main CPU 81 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number. This determines the variation time of the special symbol.

When the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game will be played and determines the type of jackpot, it controls the opening and closing of the first large prize opening 26 (operation of the opening and closing member 27) via the first large prize opening solenoid 262, the opening and closing of the second large prize opening 28 (operation of the opening and closing member 29) via the second large prize opening solenoid 282, and the opening and closing of the V prize opening 287 (operation of the slide member 285) via the V prize opening solenoid 286, thereby playing the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot.

The main CPU 81 also acquires a random number (normal symbol random number) when a detection signal is input from the gate sensor 251, and performs a normal symbol determination using the acquired normal symbol random number. If it determines that the second start hole 22 should be opened as a result of this normal symbol determination, it executes an auxiliary game to open the second start hole 22 by controlling the opening and closing of the second start hole 22 (the operation of the opening and closing member 23) via the second start hole solenoid 222.

In addition, the main control board 80 is connected to a first special symbol display 41, a second special symbol display 42, a normal symbol display 43, a first special symbol reserve display 44, a second special symbol reserve display 45, a normal symbol reserve display 46, a round display 47, a game status display 48, and a launch direction display 49.

The main CPU 81 controls these displays 41 to 49 that make up the main display 40, and executes the display processing described above based on Figure 3.

<Configuration example of sub-control board 90>
The sub-control board 90 includes a sub-CPU 91, a sub-ROM 92, a sub-RAM 93, and an RTC (real-time clock) 94. The sub-CPU 91 performs calculations to control the effects based on the programs stored in the sub-ROM 92. The sub-RAM 93 is used as a memory area for temporarily storing various data used by the sub-CPU 91 when executing the programs, and as a working area for data processing, etc. The RTC 94 measures the current date and time (date and time).

A first effect button detection sensor 96 and a second effect button detection sensor 97 are connected to the sub-control board 90. When the first effect button 35 (see Figure 1) is operated, the first effect button detection sensor 96 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating that to the sub-control board 90. When the second effect button 36 (see Figure 1) is operated, the second effect button detection sensor 97 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating that to the sub-control board 90.

The sub-CPU 91 sets the presentation content based on game information regarding special symbol determination, normal symbol determination, jackpot play, etc., sent from the main control board 80. In doing so, it may accept input of operation information from the first presentation button 35 or the second presentation button 36 and set the presentation content according to that operation information. The sub-CPU 91 sends commands to the image and sound control board 100 and lamp control board 120 to instruct the execution of the presentation content that has been set.

<Configuration example of image and sound control board 100>
The image and sound control board 100 controls the image display by the image display device 7 and the output of sound effects by the speaker 38. In this embodiment, the image and sound control board 100 includes an image and sound control CPU 101, a control ROM 102, a control RAM 103, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 104, a CGROM 105, a VRAM 106, an audio DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 107, an audio ROM 108, an SDRAM 109, and an amplifier 110.

The control ROM 102 is composed of mask ROM and stores the control program of the image and sound control CPU 101, a display list generation program for generating a display list, and various tables such as a display list creation table used in the process of creating the display list. Here, the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis, and includes various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) at which the image is to be drawn, the display priority, display magnification, rotation angle, and transparency. The control RAM 103 is used as a memory area for temporarily storing various data used by the image and sound control CPU 101 when executing the control program, and as a working area for data processing, etc.

Based on the above control program, various tables such as the display list creation table, and commands received from the sub-control board 90, the image and sound control CPU 101 instructs the VDP 104 to display image data stored in the CGROM 105 on the image display device 7. This instruction is mainly performed by outputting a display list. The image and sound control CPU 101 also instructs the audio DSP 107 to output audio data stored in the audio ROM 108 from the speaker 38.

CGROM 105 stores the effect data necessary to execute the variable effects associated with the variable display of special symbols and the effects associated with jackpot games. CGROM 105 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed sprite data (a single piece of image data) consisting of a collection of pixel information for a specified range of pixels (e.g., 32 x 32 pixels), movie data consisting of a collection of multiple image data, etc. The pixel information consists of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an alpha value that indicates the transparency of the image. CGROM 105 also stores, without compression, palette data that associates color number information that specifies a color number with display color information for actually displaying the color.

It is also possible to compress only a portion of the image data stored in CGROM 105. Furthermore, various well-known compression methods, such as MPEG4, can be used to compress movie data.

VRAM 106 is composed of SRAM that can write and read image data at high speed, and although not shown in the figure, it also includes a display list storage area, a development storage area, a frame buffer, etc.

The display list storage area temporarily stores the display list output from the image and audio control CPU 101. The expansion storage area stores image data that has been read from the CGROM 105 and then expanded. The frame buffer is used for both drawing and displaying image data to be displayed on the display screen 70.

VDP104 decompresses image data stored in compressed form in CGROM105 and stores the decompressed image data in the expanded memory area. Furthermore, VDP104 performs drawing processing on the frame buffer using the image data stored in the expanded memory area based on the display list stored in the display list memory area. Furthermore, VDP104 generates RGB signals as video signals indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the frame buffer, and outputs the generated RGB signals to the image display device 7.

Connected to the audio DSP 107 are an audio ROM 108, an SDRAM 109, and an amplifier 110. The audio ROM 108 stores various audio data related to music, voice, sound effects, warning sounds, etc. The SDRAM 109 is used as a work area for data processing by the audio DSP 107. The audio DSP 107 reads audio data corresponding to instructions from the image and audio control CPU 101 from the audio ROM 108 to the SDRAM 109, performs data processing, and outputs the processed audio data to the speaker 38 (via the amplifier 110). The amplifier 110 adjusts the volume in accordance with volume-related instructions received from the image and audio control CPU 101 via the audio DSP 107, and outputs the audio data to the speaker 38.

Note that in this embodiment, we will explain a case where the VDP is responsible for drawing management and the audio DSP is responsible for sound management, but in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the VDP is responsible for both drawing management and sound management. In this case, there is no need to provide a separate audio DSP.

<Configuration example of lamp control board 120>
The lamp control board 120 includes a lamp CPU 121, a lamp ROM 122, and a lamp RAM 123, and is connected to the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member motor 141, the robot-type gimmick swing motor 154, the effect display 125, the first special effect hold display 126, and the second special effect hold display 127. The lamp ROM 122 stores programs executed by the lamp CPU 121, light emission pattern data, operation pattern data, etc. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating the respective light emission patterns of the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the LEDs built into the movable decorative member 14, the LEDs built into the robot-type gimmick 15, etc. The operation pattern data is data indicating the operation patterns of the movable decorative member 14, the robot-type gimmick 15, etc., and a plurality of swing pattern data indicating swing patterns for swinging the robot-type gimmick 15 in various swing patterns is stored in the lamp ROM 122 as the operation pattern data for the robot-type gimmick 15.

The lamp CPU 121 performs calculations based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 122 to control the operation of the frame lamp 37, panel lamp 5, movable decorative member 14, robot-type gimmick 15, effect display 125, effect first special chart hold display 126, effect second special chart hold display 127, etc.

The lamp CPU 121 reads out, from the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122, light emission pattern data corresponding to commands received from the sub-control board 90 into the lamp RAM 123, and controls the light emission of the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the LEDs built into the movable decorative member 14, and the LEDs built into the robot-type gimmick 15. The lamp CPU 121 also reads out, from the operation pattern data (swing pattern data for the robot-type gimmick 15) stored in the lamp ROM 122, operation pattern data corresponding to commands received from the sub-control board 90 into the lamp RAM 123, and controls the driving of the movable decorative member motor 141 (in this embodiment, a stepping motor) that operates the movable decorative member 14 and the robot-type gimmick swing motor 154 (in this embodiment, a stepping motor) that operates the robot-type gimmick 15.

In addition, the lamp CPU 121 controls the changing and stopping display of symbols on the effect display 125 based on commands from the sub-control board 90. In addition, the lamp CPU 121 controls the display of the number of reserved symbols related to the first special symbol determination by the effect first special symbol reserve display 126, and the display of the number of reserved symbols related to the second special symbol determination by the effect second special symbol reserve display 127 based on commands from the sub-control board 90.

[About game status]
Next, we will explain the gaming states of the gaming machine 1. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the game is controlled in one of three gaming states: a "normal gaming state," a "probability variable gaming state," and a "time-saving gaming state."

The "normal game state" is a game state in which a special symbol determination is made in a relatively low probability state in which the probability of a jackpot being determined to occur is low, and a support function (such as a function known as "electric support") that supports the entry of game balls into the second start port 22 is not provided. In the normal game state, the probability that a special symbol determination will determine that a jackpot will occur is set to a relatively low probability (e.g., 1/210) (see Figure 6 (A)). Furthermore, the probability that a normal symbol determination will determine that the second start port 22 will open is set to a relatively low probability (e.g., 1/11), the normal symbol variation time is set to a relatively long time (e.g., 20 seconds), and the opening time of the second start port 22 when it is determined that the second start port 22 will open is set to a relatively short time (e.g., 0.1 seconds x 1 time).

The "probable variable game state" is a game state in which a special symbol determination is made in a relatively high probability state in which the probability of a jackpot game being determined to be executed is high, and the support function described above is also provided. In other words, in the probable variable game state, the probability of a special symbol determination determining that a jackpot game will be executed is set to a relatively high probability (e.g., 1/60) (see Figure 6 (A)). Furthermore, the probability of a normal symbol determination determining that the second start hole 22 will be opened is set to a relatively high probability (e.g., 11/11), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to a relatively short time (e.g., 1.5 seconds), and the opening time of the second start hole 22 when it is determined that the second start hole 22 will be opened is set to a relatively long time (e.g., 1.5 seconds x 3 times).

The "time-saving game state" is a game state in which special symbol determination is made in the low-probability state described above, and the electric chute support function is provided. In other words, in the time-saving game state, the probability that a special symbol determination will determine that a jackpot game will be executed is set to a relatively low probability (e.g., 1/210). Furthermore, the probability that a normal symbol determination will determine that the second start hole 12 will be opened is set to a relatively high probability (e.g., 11/11), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to a relatively short time (e.g., 1.5 seconds), and the opening time of the second start hole 12 when it is determined that the second start hole 12 will be opened is set to a relatively long time (e.g., 1.5 seconds x 3 times).

When comparing these game states in terms of the time it takes for the special symbols to change, the time it takes for the special symbols to change in the "probable win game state" or "time-limited game state" is likely to be set to a relatively shorter time than the time it takes for the special symbols to change in the "normal game state." It goes without saying that the probability of a special game being executed (jackpot probability), the probability of a game being determined to open the second start slot 22 (winning probability of the normal symbol determination), the time it takes for the normal symbols to change, and the time it takes for the second start slot 22 to open, shown in the explanation of each game state, are merely examples, and other probabilities and times may also be used.

In the following explanation, the state in which the support function is provided and it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 22 will be referred to as the "high base state," and the state in which the support function is not provided and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 22 will be referred to as the "low base state." In this embodiment, the "normal game state" corresponds to the low base state, and the "probable game state" and "time-saving game state" correspond to the high base state.

[Game flow]
A game ball hit by a player with the right hand will not enter the first starting hole 21, but may enter the second starting hole 22. However, in a low base state, the second starting hole 22 is difficult to open, and even if it does open, the opening time is short. Therefore, when the game is controlled in a low base state (which corresponds to the "normal game state" in this embodiment), the player will play by hitting with the left hand, aiming at the first starting hole 21.

When a game ball hit from the left side enters the first starting hole 21 during normal game play, a first special symbol determination is executed, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. After that, a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol is displayed as a static first special symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination.

If a losing symbol is displayed, no jackpot game will be played and the game state will not change. On the other hand, if a jackpot symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, a jackpot game will be played in which a predetermined number of rounds corresponding to that jackpot symbol are played, and after the jackpot game ends, the game will be controlled in a "probable win state" or a "time-saving game state."

In addition, when the game state transitions to a "high-base state" or "high-base state" following the end of a jackpot game, that is, when the game state transitions from a low-base state to a high-base state, the support function described above, which makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting hole 22, makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting hole 22 than the first starting hole 21. Therefore, when game play is controlled in a high-base state, the player will play by hitting the ball to the right, aiming at the second starting hole 22. Also, when both the right to determine the first special symbol and the right to determine the second special symbol are reserved, the second special symbol determination is executed with priority over the first special symbol determination. Therefore, when game play is controlled in a high-base state or a high-base state, the second special symbol determination is generally executed.

If a jackpot symbol is displayed as the second special symbol in a probability variable play state or time-limited play state, after the jackpot play ends, the game will generally be controlled in the probability variable play state, but it may also be controlled in the time-limited play state. On the other hand, if a jackpot is not hit in the probability variable play state or time-limited play state, the game state will return from the probability variable play state (or time-limited play state) to the normal play state.

[Regarding special design determination using random numbers]
Next, the determination process using the jackpot random number and the symbol random number will be explained with reference to Figure 6. Here, Figure 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot random number and the symbol random number. In the explanatory diagrams for each random number illustrated in Figure 6 and subsequent figures, the possible range of the random number is set to a smaller range than the actual range in order to facilitate explanation. In the gaming machine 1, when the gaming ball passes through the first start hole 21 (or the second start hole 22), acquired information such as the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number is acquired.

<Processing based on jackpot random numbers>
The jackpot random number illustrated in Figure 6 (A) is a random number used in the jackpot determination process (step S308 in Figure 30) to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be played, and is set separately for a low probability state in which the probability of determining that a jackpot game will be played is relatively low, and a high probability state in which the probability of determining that a jackpot game will be played is relatively high.

In this embodiment, four winning values for the low probability state are stored in the main ROM 82, and the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game will be executed if the acquired jackpot random number matches one of these four winning values when the game is controlled in the low probability state (which in this embodiment corresponds to the "normal game state" and "time-limited game state"). Also, for the high probability state (which in this embodiment corresponds to the "probable variable game state"), 14 winning values are stored in the main ROM 82, and the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game will be executed if the acquired jackpot random number matches one of these 14 winning values when the game is controlled in the high probability state.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number can take on 840 values ranging from "0" to "839" in both the low probability state and the high probability state (see Figure 6 (A)). Therefore, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/210 (= 4/840), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/60 (= 14/840).

<Processing based on random numbers>
When the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game is to be executed, it determines the type of jackpot based on which random number value, among the random numbers preset for each type of jackpot, the symbol random number obtained together with the jackpot random number used in the determination matches. In other words, it selects the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41 (or the second special symbol display device 42) as the jackpot symbol.

(Type of jackpot related to first special symbol determination)
As illustrated in Figure 6 (B), in this embodiment, two types of jackpots are available that can be won in response to a game ball entering the first starting hole 21 during normal game play: "3R Special A" and "3R Normal."

Here, "3R Probable Variety A" (see Figure 6(B)) is a jackpot in which, in response to the jackpot symbol X1 being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, a jackpot game is executed that consists of a total of three long-open round games, including one long-open round game (first round round game) in which the second large prize opening 28 is long-open, and two long-open round games (second and third round round games) in which the first large prize opening 26 is long-open.

If this "3R Probability Variety A" is won, both the second large prize slot 28 and the V prize slot 287 will be fully opened during the first round of play. Therefore, the player can pass the game ball through the V prize slot 287 simply by hitting the ball to the right. If even one game ball is detected by the V prize slot sensor 283 during the first round of play, the game will be controlled in the "probability variation game state" after the jackpot play ends.

In this embodiment, after the jackpot game related to "3R Probable Variety A" ends, the number of times (ST count in FIG. 6(B)) the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) and the variable display of the second special symbol (or first special symbol) are executed in the "probable variation game state" is set to 100 times, and if no jackpot is determined during that time, the probable variation game state continues until 100 special symbol determinations are executed. If all 100 special symbol determinations are misses, 100 times of time-saving game play are then awarded. Here, "time-saving game play" refers to game play that includes the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) executed in the "time-saving game state" and the variable display of the second special symbol (or first special symbol) executed in response to that special symbol determination.

On the other hand, "3R Normal" (see Figure 6(B)) is a jackpot in which, in response to the jackpot symbol X2 being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, a jackpot game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, including one short-open round of play (first round of play) in which the second large prize opening 28 is short-opened, and two long-open round of play (second and third rounds of play) in which the first large prize opening 26 is long-opened. If this "3R Normal" is won, in the first round of play, no prize balls are paid out because no game balls generally enter the second large prize opening 28. Therefore, if "3R Normal" is won, since the number of long-open rounds executed during the jackpot game is two, "3R Normal" can be said to be essentially a two-round jackpot.

If this "3R normal" is won, a short-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is briefly opened is executed as the first round of round play. Therefore, the game ball will not enter the V-shaped hole during the jackpot game related to the 3R normal, and after the jackpot game related to the "3R normal" ends, the game is controlled in a "time-saving game state." In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the number of time-saving cycles for the "3R normal" is set to 100, and when a jackpot game is executed in response to the static display of the jackpot symbol X2 on the first special symbol display 41 (which indicates that the "3R normal" has been won), unless a jackpot is determined along the way, the game is controlled in a time-saving game state until 100 second special symbol determinations (or first special symbol determinations) are performed after the jackpot game ends.

In this way, "3R Probable A" is a jackpot with both 100 STs and 100 time-saving cycles (the number of time-saving cycles), while "3R Normal" is a jackpot with 0 STs and 100 time-saving cycles (see Figure 6 (B)).

However, even though winning "3R Probability A" grants the right to have gameplay controlled in the "probability variable game state" after the jackpot game ends, it is conceivable that a situation may arise in which the game ball is not detected by the V entry sensor 283 during the first round of round play due to, for example, a ball jam in the play area 3. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, even if such a situation occurs, in order to allow the player to easily aim for a jackpot after the jackpot game ends, if the game ball does not enter the V during the first round of round play related to "3R Probability A," 100 time-saving games are awarded after the jackpot game ends. In other words, the game is controlled in the same way as after the jackpot game related to "3R Normal" ends.

In this embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is a jackpot, a random number value is stored in the main ROM 82 to determine the type of jackpot. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6(B), 50 random number values are stored for "3R Probable A," and 50 random number values are stored for "3R Normal."

In this embodiment, the possible range of the symbol random number is set to 100 numbers from "0" to "99." When a jackpot is determined based on the jackpot random number obtained in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 21, "3R Probable A" is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination at a rate of 50% (= 50/100 x 100), and "3R Normal" is also selected at a rate of 50% (= 50/100 x 100) (see Figure 6 (B)).

For this reason, when the result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, the probability that the jackpot symbol X1 indicating "3R Probable Variety A" will be displayed stopped on the first special symbol display 41, and the probability that the jackpot symbol X2 indicating "3R Normal" will be displayed stopped on the first special symbol display 41 are both 50%.

In this way, if the result of the first special symbol determination during normal play is "3R Probable A" or "3R Normal," in either case, the high base state will be reached after the jackpot play ends, and the player will play by hitting the ball to the right, aiming at gate 25 and second starting hole 22.

(Type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination)
As illustrated in Figure 6 (C), there are four types of jackpots related to the second special pattern determination that is executed in response to the game ball entering the second starting hole 22: "10R Probable Change A,""10R Probable Change B,""3R Probable Change B," and "3R Probable Change C."

Here, "10R Probable Variety A" (see Figure 6(C)) is a jackpot in which, in response to the jackpot symbol Y1 being stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, a jackpot game is executed that consists of a total of 10 long-open round games, including one long-open round game (first round round game) that long-opens the second large prize opening 28 (and V prize opening 287) and nine long-open round games (second to tenth round round games) that long-open the first large prize opening 26.

"10R Probability Change B" (see Figure 6(C)) is a jackpot in which, in response to the jackpot symbol Y2 being displayed on the second special symbol display 42, a jackpot consisting of a total of 10 long-open round games is executed, including one long-open round game (first round game) in which the second large prize entry port 28 (and V prize entry port 287) is long-opened, and nine long-open round games (second to tenth round games) in which the first large prize entry port 26 is long-opened, just like when "10R Probability Change A" is won.

On the other hand, if "3R Probability Change B" is won, the second special symbol display 42 will display a stopped jackpot symbol Y3, and if "3R Probability Change C" is won, the second special symbol display 42 will display a stopped jackpot symbol Y4 (see FIG. 6(C)). If "3R Probability Change B" or "3R Probability Change C" is won, a total of three long-open round games will be played, just like when "3R Probability Change A" (see FIG. 6(B)) is won: one long-open round game (first round round game) in which the second large prize entry port 28 (and V prize entry port 287) is long-open, and two long-open round games (second and third round round games) in which the first large prize entry port 26 is long-open.

In this way, if a player wins "10R Probability Change A," "10R Probability Change B," "3R Probability Change B," or "3R Probability Change C," both the second large prize slot 28 and the V prize slot 287 will be fully opened during the first round of play. Therefore, as long as the player hits the right button during the first round of play related to these jackpots, they can easily obtain the right to play in the "probability change play state" after the jackpot play ends.

For these four types of jackpots related to the second special symbol determination, the number of STs and time-saving periods described above are set as follows: For "10R Probable Change A" and "3R Probable Change B," both the number of STs and the number of time-saving periods are set to "100." For "10R Probable Change B" and "3R Probable Change C," the number of STs is set to "100" and the number of time-saving periods is set to "0." Therefore, if you win "10R Probable Change B" or "3R Probable Change C," and all 100 special symbol determinations after the jackpot play ends are misses, the game state will return to the "normal game state." However, if you win "10R Probable Change A" or "3R Probable Change B," and all 100 special symbol determinations after the jackpot play ends are misses, the game state will transition from the "probable change game state" to the "time-saving game state."

For this reason, it can be said that the probability of a player hitting a jackpot in a high base state is higher if they win "10R Probable Change A" or "3R Probable Change B" than if they win "10R Probable Change B" or "3R Probable Change C."

In this embodiment, when the result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, a random number value for determining the type of jackpot is stored in the main ROM 82. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 6(C), 30 random number values are stored for "10R Probability Change A," 45 random number values are stored for "10R Probability Change B," 10 random number values are stored for "3R Probability Change B," and 15 random number values are stored for "3R Probability Change C."

In this embodiment, the possible range of the symbol random number is set to 100 numbers from "0" to "99" as described above. When a jackpot is determined based on the jackpot random number obtained in response to a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 21, the type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is as follows: "10R Probable Change A" is selected at a rate of 30% (= 30/100 x 100), "10R Probable Change B" is selected at a rate of 45% (= 45/100 x 100), "3R Probable Change B" is selected at a rate of 10% (= 10/100 x 100), and "3R Probable Change C" is selected at a rate of 15% (= 15/100 x 100) (see Figure 6 (C)).

For this reason, when the result of the second special pattern determination is a jackpot, the probability that the jackpot pattern Y1 indicating "10R Probable Change A" will be displayed stopped on the second special pattern display 42 is 30%, the probability that the jackpot pattern Y2 indicating "10R Probable Change B" will be displayed stopped on the second special pattern display 42 is 45%, the probability that the jackpot pattern Y3 indicating "3R Probable Change B" will be displayed stopped on the second special pattern display 42 is 10%, and the probability that the jackpot pattern Y4 indicating "3R Probable Change C" will be displayed stopped on the second special pattern display 42 is 15%.

<Processing based on reach random numbers>
When the main CPU 81 determines not to execute a jackpot game, it determines whether to execute a reach effect or a no-reach effect based on whether the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used for the determination matches with a random number corresponding to a reach effect or a no-reach effect.

Although not shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the main ROM 82 stores 10 random number values for reach effects, and the main CPU 81 determines to perform reach effects when the acquired reach random number matches any of these 10 random number values. Furthermore, 90 random number values are stored for non-reach effects, and the main CPU 81 determines to perform non-reach effects when the acquired reach random number matches any of these 90 random number values. In this embodiment, the possible range of reach random numbers is set to "0" to "99." If it is determined that a jackpot game will not be played, the probability that a reach effect will be performed is 10% (= 10/100 x 100), and the probability that a reach effect will not be performed (the probability that a non-reach effect will be performed) is 90% (= 90/100 x 100).

When the main CPU 81 determines that a reach effect is to be performed, it selects, as the special symbol variation pattern, a variation pattern in which a variation pattern of a performance symbol accompanied by a reach effect is selected by the sub-control board 90. Conversely, when it determines that a non-reach effect is to be performed, it selects, as the special symbol variation pattern, a variation pattern in which a variation pattern of a performance symbol not accompanied by a reach effect is selected by the sub-control board 90.

[About the game flow]
Next, the flow of the game will be explained with reference to FIG. 7 . Here, FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the gaming machine 1. Due to the board configuration of the gaming board 2, a gaming ball shot into the left gaming area 3L can enter the first starting hole 21, while a gaming ball shot into the right gaming area 3R cannot enter the first starting hole 21. Furthermore, during normal gaming mode, the second starting hole 22 is unlikely to open, and even if it does, the opening time of the second starting hole 22 is extremely short, making it extremely unlikely that a gaming ball will enter the second starting hole 22. Therefore, there is no advantage for a player to hit the ball to the right during normal gaming mode. As is clear from these facts, normal gaming mode is a left-side advantageous state in which shooting a gaming ball into the left gaming area 3L is more likely to result in a jackpot (special symbol determination is more likely to be executed) than shooting a gaming ball into the right gaming area 3R. Therefore, players generally hit the ball to the left during normal gaming mode.

When a game ball hit from the left side enters the first starting hole 21 during normal game mode, a first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is displayed variably on the first special symbol display 41, a first special symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination is displayed as a static first special symbol. Here, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a "miss," a missing symbol is displayed as a static first special symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot," one of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 (see Figure 6 (B)) is displayed as a static jackpot symbol, and a jackpot game corresponding to the static jackpot symbol is executed. These jackpot games are as described above with reference to Figure 6 (B).

When the result of the first special symbol determination in normal game mode is a "jackpot," there are two cases where a jackpot symbol indicating a special jackpot (jackpot symbol X1: see Figure 6(B)) is displayed as a stopped symbol (see Figure 7(A)), and there are also cases where a jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot (jackpot symbol X2: see Figure 6(B)) is displayed as a stopped symbol (see Figure 7(D)).

Here, if the jackpot symbol X1, which indicates a probability variable jackpot, is displayed, the jackpot game described above is executed based on Figure 6 (B). When this jackpot game is executed, provided that the game ball enters the V prize during the long-open round game (during the first round of round game) in which the second large prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 are long-open, the game is controlled in the probability variable game state after the jackpot game ends (see Figure 7 (B)). As described above, this probability variable game state continues until 100 special symbol determinations (and variable special symbol displays) are made, unless a jackpot is determined during the process. On the other hand, if a jackpot game including the above-mentioned long open round game is played but the game ball does not enter the V due to, for example, a ball jam in the game area 3, after the jackpot game ends, the game will be controlled in a time-saving game state that can continue until the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) is performed 100 times (see Figure 7 (C)).

Here, in the probability variable game state, the probability of winning the normal symbol determination, which is performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through gate 25, is set to a relatively high probability (11/11 in this embodiment), and the opening time of second starting hole 22 in the event of a winning normal symbol determination is set to a relatively long time (1.5 seconds x 3 times in this embodiment). For this reason, the probability variable game state is a right-side advantageous state in which it is easier to hit a jackpot (it is easier to execute a special symbol determination) by shooting the game ball into right game area 3R than by shooting it into left game area 3L. For this reason, when gameplay is controlled in the probability variable game state, the player will hit to the right. This is also true when gameplay is controlled in the time-saving game state, which is a high base state like the probability variable game state.

When a game ball hit to the right enters the second starting hole 22 while the game is controlled in a special probability game state, a second special pattern determination is executed, and after the second special pattern is displayed variably on the second special pattern display 42, a second special pattern indicating the result of the second special pattern determination is displayed as a static second special pattern. Here, if the result of the second special pattern determination is a "miss," a missing pattern is displayed as a static second special pattern. On the other hand, if the result of the second special pattern determination is a "jackpot," one of the jackpot patterns Y1 to Y4 (see Figure 6 (C)) is displayed as a static jackpot pattern for a special probability jackpot (see Figure 7 (F)), and a jackpot game corresponding to the static jackpot pattern is executed. Here, if the game ball enters the V during a jackpot game, the game will be controlled again in the variable probability game state after the jackpot game ends (see Figure 7 (B)); if the game ball does not enter the V during a jackpot game, the game will be controlled in the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends (see Figure 7 (C)).

Furthermore, when a game ball hit to the right enters the second starting hole 22 while the game is controlled in the time-saving game mode, a second special pattern determination is executed, and after the second special pattern is displayed variably on the second special pattern display 42, a second special pattern indicating the result of the second special pattern determination is displayed as a static second special pattern. Here, if the result of the second special pattern determination is a "miss," a missing pattern is displayed as a static second special pattern. On the other hand, if the result of the second special pattern determination is a "jackpot," one of the jackpot patterns Y1 to Y4 (see Figure 6 (C)) is displayed as a static jackpot pattern for a special jackpot (see Figure 7 (I)), and a jackpot game corresponding to the static jackpot pattern is executed. Here, if the game ball enters the V during a jackpot game, the game will be controlled in a guaranteed variable game state after the jackpot game ends (see Figure 7 (J)); if the game ball does not enter the V during a jackpot game, the game will be controlled again in a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends (see Figure 7 (K)).

In addition, if no jackpot is determined during the time-saving game state, which continues until 100 special symbol determinations (and special symbol variable displays) have been made, the game state will be returned from the time-saving game state to the normal game state (see Figure 7 (L)).

Furthermore, as described above based on Figure 6(C), the jackpots related to the second special symbol determination include "10R Probability Change A" and "3R Probability Change B," which also award 100 times of time-saving play after 100 times of probability change play, and "10R Probability Change B" and "3R Probability Change C," which do not award time-saving play after 100 times of probability change play. Therefore, if a transition to a probability change play state occurs following the end of a jackpot play related to "10R Probability Change A" or "3R Probability Change B," and a transition to a time-saving play state will continue until 100 times of time-saving play have been played, if no jackpot is determined until 100 special symbol determinations (and special symbol variable display) have been made, the state will transition to a time-saving play state that will continue until 100 times of time-saving play have been played (see Figure 7(H)). On the other hand, if the game transitions to the probability variable game state following the end of a jackpot game involving "10R probability variable B" or "3R probability variable C," the game state will be returned from the probability variable game state to the normal game state if no jackpot is determined until 100 special symbol determinations (and special symbol variable displays) have been made (see Figure 7 (G)).

[About the changing effects]
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, various effects are performed on the display screen 70 as the first special pattern (or second special pattern) is displayed in a changing manner and then stopped. Here, we will explain the changing effects that are performed on the display screen 70 as the first special pattern is displayed in a changing manner.

In the gaming machine 1, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21 and a first special pattern determination is executed, the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the first special pattern display 41, and then a static display of the first special pattern indicating the result of the first special pattern determination is displayed. The display screen 70 is provided with a performance pattern display area 73 (see Figure 2) in which a performance pattern announcing the result of the first special pattern determination (or second special pattern determination) is displayed, and in conjunction with the display of the first special pattern, a performance including a display of the performance pattern is displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 2). Then, when the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner for a variable time according to the variation pattern selected when the first special pattern determination is executed, as this first special pattern is displayed in a static manner, a performance pattern indicating the result of the first special pattern determination is displayed in a static manner.

During the display of such changing effect symbols, a so-called reach effect may be performed. Specifically, in the effect symbol display area 73 of the display screen 70, for example, three horizontal rows of portions of the effect symbol row, each row consisting of the numbers 1 through 9 written vertically in succession from bottom to top, are displayed. When the display of the first special symbol begins, these symbol rows are displayed in a scrolling fashion from top to bottom (scrolling display). In contrast, when a reach effect is performed, before all effect symbols are displayed in a stopped state, for example, the effect symbols in the left column (left symbol) and the effect symbols in the right column (right symbol) are pseudo-stopped in sequence or simultaneously, without completely stopping. Figure 2 illustrates a state in which three symbols are pseudo-stopped as the left symbol and three symbols are pseudo-stopped as the right symbol, while the middle symbol row continues to scroll. Note that a pseudo-stop is an effect in which the effect symbols oscillate in place with almost no movement, and in the following explanation, it may be referred to as a pseudo-stop to distinguish it from a real stop (sometimes simply called a "stop display") in which the effect symbols come to a complete standstill.

When the same effect symbols on the left and right sides pseudo-stop on an active line, a reach is achieved, and a reach effect is performed, inviting the player to hope for three identical effect symbols to line up. This reach effect involves pseudo-stopping the reach symbols (left and right symbols) while slowly scrolling the effect symbols (middle symbols) that make up the middle row of symbols so that the player can identify them, and finally stopping a middle symbol that is the same as the reach symbol, or a middle symbol that is different from the reach symbol, on an active line to notify the player of whether they have won or lost.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in addition to the effect symbols, other display objects such as characters and items are used in these reach effects. In the following explanation, in the variable effects in which reach effects are performed, the effects that are performed before the reach is achieved may be referred to as "pre-reach effects."

The types of reach effects will be described in detail later, but if the result of the first special symbol determination is a "miss," three effect symbols indicating a reach miss (for example, "323") will pseudo-stop to notify of a miss, and these three effect symbols will actually stop as the missing symbol is displayed as a stopped first special symbol. On the other hand, if a reach effect is not performed, three effect symbols indicating a scatter symbol (for example, "629") will pseudo-stop to notify of a miss, and these three effect symbols will actually stop as the losing symbol is displayed as a stopped first special symbol. In this way, if it is determined that a jackpot game will not be played, a miss notification effect is executed in which three effect symbols are pseudo-stopped with a reach miss or scatter symbol indicating a miss, and then actually stop to notify of a miss (a jackpot game will not be played).

When this miss notification effect is executed, the jackpot game will not be played, and if the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the first special symbol and effect symbol will be displayed statically for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds), after which the reserved first special symbol determination will be made, and the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to this determination will begin.

On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot," a reach effect is usually executed while the first special symbol is being displayed, and three effect symbols showing a repeating number (for example, "333") are pseudo-stopped to indicate a jackpot, and these three effect symbols then come to a real stop as the jackpot symbol is displayed as the first special symbol. In this way, when it is determined that a jackpot game will be played, a win notification effect is executed, which pseudo-stops the three effect symbols in a manner indicating a jackpot, and then stops them in a real stop to indicate a jackpot (that a jackpot game will be played). When this win notification effect is executed, the jackpot game is played.

[Screen configuration of display screen 70]
2 illustrates an example of the screen configuration of the display screen 70 in a normal game state. When a game is controlled in a normal game state, as illustrated in FIG. 2, a reserved icon display area 71, an icon display area 72, and an effect symbol display area 73 are formed on the display screen 70. As described above, the effect symbol display area 73 is a display area in which the left symbols constituting the left symbol row, the middle symbols constituting the middle symbol row, and the right symbols constituting the right symbol row are displayed.

<Hold icon display area 71>
The reserved icon display area 71 is a display area where a reserved icon indicating that the first special symbol determination is on hold is displayed. In the gaming machine 1, if a gaming ball enters the first start hole 21 in a situation where the special symbol determination and the special symbol variable display cannot be started immediately, such as during the variable display of the special symbol or during a jackpot game, the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number (four in this embodiment).

In this way, when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the reserved icon display area 71 displays the same number of reserved icons as the number of reserved first special symbol determinations indicated by the first special symbol reservation indicator 44. Figure 2 shows an example of a state in which two reserved icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 to indicate that the number of reserved first special symbol determinations is "2."

If a hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 when a highly reliable reach effect such as an SPSP reach, which will be described later, is being performed, not only will the display area used for the reach effect be limited, but the display of the hold icon may also reduce the interest of the reach effect. For this reason, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment displays the display objects (in this embodiment, the hold icon base) and hold icons that make up the hold icon display area 71 during a normal reach or SP reach, but as the reach effect progresses from a normal reach or SP reach to an SPSP reach, the display objects and hold icons that make up the hold icon display area 71 are erased from the display screen 70, and after the SPSP reach has ended, the display objects and hold icons that make up the hold icon display area 71 are displayed again.

Furthermore, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the game ball will not generally enter the second starting hole 22. Therefore, in the normal game state, the right to determine the second special symbol is not generally reserved, and the reserved icon related to the second special symbol determination is not displayed on the display screen 70, nor is a display area for displaying this reserved icon formed.

<Icon Display Area 72>
The icon display area 72 is a display area that displays the icon as a variation suggesting image that suggests that the first special symbol is being displayed in a varying manner. The icon is displayed in the icon display area 72 as the display of the first special symbol begins to vary, and is erased from the icon display area 72, for example, when the first special symbol is displayed stationary. However, the timing of erasing the icon is not limited to this, and the icon may be erased while the first special symbol is being displayed in a varying manner. For example, the icon may be erased when an SPSP reach, which will be described later, develops or during an SPSP reach.

If a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 when the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed and the right to make a special symbol determination is not reserved, the variable display of the first special symbol begins, and the icon is displayed in the icon display area 72. On the other hand, when a reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 and the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 ends, a first special symbol determination is executed for the earliest reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 (the reserved icon displayed closest to the icon display area 72). Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol begins in response to the execution of this first special symbol determination, the earliest reserved icon shifts from the reserved icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72 and is displayed as the new icon. In this way, the reserved icon (here, the icon) shifted to the icon display area 72 is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 (see Figure 2). This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 rather than the reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 71.

In addition, if a hold icon other than the first hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, as the first hold icon shifts to the icon display area 72, the other hold icons in the hold icon display area 71 will shift closer to the icon display area 72. As is clear from the explanation so far, in the gaming machine 1, an icon corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 may be displayed in the icon display area 72, so in the following explanation, when there is no need to distinguish between the hold icon and the icon, they may be collectively referred to simply as "icons."

(About the icon change effects)
The hold icon is usually displayed as a white hold icon (default hold icon). In contrast, an icon change effect may be performed in which the color of a hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 changes. When this icon change effect is performed, the white hold icon changes to a hold icon of a color indicating the reliability of a jackpot, such as blue, green, or red. The colors indicating the reliability of a jackpot, as illustrated here, are arranged in order from lowest to highest reliability of a jackpot. Red is likely to be selected when the result of the first special pattern determination corresponding to the red hold icon is a "jackpot" or when the result is a "miss" but the special pattern change time is set to a relatively long time. Green is likely to be selected when the result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" but the special pattern change time is set to a medium time. Blue is likely to be selected when the result is a "miss" or when the result is a "miss" but the special pattern change time is set to a relatively short time. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of a white reserved icon is set to approximately 1%, the jackpot reliability of a blue reserved icon is set to approximately 3%, the jackpot reliability of a green reserved icon is set to approximately 15%, and the jackpot reliability of a red reserved icon is set to approximately 45%.

Note that while the example described here is one in which an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of a reserved icon changes only once when it is displayed in the reserved icon display area 71, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment may also perform other icon change effects. That is, for example, an icon change effect may be performed in which the display color of a single reserved icon changes multiple times, such as when a white reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 and changes to a blue reserved icon and then to a green reserved icon. Also, when a white reserved icon has shifted from the reserved icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72 and is displayed as that icon, an icon change effect may be performed in which the display color of the white reserved icon changes.

In some cases, an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the icon changes in both the hold icon display area 71 and the icon display area 72, such that the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 changes, and then the display color changes when the hold icon shifts to the icon display area 72 and is displayed as that icon.In other cases, an icon change effect is performed in which the hold icon is initially displayed in a color other than white (for example, blue), or an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of a hold icon whose initial color is other than white is changed.

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment displays reserved information on the display screen 70 indicating that the right to determine a special symbol is reserved, and is capable of changing the display mode of this reserved information. Note that in the following description, reserved icons and icons with a display color other than white may be referred to as "special icons" to distinguish them from regular reserved icons and icons with a display color of white.

[Modification regarding display control of hold information]
The display control of the pending information is not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, and may be as follows: That is, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the display colors of the icons (pending icons and the icons) are four colors: white, blue, green, and red, but in other embodiments, other colors may be prepared, such as gold, which indicates an even higher probability of winning than red, or rainbow colors, which are selected only when a "jackpot" occurs.

In addition, this embodiment will be described using an example of an icon change effect that changes the display color of an icon (a pending icon or the icon in question), but the icon change effect is not limited to the effects exemplified in this embodiment as long as it changes the display mode of the icon, and may also be an icon change effect that changes the shape or size of the icon, or an icon change effect that changes the display color in addition to the shape or size of the icon, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the icon change effect for the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71, a case is described in which an icon change effect for the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 can be executed. However, in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which only the former icon change effect can be executed without providing the icon display area 72 (without displaying the icon).

In addition, in this embodiment, an example will be described in which a hold icon is displayed on the display screen 70 as hold information, and the display color of the hold icon is changed. In contrast to this, in other embodiments, for example, four color LEDs with changeable light colors may be provided, and the same number of LEDs as the number of holds for the first special pattern determination may be lit, and the display mode of the hold information may be changed by changing the light color of one of the LEDs.

[Regarding pre-determination processing]
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the right to make the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is reserved, a pre-determination process may be performed to determine whether or not a jackpot game will be executed before the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is executed for that right. For example, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 21 during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state, the main CPU 81 acquires acquired information such as a jackpot random number in response to the gaming ball entering the first start hole 21, and performs a similar jackpot determination process based on the acquired jackpot random number prior to the jackpot determination process (see step S308 in FIG. 30 ) in the first special symbol determination that is executed when the variable display of the first special symbol begins, thereby determining in advance whether or not a "jackpot" will be determined when the first special symbol determination is executed. In addition, based on the fluctuation pattern random number obtained together with the jackpot random number, a process similar to the fluctuation pattern selection process in step S309 of Figure 30 is performed to determine in advance which fluctuation pattern will be selected when the first special pattern determination is executed.

In this way, when the main CPU 81 performs a preliminary determination process in response to the reservation of the right to determine the first special pattern, it sends a reservation command including preliminary determination information indicating the result of the preliminary determination to the sub-control board 90. In response, the sub-CPU 91 executes a pre-reading effect based on the preliminary determination information included in the reservation command, which creates an expectation that a winning notification effect will be executed as a result of the variable display of the first special pattern that is executed in response to the execution of the reserved first special pattern determination.

An example of this predictive effect is the icon change effect described above. When the sub-CPU 91 receives a hold command containing advance judgment information from the main control board 80, it determines whether or not to execute an icon change effect based on that advance judgment information. If it decides to execute an icon change effect, it determines the change pattern to use to change the display mode (icon color, etc.) of the icon (hold icon or the icon in question), and causes the image and sound control board 100 to execute an icon change effect based on the result of that decision.

In addition to the icon change effect, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can also execute various other predictive effects such as a weak chance eye effect (see Figure 8(C)), a first effect pattern focus effect (see Figure 8(D)), a strong chance eye effect (see Figure 8(E)), a second effect pattern focus effect (see Figure 8(F)), and a pre-swing effect (see Figure 22(B)); these predictive effects will be described in more detail later.

[Main effects in normal game mode]
Next, the flow of the main effects in the normal gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 8. Here, Fig. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the main effects in the normal gaming state. Note that "pre-read target change" in Fig. 8 means the change display of the first special symbol (and effect symbol) that is performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination that was the subject of the advance determination process, and "pre-target change" means the change display of the first special symbol (and effect symbol) that is performed before the pre-read target change.

(Pre-target fluctuation)
First, as a "pre-target variation," the display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol begins (see FIG. 8A). Specifically, as the display of the first special symbol begins, the display screen 70 begins scrolling the three symbol rows in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIG. 2). Here, if the result of the first special symbol determination performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-target variation is a "miss," and a variation pattern in which a "no-reach effect" is performed is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, at least three effect symbols whose left and right symbols are different from each other (for example, the three effect symbols of "436") are pseudo-stopped at the end of the display of the first special symbol variation, and as a missing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a no-reach miss notification effect in which the three effect symbols are actually stopped as they are may be executed (see FIG. 8B).

The sub-CPU 91 executes various pre-reading effects using a symbol change that results in a non-reach change effect, in which no reach effect is executed, as a "pre-target change." In the example shown in Figure 8, the sub-CPU 91 executes a weak chance eye effect (see Figure 8 (C)) and a first effect symbol attention effect (see Figure 8 (D)) in the "pre-target change" based on the results of a preliminary determination regarding the "pre-reading target change."

(Weak chance effect)
The weak chance eye effect (see FIG. 8(C)) is an effect in which three effect symbols representing a weak chance eye, including two first effect symbols, are pseudo-stopped during the display of the first special symbol associated with the target-preceding variation in which no reach effect is performed. In this embodiment, the first effect symbols are even-numbered symbols, and examples of weak chance eyes include "221,""443," and "889," each consisting of two even-numbered symbols and one odd-numbered symbol. FIG. 12(C) illustrates an example of a weak chance eye effect displaying "443," consisting of two 4 symbols and one 3 symbol. Note that the combination of three effect symbols representing a weak chance eye is merely an example; in other embodiments, a different configuration from this embodiment may be adopted, such as displaying three even-numbered symbols as a weak chance eye.

(First performance pattern featured performance)
The first effect symbol attention effect (an example of an "other attention effect": see FIG. 8(D)) is an effect that draws attention to the first effect symbol (in this embodiment, an even-numbered symbol) when a reach effect is not being executed. FIG. 12(D) illustrates an example in which the left 4 symbol and the center 4 symbol displayed in the weak chance eye effect of FIG. 12(C) are enlarged, and blue rain is pouring from rain clouds onto the left 4 symbol and the center 4 symbol, thereby increasing the attention paid to these two 4 symbols. When this first effect symbol attention effect is executed, a sound effect for the first effect symbol attention effect is output from speaker 38. Thus, in the first effect symbol attention effect in this embodiment, an effect display is displayed showing blue rain pouring onto the left 4 symbol and the center 4 symbol, thereby guiding the player's gaze to the left 4 symbol and the center 4 symbol, and it is possible to effectively increase the attention paid to the left 4 symbol and the center 4 symbol.

In this embodiment, an example is given where there are two first effect symbols that draw the player's attention, but the number of first effect symbols that draw the player's attention is not limited to two and may be one or three. Furthermore, the first effect symbols are not limited to even-numbered symbols and may be odd-numbered symbols. Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example is given where the weak chance eye effect and the first effect symbol attention effect are performed in sequence, but these effects may be performed simultaneously. Furthermore, a configuration different from this embodiment may be adopted, such as performing the first effect symbol attention effect when the weak chance eye effect is not being performed (for example, when the first effect symbol is displayed without a reach being achieved during a predictive target change).

On the other hand, the sub-CPU 91 may execute a strong chance eye effect (see Figure 8 (E)) and a second effect pattern attention effect (see Figure 8 (F)) in the "pre-target change" based on the results of the advance judgment regarding the "pre-read target change."

(Strong chance effect)
The strong chance eye effect (see FIG. 8(E)) is an effect in which three effect symbols representing a strong chance eye, including two second effect symbols, are pseudo-stopped during the display of the first special symbol associated with the target-preceding variation in which no reach effect is performed. In this embodiment, the second effect symbols are odd-numbered symbols. Examples of strong chance eyes include "334,""556," and "776," which are composed of two odd-numbered symbols and one even-numbered symbol. FIG. 12(G) illustrates a strong chance eye effect displaying "776," which is composed of two 7 symbols and one 6 symbol. Note that the combination of three effect symbols representing a strong chance eye is merely an example. In other embodiments, a different configuration from this embodiment may be adopted, such as displaying three odd-numbered symbols as a weak chance eye.

(Second performance pattern attention performance)
The second effect symbol attention effect (an example of an "other attention effect": see FIG. 8(F)) is an effect that draws attention to the second effect symbol (in this embodiment, an odd number symbol) when a reach effect is not being executed. FIG. 12(H) illustrates an example in which the left 7 symbol and the middle 7 symbol displayed in the strong chance eye effect of FIG. 12(G) are enlarged, and red lightning strikes the left 7 symbol and the middle 7 symbol, thereby increasing the attention paid to these two 7 symbols. When this second effect symbol attention effect is executed, a sound effect for the second effect symbol attention effect is output from speaker 38. Thus, in this embodiment, the second effect symbol attention effect displays an effect in which red lightning strikes the left 7 symbol and the middle 7 symbol, thereby guiding the player's gaze to the left 7 symbol and the middle 7 symbol, thereby effectively increasing the attention paid to the left 7 symbol and the middle 7 symbol.

Comparing the effect images used in the first effect symbol attention effect with those used in the second effect symbol attention effect, the first effect symbol attention effect (see Figure 12 (D)) uses an effect image depicting rain clouds and blue rain, while the second effect symbol attention effect (see Figure 12 (H)) uses an effect image depicting a red lightning strike. In this way, the second effect symbol attention effect uses an effect image of a more noticeable color than the effect image used in the first effect symbol attention effect, so when comparing these effect symbol attention effects, it can be said that the second effect symbol attention effect is more effective at drawing attention to the left and center patterns than the first effect symbol attention effect.

In this embodiment, an example is given in which there are two second effect symbols that draw the player's attention, but the number of second effect symbols that draw the player's attention is not limited to two and may be one or three. Furthermore, the second effect symbols are not limited to odd-numbered symbols; for example, only a specific symbol among the odd-numbered symbols (e.g., symbol 7) may be drawn to the player as the second effect symbol. In this embodiment, an example is given in which the strong chance eye effect and the second effect symbol attention effect are performed in sequence, but these effects may be performed simultaneously. Furthermore, a configuration different from this embodiment may be adopted in which the second effect symbol attention effect is performed when the strong chance eye effect is not being performed (for example, when the second effect symbol is displayed without a reach being achieved during a predictive target change).

(Number of pre-target variations)
So far, we have explained the various pre-reading effects that are executed in pre-target variations based on the results of advance judgment regarding the right to determine the first special pattern corresponding to the pre-reading target variation. However, as is clear from the flow of effects returning from Figure 8 (B) to Figure 8 (A), the number of times a pre-target variation in which a pre-reading effect is executed is executed is not limited to one, and there may be multiple pre-target variations in which each pre-reading effect is executed before a pre-reading target variation.

For example, if two pre-target variations occur before a pre-read target variation, a weak chance eye effect (see FIG. 8(C)) and a first effect pattern focus effect (see FIG. 8(D)) may be executed during the first pre-target variation, and then a strong chance eye effect (see FIG. 8(E)) and a second effect pattern focus effect (see FIG. 8(F)) may be executed during the second pre-target variation. Also, for example, if two pre-target variations occur before a pre-read target variation, a weak chance eye effect (see FIG. 8(C)) and a first effect pattern focus effect (see FIG. 8(D)) may be executed during the first pre-target variation, and then a weak chance eye effect (see FIG. 8(C)) and a first effect pattern focus effect (see FIG. 8(D)) may be executed during the second pre-target variation. Also, for example, if two pre-target variations occur before a predictive target variation, a strong chance eye effect (see Figure 8(E)) and a second variation symbol focus effect (see Figure 8(F)) may be executed during the first pre-target variation, and a strong chance eye effect (see Figure 8(E)) and a second variation symbol focus effect (see Figure 8(F)) may also be executed during the second pre-target variation.

Furthermore, if three pre-target variations occur before a predictive target variation, for example, a weak chance eye effect (see FIG. 8(C)) and a first variation symbol focus effect (see FIG. 8(D)) may be executed during the first pre-target variation, and then a weak chance eye effect (see FIG. 8(C)) and a first variation symbol focus effect (see FIG. 8(D)) may be executed during the second pre-target variation, and a strong chance eye effect (see FIG. 8(E)) and a second variation symbol focus effect (see FIG. 8(F)) may be executed during the third pre-target variation. Furthermore, for example, a weak chance eye effect (see FIG. 8(C)) and a first variation symbol focus effect (see FIG. 8(D)) may be executed during all of the first through third pre-target variations, or a strong chance eye effect (see FIG. 8(E)) and a second variation symbol focus effect (see FIG. 8(F)) may be executed during all of the first through third pre-target variations.

(First performance pattern attention performance and second performance pattern attention)
As is clear from the explanation so far, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute both a first effect symbol attention effect that draws attention to the first effect symbol and a second effect symbol attention effect that draws attention to the second effect symbol when not executing a reach effect. Therefore, by executing the first effect symbol attention effect (see FIG. 12(D)) in the target-ahead variation, it is possible to make the player expect that various attention effects, which will be described later, will be executed in the pre-read target variation. Furthermore, by executing the second effect symbol attention effect (see FIG. 12(H)) in the target-ahead variation, it is possible to make the player expect that various attention effects will be executed in the pre-read target variation.

In addition, when comparing the first performance symbol focus effect and the second performance symbol focus effect, when the second performance symbol focus effect is executed, there is a higher chance that various focus effects and winning notification effects will be executed in the pre-read target variation than when the first performance symbol focus effect is executed, and it can be said that the second performance symbol focus effect has a higher reliability of resulting in a jackpot than the first performance symbol focus effect. For this reason, players can enjoy playing while hoping that the second performance symbol focus effect will be executed instead of the first performance symbol focus effect in the pre-target variation, or that the second performance symbol focus effect will be executed in the pre-target variation after the pre-target variation in which the first performance symbol focus effect was executed.

Also, although not shown in Figure 8, when a pre-target change is being performed, a hold icon indicating that a pre-read target change is on hold is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (see Figure 2), and an icon change effect may be performed on the hold icon corresponding to this pre-read target change.A high performance effect can be achieved through the synergistic effect of the icon change effect targeting the hold icon corresponding to the pre-read target change, the weak chance eye effect (or strong chance eye effect), and the first performance pattern focus effect (or second performance pattern focus effect), and by executing these pre-target effects in combination, it is possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for the execution of a winning notification effect during the pre-read target change.

In this embodiment, an example is given in which the first performance symbol focus effect is always executed in conjunction with a weak chance eye effect, but in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the first performance symbol focus effect is executed in some cases in which a weak chance eye effect is executed. Also, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the second performance symbol focus effect is always executed in conjunction with a strong chance eye effect, but in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the second performance symbol focus effect is executed in some cases in which a strong chance eye effect is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect images used for the first effect symbol focus effect and the effect images used for the second effect symbol focus are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the content and display colors of the effect images used may be different. In other embodiments, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the first effect symbol focus effect is executed when a weak chance eye effect is not being performed in the target-front variation, or a configuration in which the second effect symbol focus effect is executed when a strong chance eye effect is not being performed in the target-front variation.

In addition, while this embodiment describes an example in which the display screen 70 and speaker 35 are used for the first and second performance symbol attention effects, the performance means used for these performance symbol attention effects are not limited to this, and in other embodiments, these performance symbol attention effects may be performed using any one of multiple performance means, such as the display screen 70, speaker 35, frame lamp 37, panel lamp 5, and movable decorative member 14, or two or more of these performance means may be combined to perform these performance symbol attention effects. For example, when the first performance symbol attention effect is performed using the panel lamp 5 alone, one example of an effect would be to have the color LEDs that are close to the left and center patterns among the multiple color LEDs that make up the panel lamp 5 emit blue light, and the other color LEDs emit light in a color different from blue.

(Prediction target fluctuations)
Next, the effects in the pre-read target variation (the variation) will be explained. In the pre-read target variation, as in the case where a pre-target variation is started, first, as the display of the first special symbol begins to vary, scrolling display of three symbol rows in the variation symbol display area 73 begins on the display screen 70. Here, if the result of the first special symbol determination made at the start of the variation of the pre-read target variation is "miss" and it is decided to perform a "no-reach effect", usually a no-reach effect (see FIG. 8(H)) is executed in which a reach is not established by the effect symbol during the display of the variation of the first special symbol related to the pre-read target variation, and three effect symbols indicating a scatter pattern are pseudo-stop displayed in sequence or simultaneously, and then as a miss pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a miss notification effect (see FIG. 8(I)) in which the three effect symbols indicating the scatter pattern are actually stopped as they are is performed.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that if a weak chance eye effect and a first effect symbol focus effect are executed in a target pre-change, or if a strong chance eye effect and a second effect symbol focus effect are executed in a target pre-change, a reach effect is always executed in a pre-read target change. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if none of these pre-read effects are executed in a target pre-change, a no-reach effect (see Figure 8 (H)) and a miss notification effect (see Figure 8 (I)) are executed.

On the other hand, in some cases where the result of the first special pattern determination performed at the start of the predicted variation is a "jackpot," or where the result of the first special pattern determination is a "miss" and it is decided that a "reach effect" will be performed, or where the result of the first special pattern determination is a "miss" and it is decided that a "no reach effect" will be performed, the following effects will be performed.

In other words, a pre-reach effect (see Figure 8 (J)) may be performed between the start of the display of the first special pattern and effect pattern related to the predicted target change and the establishment of a reach based on the effect pattern. The pre-reach effect here is a preview effect that indicates the possibility, and the degree of possibility, of a winning notification effect being executed in the predicted target change before a reach based on the effect pattern is established in the predicted target change; this pre-reach effect will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 10.

Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first special symbol and effect symbol related to the predicted change have begun to change, a reach completion effect is performed, indicating that a reach has been achieved with the effect symbols, by, for example, pseudo-stopping the left symbol on the valid line, and then pseudo-stopping a right symbol identical to the left symbol on the valid line (see Figures 8 (K) and 10 (I)). Once a reach has been achieved with the effect symbols in this way, a predetermined reach effect is then performed, giving the player hope that the middle symbol identical to the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol) will stop on the valid line and the symbols will line up (i.e., a double-digit effect symbol will be displayed).

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, three types of reach effects are available that can be executed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol during normal game play: normal reach (see Figure 8 (L)), SP reach (see Figure 8 (O)), and SPSP reach (see Figure 8 (P)).

(Normal reach)
Here, the normal reach (see FIG. 8(L)) is a reach effect in which the reliability of a jackpot is relatively low and it is difficult to execute a win notification effect, and in this embodiment, the reliability of a jackpot is set to about 3%. When the reach formation effect of FIG. 8(K) is performed, the normal reach (see FIG. 8(L)) is performed first. During the normal reach, a display is performed in which two reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are displayed as pseudo-stops on the active line, and the scrolling speed of the middle symbol row, which has been displayed scrolling at high speed between the left symbol and the right symbol, gradually decreases.

Here, if the result of the first special symbol determination executed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-read target variation is a "jackpot," and if a variation presentation pattern that notifies of a jackpot with a normal reach is set by the sub-CPU 91 at the start of the pre-read target variation, then at the end of the pre-read target variation, a middle symbol that is the same as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped and displayed on the active line, thereby pseudo-stopping and displaying three presentation symbols representing a doublet (for example, the "333" presentation symbol), and as the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a win notification presentation (see Figure 8 (M)) is performed in which the three presentation symbols representing the doublet are actually stopped.

Furthermore, if the result of the first special pattern determination executed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-read target variation is a "miss," and a variation effect pattern that notifies of a miss in a normal reach is set by the sub-CPU 91 at the start of the pre-read target variation, then at the end of the pre-read target variation, a middle pattern different from the reach pattern is pseudo-stopped and displayed on the active line, thereby pseudo-stopping and displaying three effect patterns that represent a reach miss (for example, the "343" effect pattern), and as the miss pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern, a miss notification effect (see Figure 8 (N)) is performed in which the three effect patterns that represent the reach miss are actually stopped.

(SP Reach)
Furthermore, if the result of the first special pattern determination executed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-read target variation is a "jackpot," and if a variation presentation pattern that notifies of a jackpot in an SP reach (see Figure 8 (O)) developed from a normal reach is set by the sub-CPU 91 at the start of the pre-read target variation, three presentation patterns representing a double digit (for example, a "444" presentation pattern) are pseudo-stopped at the end of the pre-read target variation, and as the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern, a win notification presentation (see Figure 8 (M)) is performed in which the three presentation patterns representing the double digit are actually stopped.

Furthermore, if the result of the first special pattern determination executed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-read target variation is a "miss," and a variation effect pattern that notifies of a miss in an SP reach (see Figure 8 (O)) developed from a normal reach is set by the sub-CPU 91 at the start of the pre-read target variation, three effect patterns representing a reach miss (for example, the "454" effect pattern) are pseudo-stopped at the end of the pre-read target variation, and as a missing pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern, a miss notification effect (see Figure 8 (N)) is performed in which the three effect patterns representing the reach miss are actually stopped.

Here, the SP Reach (see FIG. 8(O)) is a reach effect in which a win notification effect is more likely to be executed than a normal reach, but is not so likely to be executed, and its jackpot reliability is set to approximately 16% in this embodiment. The content of the SP Reach effect can be anything, but in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the SP Reach effect is a battle effect depicting a battle between the main character and the enemy character. If the result of the first special pattern determination executed at the start of the pre-read target variation is a "jackpot," a victory effect depicting the main character defeating the enemy character as a result of the battle is executed prior to the win notification effect (see FIG. 8(M)). If the result of the first special pattern determination executed at the start of the pre-read target variation is a "miss," a defeat effect depicting the main character being defeated by the enemy character as a result of the battle is executed prior to the miss notification effect (see FIG. 8(N)).

(SPSP Reach)
Furthermore, the variation presentation pattern setting process executed by the sub-CPU 91 at the start of the pre-read target variation may set a variation presentation pattern that develops from a normal reach (see FIG. 8(L)) via an SP reach (see FIG. 8(O)) to an SPSP reach (see FIG. 8(P)), or a variation presentation pattern that develops from a normal reach directly to an SPSP reach without passing through an SP reach. In these cases, the SPSP reach starts midway through the pre-read target variation.

Here, if the result of the first special pattern determination executed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-read target variation is a "miss," three performance symbols representing a reach miss (for example, the "767" performance symbol) are pseudo-stopped at the end of the pre-read target variation, and as the missing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a miss notification effect (see Figure 8 (N)) is performed in which the three performance symbols representing the reach miss are actually stopped. Figure 11 (I) shows an example of a state in which three performance symbols representing the reach miss of "454" are pseudo-stopped as a result of the execution of an SPSP reach.

On the other hand, if the result of the first special pattern determination executed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-read target variation is a "jackpot," then a doublet effect pattern attention effect (an example of a "different attention effect": see Figure 8 (Q)) is performed at the end of the pre-read target variation, which draws attention to three effect patterns representing doublets (for example, the "777" effect pattern), and then these three effect patterns representing doublets are pseudo-stopped and, as the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern, a win notification effect (see Figure 8 (R)) is performed in which the three effect patterns representing the doublets are actually stopped.

Figures 15(D)-(E), which will be described later, show examples of doublet effect pattern focus effects that draw attention to the three effect symbols representing the doublet of "777" prior to the winning notification effect of Figure 15(F). Also, Figures 16(G)-(H) show examples of doublet effect pattern focus effects that draw attention to the three effect symbols representing the doublet of "222" prior to the winning notification effect of Figure 16(I). These doublet effect pattern focus effects draw attention to the effect symbols representing the doublet at the end of an SPSP reach when the result of the first special pattern determination performed at the start of the predictive target variation is a "jackpot." These doublet effect pattern focus effects will be described in more detail later.

Here, the SPSP reach (see FIG. 8(P)) is the reach effect that is most likely to result in a win notification effect among the three types of reach effects, and its jackpot reliability is set to approximately 38% in this embodiment. While any type of SPSP reach effect may be used, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment performs a battle effect depicting a battle between the main character and the enemy character as the SPSP reach effect. If the result of the first special pattern determination performed at the start of the pre-read target variation is a "jackpot," a victory effect depicting the main character defeating the enemy character as a result of the battle is performed prior to the win notification effect (see FIG. 8(R)). If the result of the first special pattern determination performed at the start of the pre-read target variation is a "miss," a defeat effect depicting the main character being defeated by the enemy character as a result of the battle is performed prior to the miss notification effect (see FIG. 8(N)).

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, battle effects are performed both during SP Reach and SPSP Reach, but if a variation effect pattern that develops from SP Reach to SPSP Reach is set at the start of the predictive target variation, for example, the outcome will not be decided in the battle effect (first half battle) during the SP Reach, and a series of effects will be performed around the start of the SPSP Reach, showing how the SP Reach develops into the SPSP Reach and a new battle effect (second half battle) begins. On the other hand, if a variation effect pattern that develops directly from a normal Reach to an SPSP Reach (without passing through the SP Reach effect) is set at the start of the predictive target variation, the second half battle will begin without the first half battle being performed as described above.

In addition, there are multiple victory animations available for the second half of the battle that takes place during the SPSP Reach. In addition to animations where the main character defeats the enemy character alone, there are also animations where the main character and an ally character who appears during the second half of the battle join forces to defeat the enemy character.

So far, we've explained the three types of reach effects: normal reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach. If we rank these three types of reach effects from lowest to highest reliability of winning, they are normal reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach. This means that players can enjoy playing while hoping that the outcome will eventually develop into an SPSP reach.

(Reach success promotion)
Returning to the explanation of Figure 8, after the pre-reach performance of Figure 8(J) is performed, a reach-achievement prompting performance (see Figures 8(S), 13(C), and 18(A)) may be performed to build up the player's expectations for the reach-achievement due to the performance symbols. When this reach-achievement prompting performance is performed, there are cases where a reach-achievement performance (see Figure 8(U)) is performed afterwards, and cases where a reach-achievement failure performance (see Figure 8(T)) is performed.

If the reach-failure effect (see Figure 8 (T)) is performed here, then the reach-failure effect will be displayed, and a miss notification effect (see Figure 8 (N)) will be displayed instead. Figures 18 (C) to (I) show an example of how, after the reach-failure effect is displayed in response to the player's operation of the first effect button 35, a miss notification effect will be displayed in which three effect symbols indicating a scatter pattern are displayed in pseudo-stop mode, followed by a real stop mode.

(Reach completion effect)
FIG. 13(F) illustrates an example of the reach-achievement effect of FIG. 8(U). When this reach-achievement effect is performed, the subsequent effect changes depending on the type of effect symbols constituting the reach-achievement effect. Specifically, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when a reach-achi effect using odd-numbered symbols is achieved, a reach-achievement effect (see FIG. 8(U)) is followed by a reach-achievement effect (see FIG. 8(V)), which then directly progresses to an SPSP reach-achievement (see FIG. 8(P)) without passing through a normal reach-achi or an SP reach-achievement. On the other hand, when a reach-achi effect using even-numbered symbols is achieved, the reach-achievement effect (see FIG. 8(U)) accompanied by a reach-achievement effect (see FIG. 8(V)) is not performed, and the effect directly progresses to an SPSP reach-achievement (see FIG. 8(P)) without passing through a normal reach-achi or an SP reach-achievement.

Figures 13(F)-(I) and 14 show an example in which, after a reach completion effect that notifies the completion of a reach with a 7 symbol, a reach symbol focus effect is performed that draws attention to the 7 symbol, and then the game progresses directly to an SPSP reach without passing through a normal reach or SP reach. Figures 16(D)-(F) also show an example in which, after a reach completion effect that notifies the completion of a reach with a 2 symbol, the game progresses directly to an SPSP reach without passing through a normal reach or SP reach, without a reach symbol focus effect.

The features of the reach symbol attention effect will be described in detail later, but when a reach is achieved using the effect symbols, the sub-CPU 91 is capable of executing a reach symbol attention effect that draws attention to the second effect symbol (in this embodiment, an odd numbered symbol), but is configured not to execute a reach symbol attention effect that draws attention to the first effect symbol (in this embodiment, an even numbered symbol).

After the reach completion effect of Figure 8 (U) is performed, it will progress directly to SPSP reach (see Figure 8 (P)) regardless of whether or not the reach pattern focus effect of Figure 8 (V) is performed. However, the series of effects that take place after the development into SPSP reach will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 9.

<Specific examples of pre-reach effects in normal gaming mode>
Next, with reference to Figure 10, a specific example of a pre-reach effect performed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state will be described. Here, Figure 10 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a series of effects from the start of the variable display in the normal gaming state to the reach-achi effect. The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute various pre-reach effects (see Figure 8(J)) from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state (from the start of the variable display in Figure 8(G)) until the reach-achi effect (see Figure 8(K)) is performed.

Figure 10 (A) illustrates an example of a state in which a single reserve icon (e.g., a red reserve icon) is displayed in the reserve icon display area 71 on the display screen 70, and a losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol to indicate that the result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to that icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is a "miss." Accordingly, when a predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the losing symbol was displayed as the first special symbol, a first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest reserve icon (here, the red reserve icon) displayed in the reserve icon display area 71 is executed. If the result of this first special symbol determination is a "miss" and the sub-CPU 91 has set a variable effect pattern that directly progresses from a normal reach (see Figure 8 (L)) to an SPSP reach (see Figure 8 (P)), the following effect is executed.

That is, as the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon is made and the display of the first special symbol begins to change, the earliest pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 shifts to the icon display area 72, and the scrolling display of the three symbol rows begins (see Figures 10 (A) and (B)). After a predetermined time has passed since the scrolling display of the three symbol rows began, the first notice may be executed as a pre-reach effect (see Figure 8 (J)) (see Figure 10 (C)). For example, as the first notice, a step-up notice is executed in which the display mode of the effect image (first notice effect image) related to the step-up notice displayed in the central area of the display screen 70 is gradually changed, and an effect sound related to the step-up notice is output from the speaker 38.

Following the first preview above, a pseudo consecutive effect may be executed (see Figure 10 (D)). Here, a pseudo consecutive effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the effect pattern displayed in the effect pattern display area 73 is displayed multiple times during the display of a single special pattern (here, the first special pattern). For this pseudo consecutive effect, the following effect display is performed.

That is, the scrolling speed of the left-hand symbol row slows down, causing the left symbol (e.g., symbol 6) to pseudo-stop, then the scrolling speed of the right-hand symbol row slows down, causing the right symbol (e.g., symbol 4) (different from the left symbol that pseudo-stopped earlier) to pseudo-stop, and then the scrolling speed of the middle-hand symbol row slows down, causing symbol 7 to pseudo-stop as the middle symbol that indicates the execution of the pseudo consecutive effect (see Figure 10 (D)).

In this way, after different effect symbols have pseudo-stopped as the left and right symbols, when a 7 symbol pseudo-stops in the middle row, the second pseudo variable effect (see FIG. 10(E)) following the first pseudo variable effect begins. Specifically, after the character "x2" indicating the start of the second pseudo variable effect is displayed large in the center area of the display screen 70, the character "x2" is displayed in small size in the upper left area of the display screen 70. As a result, the left 6 symbol, the middle 7 symbol, and the 4 symbol resume moving downward, and the scrolling display of the three symbol rows resumes in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIGS. 10(D) and (E)).

When this pseudo-second consecutive change effect is being performed, a second preview, for example, a line preview, is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10(F), a preview image (second preview preview image) showing a specified character speaking a line is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, and a sound effect related to the line preview (for example, the character's voice) is output from the speaker 38.

Although not shown in Figure 10, when the pseudo second consecutive variation effect begins, a first effect button operation prompt effect similar to that illustrated in Figure 18 (C) described below is performed. Then, if the player operates the first effect button 35 during the valid period of this first effect button operation prompt effect, the above-mentioned line preview is executed as an effect corresponding to that operation. As is clear from the explanation so far, the step-up preview and line preview are different in that the step-up preview is a pre-reach effect that is performed regardless of the player's operation, whereas the line preview is a pre-reach effect that is performed in response to the player's operation.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 10, when a dialogue preview is executed as the second preview during the pseudo second consecutive change performance as described above, a second pseudo consecutive performance is then executed during the current display of the first special symbol (see Figure 10 (G)). Specifically, as illustrated in Figure 10 (G), the scrolling speed of the left-hand symbol row slows down and the left symbol (e.g., symbol 2) pseudo-stops, then the scrolling speed of the right-hand symbol row slows down and the right symbol (e.g., symbol 5) pseudo-stops, and then the scrolling speed of the middle symbol row slows down and symbol 7 pseudo-stops as the middle symbol.

When the second pseudo consecutive effect is executed during the display of this first special symbol variation, the pseudo third consecutive effect will begin, following the pseudo second consecutive effect. Specifically, after the letters "x3" indicating the start of the pseudo third consecutive effect are displayed large in the central area of the display screen 70, the letters "x3" are displayed small in the upper left area of the display screen 70, and the scrolling display of the three symbol rows resumes in the effect symbol display area 73 (see Figures 10 (G) and (H)).

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the pseudo-third consecutive variable effect began, the scrolling speed of the left-hand symbol row slows down and the left symbol (for example, symbol 4) pseudo-stops, and then the scrolling speed of the right-hand symbol row slows down (same as the left symbol) and the right symbol (here, symbol 4) pseudo-stops, resulting in a reach completion effect (see Figure 8 (K)) that notifies you that a reach has been achieved with symbol 4 (see Figure 10 (I)).

Note that while the example described here uses a "pre-reach pseudo-consecutive" scenario, which resumes the scrolling display of each symbol row before a reach is achieved, there are also cases where a "post-reach pseudo-consecutive" scenario, which resumes the scrolling display of each symbol row after a reach is achieved, is also implemented.

<Specific examples of the first and second performance patterns>
Next, referring to Fig. 12, specific examples of the first performance symbol attention performance and the second performance symbol attention performance will be described. Here, Fig. 12 is a screen diagram showing specific examples of the first performance symbol attention performance and the second performance symbol attention performance. In Fig. 12, the reserved icon with the letters "reserved 1" attached is a reserved icon suggesting that the above-mentioned first target pre-change is reserved, the reserved icon with the letters "reserved 2" attached is a reserved icon suggesting that the above-mentioned second target pre-change is reserved, and the reserved icon with the letters "reserved 3" attached is a reserved icon suggesting that the above-mentioned pre-read target change is reserved.

FIG. 12(A) illustrates an example of a state in which a total of three hold icons, namely, the hold icon for hold 1, the hold icon for hold 2, and the hold icon for hold 3, are displayed in the hold icon display area 71 on the display screen 70. To notify the user that the result of the first special pattern determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is a "miss," a missing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, and a display pattern showing a "965" spread is displayed as a frozen display. Thus, once a predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the missing symbol was displayed as the first special symbol, a first special pattern determination is executed corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (here, the hold icon for hold 1, indicating that the first pre-target variation is on hold; see FIG. 12(A)). If the result of this first special pattern determination is a "miss" and it has been determined that a "no-reach effect" will be executed, the following effect is executed.

(First pre-target fluctuation)
That is, as the first special pattern determination corresponding to the hold icon of hold 1 is executed and the display of the first special pattern change begins, the hold icon of hold 1 shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72, and the scrolling display of the three pattern rows related to the first pre-target change begins (see FIGS. 12(A) and (B)). Also, as illustrated in FIGS. 12(A) and (B), the hold icons of hold 2 and hold 3 shift leftward within the hold icon display area 71 and are displayed as the first hold icon and the second hold icon, respectively.

(Weak chance effect and first effect pattern attention effect)
In this way, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the scrolling display of the three symbol rows relating to the first target pre-variation began, the three effect symbols representing weak chance eyes, the left 4 symbol, the center 4 symbol, and the right 3 symbol, are pseudo-stopped simultaneously (see FIG. 12(C)). Accordingly, the pseudo-stopped left 4 symbol and the center 4 symbol are enlarged, while the right 3 symbol is reduced, and blue rain falls from rainclouds on the left 4 symbol and the center 4 symbol, resulting in a first effect symbol attention effect that raises the attention level of these two four symbols (see FIG. 12(D)). The flow of the effect that executes this weak chance eye effect and the first effect symbol attention effect is as described above based on FIGS. 8(C) and (D).

Note that Figure 12 (D) illustrates an example of a first performance pattern attention effect being performed that increases the attention level of two 4-number symbols as the first performance pattern (even-number symbols in this embodiment), but for example, there may also be cases where a first performance pattern attention effect is performed that increases the attention level of two 2-number symbols, or where a first performance pattern attention effect is performed that increases the attention level of two 8-number symbols.

Then, towards the end of the first pre-target variation, although not shown in the figure, an effect display is performed in which the size of the four symbols on the left, the four symbols in the middle, and the three symbols on the right are returned to normal size, and then these three symbols representing "443" are pseudo-stopped, and as a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a loss notification effect is performed in which these three symbols actually stop. Figure 12 (E) shows an example of the state in which the three symbols representing "443" have actually stopped.

When a predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since a losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol for the first pre-target variation, a first special symbol determination is made corresponding to the earliest pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 (here, the pending icon for PEND 2, indicating that the second pre-target variation is pending; see Figure 12 (E)). Then, if the result of this first special symbol determination is a "miss" and it has been decided to execute a "no-reach effect," the following effect will be executed.

(Second pre-target fluctuation)
That is, as the first special symbol determination corresponding to the reserved icon of reserved 2 is executed, the display of the first special symbol begins to change, and the reserved icon of reserved 2 shifts from the reserved icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72, and the scrolling display of the three symbol rows related to the second pre-target change begins (see FIGS. 12(E) and (F)). Also, as illustrated in FIGS. 12(E) and (F), the reserved icon of reserved 3 shifts leftward within the reserved icon display area 71 and is displayed as the foremost reserved icon.

In this way, once a predetermined time has elapsed since the scrolling display of the three symbol rows related to the second pre-target variation began, the three performance symbols indicating a strong chance of winning - the left 7 symbol, the middle 7 symbol, and the right 6 symbol - simultaneously pseudo-stop (see Figure 12 (G)). Accordingly, the pseudo-stopped left 7 symbol and middle 7 symbol are enlarged while the right 6 symbol is reduced in size, and red lightning strikes the left 7 symbol and middle 7 symbol, resulting in a second performance symbol attention effect that raises the profile of these two 7 symbols (see Figure 12 (H)). The flow of the effects that execute this strong chance effect and the second performance symbol attention effect is as described above with reference to Figures 8 (E) and (F).

Note that Figure 12 (H) illustrates an example of a second performance pattern attention effect being performed that increases the attention level of two 7 symbols as the second performance pattern (in this embodiment, odd-numbered symbols), but there are also cases where a second performance pattern attention effect is performed that increases the attention level of two 3 symbols, or a second performance pattern attention effect is performed that increases the attention level of two 5 symbols.

Then, toward the end of the second target variation, although not shown in the figure, a display effect is displayed in which the left 7, center 7, and right 6 symbols are returned to their normal size, followed by a pseudo-stop display of these three "776" symbols. As a losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, a loss notification effect is displayed in which these three symbols actually stop. Figure 12(I) illustrates an example of the state in which the three "776" symbols actually stop. Thus, once a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol for the second target variation, a first special symbol determination is made corresponding to the earliest reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 (here, the reserved icon for reserved 3, indicating that a pre-read target variation is on hold; see Figure 12(I)). The effects of the pre-read target variation that are performed in response to the first special symbol determination will be described in detail below with reference to Figure 13.

<Reach success hype and reach failure effects>
Next, a specific example of a series of effects when a reach-achi success inducing effect (see FIG. 8(S)) is followed by a reach-achi success failure effect (see FIG. 8(T)) will be described with reference to Fig. 18. Here, Fig. 18 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a series of effects when a miss notification effect is executed after a reach-achi success failure effect.

(Reach success promotion)
As described above based on Figure 8, in the predictive target variation, a reach establishment teasing performance (see Figure 8(S)) may be performed after the pre-reach performance (see Figure 8(J)). Figure 18(A) shows an example in which a reach establishment teasing performance is performed in which one reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 71, and three pattern rows corresponding to the icon (here, the white icon) displayed in the icon display area 72 are scrolled, and a specific character and a speech bubble expressing the specific character's words, "A great chance if the reach is established!?" are displayed, making the player hopeful that the reach will be established by the performance patterns.

After this reach-establishment prompting effect is performed, a left-right symbol slow movement effect is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol that is the same as the left symbol slowly descend simultaneously (see Figure 18 (B)). Figure 18 (B) illustrates an example of the left four symbols and the right four symbols slowly descend simultaneously due to the left-right symbol slow movement effect. When this left-right symbol slow movement effect begins, the scrolling speed of the middle symbol row increases, causing the middle symbol row to become hidden. When the left four symbols and the right four symbols descend to a predetermined height in the vertical direction of the display screen 70, a first button operation prompting effect is performed to prompt the player to operate the first effect button 35 (see Figure 18 (C)). FIG. 18(C) shows an example of a state in which the first effect button operation promotion effect displays on the display screen 70 a first effect button image that resembles the first effect button 35, the word "Press!" indicating the operation of the first effect button 35 that is being urged to the player, and a validity period gauge that indicates the remaining validity period during which operation of the first effect button 35 is valid.

(Failed reach effect)
Here, if the sub-CPU 91 has set, at the start of the predictive target variation, that a reach-achievement instigation effect (see FIG. 8(S)) be followed by a reach-achievement failure effect (see FIG. 8(T)), a series of reach-achievement failure effects, as illustrated in FIGS. 18(D) to 18(G), are performed. Here, FIG. 18(D) illustrates a state in which the left 4 symbols pseudo-stop at a predetermined vertical height on the display screen 70, and the right 4 symbols, which were about to pseudo-stop at the predetermined height, increase in their downward movement speed, causing the scrolling display of the right symbol row to resume. The following FIG. 18(E) illustrates a state in which the scrolling speed of the right symbol row decreases again, causing the right 5 symbol, which appeared in the upper right corner, to slowly descend. The following FIG. 18(F) illustrates a state in which the left 4 symbols and the right 5 symbols pseudo-stop at a predetermined height, and the specific character and a speech bubble representing the specific character's line, "Sorry...," are displayed. Further, the following FIG. 18(G) illustrates an example in which the scrolling speed of the middle symbol row suddenly decreases, and the middle 5 symbol that appeared at the top slowly descends.

After this series of failed reach completion effects has been performed, the three effect symbols representing the "455" scatter pattern are pseudo-stopped, and as a losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, a loss notification effect is performed in which these three effect symbols are actually stopped (see Figures 18 (H) and (I)).

[A series of effects following the reach-established effect following the reach-established effect]
Next, referring to Figure 9, a series of effects in the case where a reach establishment prompting effect (see Figure 8 (S)) is followed by a reach establishment effect (see Figure 8 (U)) and directly develops into an SPSP reach (see Figure 8 (P)) will be described. Here, Figure 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of a series of effects after the reach establishment effect following the reach establishment prompting effect.

The above explanation of Figure 18 provided a specific example of a series of effects when a reach-achi success prompting effect (see Figure 8 (S)) is followed by a reach-achi failure effect (see Figure 8 (T)), and then a miss notification effect (see Figure 8 (N)). Next, with reference to Figure 9, we will explain the flow of a series of effects when a reach-achi success prompting effect (see Figure 8 (S)) is followed by a reach-achi success effect (see Figure 8 (U)), and then the effect progresses directly to an SPSP reach (see Figure 8 (P)) without passing through a normal reach or SP reach.

If a variation presentation pattern in which a reach establishment teasing presentation (see Figure 8 (S)) is followed by a reach establishment presentation (see Figure 8 (U)) and then develops into an SPSP reach (see Figure 8 (P)) is set by the sub-CPU 91 at the start of the pre-read target variation shown in Figure 8, the following series of presentations will be performed.

In other words, when the above-mentioned variation effect pattern is set, the reach completion teasing effect (see FIG. 9(A)) and the reach completion effect (see FIG. 9(B)) are performed in that order while the first special symbol and effect symbol related to the predictive target variation are being displayed. The reach completion teasing effect is as described above based on FIG. 18(A), and the subsequent reach completion effect (see FIG. 9(B)) can be an even number symbol reach completion effect that notifies the completion of a reach with an even number symbol (see FIG. 16(D) for example), or an odd number symbol reach completion effect that notifies the completion of a reach with an odd number symbol (see FIG. 13(F) for example). When either of these reach completion effects is performed, the post-reach effect (an example of an "anticipation effect") from FIG. 9(C) onwards will begin.

As such, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute two types of reach-achieved effects, broadly speaking: even symbol reach-achieved effects and odd symbol reach-achieved effects. However, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has the feature that the flow of subsequent effects changes depending on the type of reach-achieved effect.

Specifically, the sub-CPU 91 is configured to control the effects so that when an odd number symbol reach-achievement effect is executed as a reach-achievement effect (see FIG. 9(B)), a reach-achievement pattern attention effect (see FIG. 9(C)) is executed following the odd number symbol reach-achievement effect, whereas when an even number symbol reach-achievement effect is executed as a reach-achievement effect (see FIG. 9(B)), the reach-achievement pattern attention effect (see FIG. 9(C)) is not executed. Below, with reference to FIG. 13, a specific example of a reach-achievement pattern attention effect that draws attention to odd number symbols as reach-achievement patterns will be described.

<Examples of notable reach pattern effects>
13(A) illustrates the state immediately after the start of the pre-read target change (pattern change corresponding to the reserved icon of reserved 3: see FIG. 8(G)) after the first pre-target change (pattern change corresponding to the reserved icon of reserved 1: reserved 1 change) and the second pre-target change (pattern change corresponding to the reserved icon of reserved 2: reserved 2 change) described based on FIG. 12. Specifically, in response to the execution of the first special pattern determination corresponding to the reserved icon of reserved 3 corresponding to the pre-read target change, as the display of the first special pattern change begins, the first reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 (here, the reserved icon of reserved 3) shifts to the icon display area 72, and the scrolling display of the three pattern rows begins (see FIG. 13(A)).

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the scrolling display of these three symbol rows began, a pre-reach effect (see FIG. 8(J)) is performed, raising the expectation that a winning notification effect will be executed in this predictive target change (see FIG. 13(B)). Although not shown in FIG. 13, between the start of this predictive target change and the execution of the reach establishment instigation effect (see FIGS. 8(S), 9(A), and 13(C)), a first button operation prompt effect is performed to prompt the player to operate the first button 35, similar to the first button operation prompt effect described above based on FIG. 18(C). FIG. 13(B) illustrates an example of a line preview being performed as a pre-reach effect in response to the player operating the first button 35 during the valid period of this first button operation prompt effect. In this line preview, an effect image depicting a predetermined character uttering the line "It's your chance!" is displayed on the display screen 70, and audio with the same content as this line is output from the speaker 38.

Note that here we will use the example of a case where a dialogue preview is used as the pre-reach performance, but there are also cases where the above-mentioned step-up preview is used as the pre-reach performance, or where both a step-up preview and a dialogue preview are used as the pre-reach performance.

(Reach success promotion)
After such pre-reach effects (see Fig. 8(J) and Fig. 13(B)) are performed, a reach-established prompting effect (see Fig. 8(S) and Fig. 9(A)) is performed (see Fig. 13(C)). The reach-established prompting effect exemplified in Fig. 13(C) is as described above based on Fig. 18(A), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, a slow left-right symbol movement effect is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol that is the same as the left symbol slowly descend simultaneously (see FIG. 13(D)). FIG. 13(D) illustrates an example of the slow left-right symbol movement effect causing the left 7 symbol and the right 7 symbol to slowly descend simultaneously. When this slow left-right symbol movement effect begins, the scrolling speed of the middle symbol row increases, causing the middle symbol row to become hidden. When the left 7 symbol and the right 7 symbol descend to a predetermined height in the vertical direction of the display screen 70, a first button operation prompting effect is performed, prompting the player to operate the first button 35 (see FIG. 13(E)). The first button operation prompting effect illustrated in FIG. 13(E) is performed in the same manner as the first button operation prompting effect described above based on FIG. 18(C).

(Reach formation effect with odd number symbols)
Here, since the sub-CPU 91 has preset the establishment of a reach with the 7 symbol at the start of this predictive target variation, a reach establishment effect (see FIG. 9(B)) is performed to notify the establishment of a reach with the 7 symbol when the player operates the first effect button 35, or when the valid period for the first effect button operation prompt effect of FIG. 13(E) ends without the player operating the first effect button 35 (see FIG. 13(F)). FIG. 13(F) illustrates an example of a reach establishment effect in which the left and right 7 symbols are pseudo-stop-displayed, reach lines extending left and right so as to pass over these 7 symbols, the word "Reach!", a specific character, and a speech bubble expressing the specific character's line, "Good job!!" are displayed, and in conjunction with these display effects, a sound with the same content as the word "Reach!" is output from the speaker 38.

(Attention-grabbing reach symbol effects)
Next, because a reach is achieved with the odd-numbered 7 symbol, a reach achievement effect (see FIGS. 9B and 13F) is followed by a reach symbol attention effect (see FIG. 9C) (see FIGS. 13G-I). FIG. 13G illustrates an example in which the left 7 symbol, which is pseudo-stopped in the reach achievement effect, expands and moves to the right, while the right 7 symbol, which is pseudo-stopped in the reach achievement effect, expands and moves to the left. The following FIG. 13H illustrates an example in which, as the left 7 symbol and the right 7 symbol expand and move toward each other, these 7 symbols rotate clockwise around the axis of the scroll direction (here, downward) of each symbol row. The following FIG. 13I illustrates an example in which a combination effect is performed in which the left 7 symbol and the right 7 symbol, which have approached each other to a certain distance, combine, resulting in the display of a single giant 7 symbol. Although not shown in the figure, a specific sound effect is output from the speaker 38 during the period in which the reach symbol attention performance is being performed.

In addition to the display screen 70 and speaker 38, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with various presentation means such as the frame lamp 37, board lamp 5, and movable decorative member 14, so it is possible that the player may not be looking at the reach symbol displayed by the reach formation presentation. In contrast, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment performs a reach symbol attention presentation when a reach is formed using odd-numbered symbols, which is expected to have the effect of moving the player's gaze to the display screen 70 and drawing attention to the reach symbol.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the reach symbol attention effect begins immediately following the reach establishment effect that notifies the establishment of reach with odd-numbered symbols, so it can be considered that the reach symbol attention effect is executed when reach is established. The reach symbol attention effect is executed using the display screen 70 and speaker 38, and although not shown in the figure, when the reach symbol attention effect is being executed, the frame lamp 37 and board lamp 5 emit light in a light pattern for the reach symbol attention effect.

<Specific examples of a series of effects when reach symbol attention effects are not executed>
Next, referring to Fig. 16, a specific example of a series of effects following the reach establishment instigation effect when the reach symbol attention effect explained based on Fig. 13 is not executed will be described. Here, Fig. 16 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a double-digit effect symbol attention effect that draws attention to three effect symbols showing the double digits "222". Note that Fig. 16 omits illustration of the effects performed during the SPSP reach, and the effects during this SPSP reach will be described in detail later based on other drawings.

(Reach success promotion)
Figure 16(A) illustrates an example of how the reach-established prompting effect shown in Figure 8(S) or Figure 9(A) is performed. This reach-established prompting effect is performed in the same way as the reach-established prompting effect described above based on Figure 13(C), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Once the reach completion teasing effect of Figure 16(A) is performed, a left-right symbol slow movement effect is performed, in which the left symbol and a right symbol that is the same as the left symbol slowly descend simultaneously (see Figure 16(B)). Figure 16(B) shows an example of two left symbols and two right symbols slowly descending simultaneously due to the left-right symbol slow movement effect. This left-right symbol slow movement effect shown in Figure 16(B) is performed in the same way as the left-right symbol slow movement effect described above based on Figure 13(D), except that the descending left and right symbols are different.

When the two left symbols and the two right symbols descend to a predetermined height in the vertical direction of the display screen 70 due to the left-right symbol slow movement effect in Figure 16(B), a first button operation prompt effect is performed to encourage the player to operate the first button 35 (see Figure 16(C)). This first button operation prompt effect illustrated in Figure 16(C) is performed in the same manner as the first button operation prompt effect described above based on Figure 18(C).

(Reach formation effect with even number symbols)
Here, since the sub-CPU 91 has preset the establishment of a reach with two symbols at the start of this predictive target variation, a reach establishment effect (see FIG. 9(B)) that notifies the establishment of a reach with two symbols is performed in response to the player operating the first effect button 35, or in response to the expiration of the valid period for the first effect button operation prompt effect of FIG. 16(C) without the player operating the first effect button 35 (see FIG. 16(D)). FIG. 16(D) illustrates an example of a reach establishment effect in which two left and two right symbols are pseudo-stop-displayed, reach lines extending left and right so as to pass over these two symbols, the word "Reach!", a specific character, and a speech bubble expressing the specific character's line, "Good job!!" are displayed, and in conjunction with these display effects, a sound with the same content as the word "Reach!" is output from the speaker 38.

Figure 9 illustrates an example of a reach completion effect (see Figure 9(B)) in which an even number symbol reach completion effect is performed to notify the completion of a reach with an even number symbol, followed by a reach symbol shrinking and moving effect (see Figure 9(D)), an effect in which the reach symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas (see Figure 9(E)), the start of an SPSP reach (see Figure 9(F)), a double-digit symbol focus effect (see Figure 9(R)), and a win notification effect (see Figure 9(S)). This is the flow of the first effect route, which will be described later. In contrast, Figures 16(E) to (I) show specific examples of the effects illustrated in Figure 9.

(Reach symbol shrinking and moving effect)
Figure 16 (E) shows a specific example of the reach symbol shrinking and movement effect of Figure 9 (D), and Figure 16 (E) shows an example of an effect suggesting development into an SPSP reach, in which the two left symbols shrink and move to the upper left area of the display screen 70, making one rotation clockwise around the scrolling direction as the axis before moving to the upper left area, and at the same time, the two right symbols shrink and move to the upper right area of the display screen 70, making one rotation clockwise around the scrolling direction as the axis before moving to the upper right area.

The following Figure 16 (F) shows a specific example of the effect in which the reach symbols in Figure 9 (E) are displayed pseudo-stopped while shrinking to the upper left and right areas, and the start of the SPSP reach in Figure 9 (F). Figure 16 (F) shows an example in which the two left symbols are displayed pseudo-stopped while shrinking to the upper left area, and the two right symbols are displayed pseudo-stopped while shrinking to the upper right area. Also, when the SPSP reach starts, although not shown in Figure 16, an effect image for the second half battle, etc., is displayed on the display screen 70 as an SPSP reach effect image displayed during the SPSP reach.

(Featured double-digit pattern)
16(G) and (H) show a specific example of the doublet effect pattern attention effect of FIG. 9(R), which is an attention effect that draws attention to an effect pattern that suggests a jackpot game will be executed. If the result of the first special pattern determination executed by the main CPU 81 at the start of this pre-read target variation is a "jackpot," the victory effect of FIG. 9(Q) is executed as the result effect of the SPSP reach, and then three effect patterns representing doublets (here, the doublets of "222") are displayed on the display screen 70. The doublet effect pattern attention effect exemplified in FIG. 16(G) and (H) is an effect that draws attention to the three effect images representing doublets that are displayed in this way as the SPSP reach ends. FIG. 16(G) to (H) show an example of an effect that increases the attention to these three effect patterns by gradually enlarging the three pseudo-stop-displayed "222" effect patterns.

Although not shown in Figures 16(G) and (H), when the double-digit display symbol attention effect is being performed, the frame lamps 37 and the board lamps 5 light up in a lighting pattern for the double-digit display symbol attention effect so that they appear to glow in rainbow colors.

In this way, after the double-digit display pattern attention effect that draws attention to the three display patterns that show the double digits "222" is performed, the three display patterns that show the double digits "222" are pseudo-stopped and displayed in their normal size (see Figure 16 (I)), and as the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern, these three display patterns that show the double digits "222" will stop for real.

Up to this point, with reference to Figure 16, we have explained a specific example of a series of effects when an even numbered symbol reach-established effect is performed as a reach-established effect (see Figure 9(B)), followed by a reach-established symbol shrinking and moving effect (see Figure 9(D)). However, as is clear from the notation in Figure 9, a similar reach-established symbol shrinking and moving effect (see Figure 9(D)) can be performed not only when an even numbered symbol reach-established effect is performed as a reach-established effect (see Figure 9(B)), but also when an odd numbered symbol reach-established effect is performed as a reach-established effect, followed by a reach-established symbol focus effect (see Figure 9(C)).

<Characteristics of each performance pattern and notable reach pattern performance>
Up to this point, with reference to each drawing, we have explained that when a reach is achieved with an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbol) (see FIG. 13(F)), a reach symbol attention effect (for example, see FIGS. 13(G) to (I)) that draws attention to the odd numbered symbol is executed, and when a reach is achieved with an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbol) (see FIG. 16(D)), an SPSP reach is executed without executing the reach symbol attention effect as exemplified in FIGS. 13(G) to (I). Here, we will first explain the characteristics of each effect symbol displayed on the display screen 70.

(Features of 3 and 7 patterns)
When the result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game mode is a "jackpot," three effect symbols representing a doublet are pseudo-stopped and displayed on the display screen 70 before the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and as the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the three effect symbols representing the doublet are actually stopped. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, nine types of doublets are provided as the doublets: "111,""222,""333,""444,""555,""666,""777,""888," and "999." With regard to the two types of double numbers of these nine types of double numbers, "777" and "333," when the jackpot symbol X1 (see FIG. 6(B)) that notifies that a 3R probability variable A has been won is displayed, the three effect symbols that indicate the double numbers "777" or "333" may actually stop, whereas when the jackpot symbol X2 (see FIG. 6(B)) that notifies that a 3R normal variable has been won is displayed, the three effect symbols that indicate the double numbers "777" or "333" will not actually stop. From these facts, it can be said that both the three effect symbols that indicate the double numbers "777" and the three effect symbols that indicate the double numbers "333" are effect symbols that definitely notify a probability variable jackpot.

(Features of 2, 4, 6, and 8 designs)
On the other hand, with regard to the four types of double numbers consisting of the same three even-numbered symbols, "222,""444,""666," and "888," when the jackpot symbol X2 (see FIG. 6(B)) that notifies that a 3R normal win has been won is displayed, the three effect symbols representing any of the four types of double numbers will mostly stop, and when the jackpot symbol X1 (see FIG. 6(B)) that notifies that a 3R probability variable A win has been won, the possibility of the three effect symbols representing any of the four types of double numbers stopping is extremely low. From this, it can be said that the three effect symbols representing any of the four types of double numbers consisting of three even-numbered symbols are basically effect symbols that cannot be expected to result in a probability variable jackpot.

(Features of 1, 5, and 9 patterns)
Furthermore, the three kinds of double numbers consisting of the same three odd-numbered symbols "111,""555," and "999" (excluding symbols 3 and 7) have the following characteristics: In other words, in both cases where the jackpot symbol X2 (see FIG. 6(B)) that notifies that a 3R normal win has been won is stopped and displayed, and where the jackpot symbol X1 (see FIG. 6(B)) that notifies that a 3R special A win has been won, three performance symbols that represent any of the above three kinds of double numbers will actually stop, but the three performance symbols that represent any of the double numbers "111,""555," and "999" are more likely to actually stop in the latter case (in the case of 3R special A) than in the former case (in the case of 3R normal win). For this reason, it can be said that the three performance symbols showing any of the four types of double numbers "111,""555," and "999" are more likely to result in a guaranteed jackpot than the three performance symbols showing any of the four types of double numbers consisting of three even number symbols.

(Features of the Reach Pattern Attention Production)
As is clear from the above description of each effect symbol, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has the characteristic that, when three effect symbols representing any of the four types of repeated numbers, "222,""444,""666," and "888," are pseudo-stopped and then actually stopped, a probability variable jackpot cannot basically be expected (i.e., the possibility of a 3R normal is extremely high). For this reason, if a configuration such as executing a reach symbol attention effect that draws attention to the reach symbol (even symbol) following the even symbol reach formation effect exemplified in Figure 16 (D) is simply applied, the player will become conscious of the 3R normal at the time of the reach formation, and the execution of the reach symbol attention effect, which is supposed to increase interest, may instead decrease interest.

In view of this, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured as described above to execute a reach symbol attention effect that draws attention to the reach symbol (here, odd numbered symbols) when a reach is achieved with an odd numbered symbol as exemplified in FIG. 13(F), but not to execute a reach symbol attention effect that draws attention to the reach symbol (here, even numbered symbols) when a reach is achieved with an even numbered symbol as exemplified in FIG. 16(D). This prevents the above problems from occurring and executes a highly entertaining reach symbol attention effect.

Although not shown in the figure, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, for example, the left 3 and left 4 symbols that make up the left column of symbols are pseudo-stopped and the right 3 and right 4 symbols that make up the right column of symbols are pseudo-stopped, which can result in a reach with a 3 symbol and a reach with a 4 symbol being achieved simultaneously. In this way, when a reach with two different reach symbols is achieved simultaneously, a reach symbol attention effect that draws attention to the 3 symbol is executed, but a reach symbol attention effect that draws attention to the 4 symbol is not executed.

(Other configurations related to reach symbol attention effects)
In addition, with regard to the reach symbol attention effect, other embodiments may adopt the following configuration. That is, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a reach symbol attention effect is executed when a reach is achieved with an odd numbered symbol, but a reach symbol attention effect is not executed when a reach is achieved with an even numbered symbol. In contrast, other embodiments may adopt a configuration in which, taking into account the above-mentioned characteristics of each effect symbol, for example, a reach symbol attention effect is executed when a reach is achieved with a 7 symbol or a 3 symbol (i.e., when it is determined that a jackpot game related to 3R probability variable A will be executed if the symbols are aligned), but a reach symbol attention effect is not executed when a reach is achieved with an effect symbol other than a 7 symbol or a 3 symbol (i.e., when it is determined that a jackpot game related to 3R normal will be executed if the symbols are aligned).

In addition, in this embodiment, an example will be described in which a reach symbol attention effect is executed that combines the enlargement and movement of the left and right symbols displayed as pseudo-stopped reach symbols (see FIG. 13(G)), the rotation of these left and right symbols (see FIG. 13(G)), and a combination effect in which these left and right symbols combine (see FIG. 13(I)). In contrast, other embodiments may employ a configuration in which a reach symbol attention effect is executed that draws attention to the reach symbols without moving or changing the size of the left and right symbols displayed as pseudo-stopped reach symbols. To employ such a configuration, for example, decorative images that increase the attention of the reach symbols (left and right symbols) may be displayed around the reach symbols, or decorative images that increase the attention of the reach symbols (left and right symbols) may be displayed so that they overlap with part of the reach symbols.

In other embodiments, the reach symbol attention effect may be a combination of two or more of: a change in the display mode (for example, at least one of the size, shape, and display color) of the reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol), a change in the display position of the reach symbols, and the display of the decorative image.

Another possible reach symbol attention effect is one in which two characters appear on the display screen 70, with one character pointing at the left symbol as the reach symbol and the other character pointing at the right symbol as the reach symbol, and a voice such as "Attention!!" being output from the speaker 38.

In other embodiments, a focus effect may be executed to draw attention to the second effect symbol (in this embodiment, an odd symbol) at a timing other than when a reach is achieved. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above with reference to Figures 10 (D) and (G), a pseudo-stop of the 7 symbol occurs as the middle symbol to notify the execution of a pseudo consecutive effect, and therefore a focus effect may be executed to draw attention to this middle 7 symbol at the timing when this middle 7 symbol has pseudo-stopped.

[About the SPSP Reach production route]
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as illustrated in Figure 9, two presentation routes, a first presentation route and a second presentation route, are prepared as a series of presentation flows performed during an SPSP reach. Note that Figure 9 illustrates a presentation flow in which a presentation branch occurs after a reach establishment instigation presentation (see Figure 9(A)), and the presentation of the first presentation route or the second presentation route proceeds. On the other hand, as described above with reference to Figure 8, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment provides a development pattern in which a normal reach (see Figure 8(L)) develops to an SPSP reach (see Figure 8(P)) via an SP reach (see Figure 8(O)), and a development pattern in which a normal reach develops directly to an SPSP reach without passing through an SP reach. Even when an SPSP reach develops through either of these development patterns, the presentation of the first presentation route or the second presentation route illustrated in Figure 9 proceeds during the SPSP reach.

<SPSP Reach First Route Production>
Here, first, the flow of a series of effects in the first effect route and specific examples of these effects will be explained with reference to Figures 9 and 11. Figure 11 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the effects in the first effect route of an SPSP reach, and shows a specific example of the series of effects from the direct development from a normal reach to an SPSP reach until a miss notification effect is executed.

When the SPSP reach effect proceeds along the first effect route in Figure 9, there are three main patterns. The first pattern is a reach establishment effect (see Figure 9(B)) (which notifies the establishment of reach with odd-numbered symbols), followed by a reach symbol focus effect (see Figure 9(C)) (which draws attention to the odd-numbered symbols as reach symbols), and then a reach symbol shrinking movement effect (see Figure 9(D)). Next, the second pattern is a reach establishment effect (see Figure 9(B)) (which notifies the establishment of reach with even-numbered symbols), followed by a reach symbol shrinking movement effect (see Figure 9(D)) without a reach symbol focus effect (see Figure 9(C)). And the third pattern is a pattern in which a reach symbol shrinking movement effect (see Figure 9(D)) is performed when a normal reach (or SP reach) develops into an SPSP reach, as in Figure 8.

Here, a specific example of the series of effects that will occur when the second pattern of effects is performed and the effects proceed along the first presentation route has been described above with reference to Figure 16. Here, we will explain the flow of the series of effects that will occur when the third pattern of effects is performed and the effects proceed along the first presentation route, and a specific example of that flow.

Figure 11(A) shows an example of a normal reach being achieved following the reach-achi effect of Figure 10(I), which notifies the achievement of a reach with four symbols. In this normal reach, as shown in Figure 11(A), after a reach is achieved with four symbols on the left and four symbols on the right, the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols gradually decreases, and an effect is produced in which a middle symbol (here, a four-symbol middle symbol) that is the same as the reach symbol (here, four symbols on the left and four symbols on the right) descends so as to approach the pay line defined by the reach symbol.

(Reach symbol shrinking and moving effect)
Here, if a variation effect pattern that progresses directly from a normal reach to an SPSP reach without passing through an SP reach is set by the sub-CPU 91 at the start of the variation, a reach symbol shrinking movement effect (see FIG. 9(D)) is performed following the normal reach (see FIG. 11(B)). Specifically, when the scroll display of the middle row of symbols in a normal reach is being performed, the same middle symbol as the reach symbol (here, the middle 4 symbol) passes through the active line without stopping on the active line, and then the scroll speed of the middle row of symbols increases, making it difficult to identify the middle symbol, and then the middle symbol becomes hidden. Then, as exemplified in FIG. 11(B), the left 4 symbol shrinks and moves to the upper left area of the display screen 70, making one clockwise rotation with the scrolling direction as the axis, and then moving to the upper left area. At the same time, the right 4 symbol shrinks and moves to the upper right area of the display screen 70, making one clockwise rotation with the scrolling direction as the axis, and then moving to the upper right area.

(The state in which the performance pattern is displayed in the first display mode)
By performing such a reach symbol shrinking movement effect, the reach symbol will be displayed in a pseudo-stop state in a state where it is reduced in the upper left and right areas until the end of the variable display of this first special symbol (see Figure 9 (E) and Figure 11 (C)). Figure 11 (C) shows an example in which the left four symbols are displayed in a pseudo-stop state in a state where they are reduced in the upper left area, and the right four symbols are displayed in a pseudo-stop state in a state where they are reduced in the upper right area.

When the reach symbols are shrunk to the upper left and right areas and pseudo-stopped in this manner, the SPSP reach (first route effect) begins (see Figures 9(F) and 11(D)). When this SPSP reach begins, although not shown in Figure 11(D), an SPSP reach effect image such as an effect image for the second half battle is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70 as an SPSP reach effect image displayed during the SPSP reach (see Figure 9(G)).

(First possibility suggestion)
Next, in the process of the SPSP reach progressing while the reach symbols are displayed in a pseudo-stop state in a state where they are reduced in size in the upper left and right areas, a first possibility suggestion effect may be performed (see FIGS. 9(H) and 11(E)), suggesting that a winning notification effect (see FIG. 9(S)) may be executed. In this embodiment, the first possibility suggestion effect is an effect in which a possibility suggestion character indicating the degree of possibility that a winning notification effect will be executed is displayed between the reach symbols on the left and right in the upper area of the display screen 70, and FIG. 11(E) illustrates a state in which the character "CHANCE" is displayed as the possibility suggestion character.

In this embodiment, two types of possibility suggestion characters are provided: "CHANCE" and "VERY GOOD CHANCE." The first possibility suggestion effect displaying the characters "VERY GOOD CHANCE" has a higher reliability of a jackpot than the first possibility suggestion effect displaying the characters "CHANCE."

Note that this first possibility suggestion effect can be executed when the SPSP Reach effect is progressing along the first effect route, but cannot be executed when the SPSP Reach effect is progressing along the second effect route, and can be said to be an effect exclusive to the first effect route.

Although not shown in Figure 9, Figure 11 (F) illustrates an example of a first button operation prompting effect being performed in the latter half of an SPSP reach, encouraging the player to operate the first button 35. In this first button operation prompting effect, a first button image modeled after the first button 35 and a valid period gauge indicating the remaining valid period during which operation of the first button 35 is valid are displayed on the display screen 70.

Here, if the player operates the first effect button 35 within the validity period for the first effect button operation prompt effect shown in FIG. 11 (F), or if the validity period ends without the first effect button 35 being operated, a cut-in is performed in which, for example, a predetermined cut-in image is superimposed on an effect image (other than a reach pattern) displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 11 (G)). This cut-in is an effect that indicates the degree of likelihood that a winning notification effect will be executed in the current pattern change, and there are three types of cut-ins available: weak cut-in, medium cut-in, and strong cut-in. The weak cut-in is an effect that is presented entirely in green and displays a cut-in image representing one character; the medium cut-in is an effect that is presented entirely in red and displays a cut-in image representing two characters; and the strong cut-in is an effect that is presented entirely in gold and displays a cut-in image representing three characters. Here, if we rank the above three types of cut-ins in order of jackpot reliability (the likelihood that a winning notification effect will be displayed during this pattern change) from lowest to highest, we get weak cut-ins, medium cut-ins, and strong cut-ins. Note that Figure 11(G) shows an example of a strong cut-in being displayed.

In this way, when a cut-in occurs and the SPSP reach reaches its final stage, a second button operation prompting effect is performed, not shown in Figure 9, to encourage the player to operate the second button 36 (see Figure 11 (H)). In this second button operation prompting effect, as exemplified in Figure 11 (H), a second button image modeled after the second button 36, the text "Press!" indicating the operation of the second button 36, and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining validity period during which the operation of the second button 36 is valid are displayed.

Here, if the result of the first special pattern determination executed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the current pattern change is a "miss," then a defeat effect (see Figures 9(I) and 11(I)) showing the main character being defeated by an enemy character is performed as an operation-responsive effect, depending on whether the second effect button 36 is operated during the valid period for the second effect button operation prompt effect, or whether the valid period for the second effect button operation prompt effect has ended without the second effect button 36 being operated. Figure 11(I) shows an example of how the defeat effect is performed, showing the enemy character leaving after defeating the main character.

In this way, when a defeat effect is performed as the result effect of a battle effect (second half battle) during an SPSP reach, although this is not shown in Figure 11, three effect symbols indicating a reach loss (for example, the three effect symbols "434" in this case) are pseudo-stopped just before the end of this pattern change, and as the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a loss notification effect (see Figure 9 (J)) is performed in which the three effect symbols indicating the reach loss are actually stopped. In this way, when a loss notification effect is performed, the double-digit effect symbol attention effect is not performed.

(Featured double-digit pattern)
On the other hand, in the example of the presentation shown in Fig. 11, if the result of the first special symbol determination executed at the start of this symbol change is a "jackpot," then, in response to the second button 36 being operated during the valid period for the second button operation prompt effect, or the valid period for the second button operation prompt effect ending without the second button 36 being operated, instead of a defeat effect, a victory effect (see Fig. 9(Q)) showing the main character defeating the enemy character and a double-digit effect symbol attention effect (see Fig. 9(R)) that draws attention to the effect symbol suggesting that a jackpot game will be played are performed as operation-responsive effects. In the example of the presentation shown in Fig. 11, a reach with four symbols is achieved, so as a double-digit effect symbol attention effect, an effect that draws attention to the three effect symbols showing the double digits "444" is performed. In this way, when the winning effect and the double-digit effect pattern attention effect are performed, the three effect patterns showing the double-digit numbers "444" are pseudo-stopped and displayed in their normal size, and as the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern, these three effect patterns showing the double-digit numbers "444" come to a real stop.

Up to this point, with reference to Figure 11 (and Figure 9), we have explained the effects that take place during an SPSP reach, using as an example a case where a normal reach progresses directly to an SPSP reach and the effects of the first effect route proceed. However, the effects of the first effect route are also performed when the effect proceeds directly from the reach completion effect of Figure 9(B) (here, an even pattern reach completion effect) to the reach pattern shrinking movement effect of Figure 9(D), or when the effect proceeds from the reach completion effect of Figure 9(B) (here, an odd pattern reach completion effect) to the reach pattern focus effect of Figure 9(C) and then to the reach pattern shrinking movement effect of Figure 9(D).

<Attention to the reach pattern → First performance route>
Figure 17 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a series of effects, in which a reach pattern attention effect (see Figure 9 (C)) is followed by a reach pattern reduction movement effect (see Figure 9 (D)), and continues until just before the first effect route effect is started as an SPSP reach effect.

Figure 17(A) shows an example of a reach-achi triggering effect (see Figure 9(A)) being performed, similar to Figure 16(A) and other figures described above. Here, if the sub-CPU 91 has set a reach-achi with 7 symbols at the start of the current symbol change, the following effect will be performed.

In other words, once the reach-establishment teasing effect of Figure 17(A) is performed, a left-right symbol slow movement effect is performed in which the left 7 symbol and the right 7 symbol slowly descend simultaneously (see Figure 17(B)). This left-right symbol slow movement effect illustrated in Figure 17(B) is performed in the same way as the left-right symbol slow movement effect described above based on Figure 13(D).

When the left 7 symbol and the right 7 symbol descend to a predetermined height in the vertical direction of the display screen 70 due to the left and right symbol slow movement effect in Figure 17 (B), a first button operation prompting effect is performed to encourage the player to operate the first button 35 (see Figure 16 (C)). In the same way as described above based on Figure 13 (E), a first button operation prompting effect is performed to encourage the player to operate the first button 35.

(Reach formation effect with odd number symbols)
Here, since it is set at the start of the current symbol variation that a reach will be achieved with the 7 symbol, a reach-achi effect (see FIG. 9(B)) that notifies that a reach has been achieved with the 7 symbol is performed in response to the player operating the first effect button 35, or in response to the expiration of the valid period for the first effect button operation prompt effect of FIG. 17(C) without the player operating the first effect button 35 (see FIG. 17(D)). This reach-achi effect of FIG. 17(D) is performed in the same manner as the reach-achi effect described above based on FIG. 13(F).

(Attention-grabbing reach symbol effects)
In this way, when a reach-achi achievement effect (odd number reach-achi achievement effect: see FIG. 9(B)) that notifies the achievement of a reach with the 7 symbol is performed, a reach-achi achievement effect (see FIG. 9(C)) is performed following this reach-achi achievement effect (see FIGS. 17(E) to (G)). Note that the reach-achi achievement effect here is performed in the same way as the reach-achi achievement effect described above based on FIGS. 13(G) to (I), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, when the presentation progresses from the reach symbol focus presentation (see Figures 9(C) and 17(E)-(G)) to the presentation of the first presentation route of the SPSP reach (see Figure 9), the following presentation is performed. Specifically, a single giant 7 symbol displayed by the combined presentation of Figure 17(G) is separated into a left 7 symbol and a right 7 symbol, and a reach symbol separation and reduction presentation is performed in which these 7 symbols are reduced in size and move away from each other (see Figure 17(H)). Figure 17(H) shows the left 7 symbol moving leftward while the right 7 symbol moves rightward. In this way, when one giant 7 symbol is separated into two 7 symbols (a left 7 symbol and a right 7 symbol) by the reach symbol separation and reduction effect of Figure 17 (H), although not shown in the figure, the left 7 symbol and the right 7 symbol each return to the position they were displayed in during the reach formation effect (see Figure 17 (D)), and are temporarily displayed in a pseudo-stop state at that position.

In this way, after a reach symbol attention effect (see Figures 9(C) and 17(E)-(G)) that draws attention to the 7 symbol as a reach symbol is performed, a reach symbol separation and shrinking effect (see Figure 17(H)) is performed, and then a reach symbol shrinking and moving effect is performed (see Figures 9(D) and 17(I)). This reach symbol shrinking and moving effect illustrated in Figure 17(I) is performed in the same way as the reach symbol shrinking and moving effect described above based on Figure 11(B), except that the effect symbols that shrink and move are different. And, as is clear from the notation in Figures 11(B)-(I), when the reach symbol shrinking and moving effect of Figure 17(I) is performed, the effect will progress to the effect of the first effect route of the SPSP reach.

Here, we have explained an example in which a reach symbol focus effect (see Figures 17(E)-(G)) that draws attention to the 7 symbol as a reach symbol is followed by a reach symbol separation/reduction effect (see Figure 17(H)) that separates one giant 7 symbol into two 7 symbols (left 7 symbol and right 7 symbol) and a reach symbol reduction/movement effect (see Figure 17(I)). However, if a reach symbol focus effect is performed that draws attention to an odd symbol other than the 7 symbol (for example, the 3 symbol) and then a first effect route effect is performed, the effects will proceed in the same manner as Figures 17(E)-(I), except that the reach symbol is different.

Note that the reach symbol separation and shrinking effect (see Figure 17 (H)) and the reach symbol shrinking and moving effect (see Figure 17 (I)) are performed when the effect progresses to the SPSP reach first effect route effect after the reach symbol focus effect. If the effect progresses to the SPSP reach second effect route effect (see Figure 9) after the reach symbol focus effect, these reach symbol separation and shrinking effect and reach symbol shrinking and moving effect effects will not be performed, and other effects will be performed.

<SPSP Reach second production route production>
Next, with reference to Figures 9, 14, and 15, the flow of presentation and specific examples of the second presentation route shown in Figure 9 will be described. Here, Figures 14 and 15 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of presentation of the second presentation route of SPSP reach. Note that Figures 14 and 15 show specific examples of presentation of the second presentation route when the presentation of the second presentation route shown in Figure 9 (presentation from Figure 9 (K) onwards) is performed after the reach establishment presentation (see Figures 9 (B) and 13 (F)) and the reach symbol attention presentation (see Figures 9 (C) and 13 (G) to (I)) are performed.

When the second effect route proceeds after the reach symbol focus effect (see Figure 9 (C) and Figures 13 (G)-(I)), the reach symbol focus effect is followed by a reach symbol split effect (see Figure 9 (K) and Figures 14 (A)-(B)). This reach symbol split effect splits a single giant reach symbol (a single giant 7 symbol in the example shown in Figure 13 (I)) displayed by the reach symbol focus effect into multiple tiny reach symbols (here, tiny 7 symbols). Figures 14 (A)-(B) show an example in which a single giant 7 symbol explodes, scattering multiple tiny 7 symbols from the giant 7 symbol, causing the giant 7 symbol to gradually become smaller.

The reach symbol separation and reduction effect described above based on Figure 17 (H) separates one giant 7 symbol into two regular-sized 7 symbols in order to progress the effect to the first effect route of the SPSP reach. However, the reach symbol splitting effect (see Figures 14 (A)-(B)) is different from the reach symbol separation and reduction effect in that the tiny 7 symbols, which are the reach symbols after splitting, are significantly smaller than the two regular-sized 7 symbols, and the number of tiny 7 symbols after splitting is significantly greater (compared to the two regular-sized 7 symbols).

The reach symbol splitting effect (see Figure 9 (K) and Figures 14 (A)-(B)) is an effect in which one large reach symbol (e.g., a 7 symbol) displayed by the reach symbol attention effect (see Figure 9 (C)), which draws attention to the reach symbol (here, odd number symbols), splits into multiple tiny reach symbols (e.g., tiny 7 symbols). For this reason, while the reach symbol splitting effect (see Figure 9 (K)) may be performed after the reach symbol attention effect, if the reach symbol attention effect is not performed, that is, if a reach establishment effect (see Figure 9 (B)) which notifies the establishment of a reach with an even number symbol is performed, the reach symbol splitting effect (see Figure 9 (K)) is not performed.

(The state in which the performance pattern is displayed in the second display mode)
Next, when the reach symbol splitting effect (see FIG. 9(K) and FIGS. 14(A)-(B)) is performed, a background image representing a minimal reach symbol is displayed (see FIG. 9(L) and FIG. 14(C)). Specifically, the sub-CPU 91 changes the background image from a normal background image (not shown) to a background image of a minimal odd symbol pattern (here, a minimal 7 symbol background of a minimal 7 symbol pattern). This allows the player to identify the reach symbol based on the background image displayed during the second effect route of the SPSP reach symbol. Furthermore, since the 7 symbol in this embodiment is an effect symbol that, if aligned, confirms a win in the 3R probability A (see FIG. 6(B)), by continuously displaying the minimal 7 symbol background during the second effect route, it is possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for a probability jackpot.

The minimal 7 symbol background is displayed when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner during normal gameplay. For example, the minimal 7 symbol background is displayed across the entire display screen 70 so that each minimal 7 symbol represented by the minimal 7 symbol background appears to oscillate. Therefore, the player can recognize that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by seeing each minimal 7 symbol oscillating.

Here, we will compare the display modes of the reach symbols when the SPSP reach progresses along the first presentation route and when the SPSP reach progresses along the second presentation route.

When the SPSP reach progresses along the first presentation route, as described above with reference to Figures 11(C)-(I), for example, the left symbol as the reach symbol is displayed in a quasi-stop state in the upper left area in a reduced state, and the right symbol as the reach symbol is displayed in a quasi-stop state in the upper right area in a reduced state. Note that these left and right symbols displayed when the presentation is progressing along the first presentation route are not shown in the figures, but are superimposed on the background image.

On the other hand, when an SPSP reach progresses via the second presentation route, there is no concept of left or right symbols, and the reach symbol is represented by an odd-numbered symbol background, such as the above-mentioned minimal 7 symbol background, as exemplified in Figures 14(C)-(I) and 15(A).

As such, the display mode of the reach symbol differs between the first and second presentation routes, so the player can easily determine whether the presentation is progressing on the first presentation route or the second presentation route based on the display mode of the reach symbol during an SPSP reach.

Note that Figures 14(C)-(I) and Figure 15(A) show an example in which a reach with a 7 symbol has been achieved, and therefore a minimal 7 symbol background with a minimal 7 symbol pattern is displayed; however, if a reach with a 3 symbol has been achieved, for example, a minimal 3 symbol background with a minimal 3 symbol pattern will be displayed, and if a reach with a 5 symbol has been achieved, for example, a minimal 5 symbol background with a minimal 5 symbol pattern will be displayed.

However, this minimal odd number pattern background is only displayed when a reach is achieved using odd number patterns and a reach pattern attention effect (see Figure 9 (C)) is performed, which draws attention to the odd number pattern as a reach pattern, so the minimal even number pattern background for even number pattern designs will never be displayed.

When the display of the extremely small odd symbol background (here, the extremely small 7 symbol background) begins as described above, a background extremely small reach symbol intermittent illumination effect (see Figure 9 (M)) begins, which intermittently illuminates the extremely small reach symbol (here, the extremely small 7 symbol) represented by the extremely small odd symbol background. This background extremely small reach symbol intermittent illumination effect is an effect in which each extremely small odd symbol (the extremely small 7 symbol in the example shown in Figure 14) represented by the extremely small odd symbol background is intermittently illuminated; Figures 14 (D), (F), and (H) show examples of when each extremely small 7 symbol is illuminated, while Figures 14 (E), (G), and (I) show examples of when each extremely small 7 symbol is not illuminated.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when a reach is achieved with an odd numbered symbol, a reach symbol attention effect is performed to draw attention to the odd numbered symbol. However, when the SPSP reach effect is progressing along the second effect route, the intermittent illumination effect of the extremely small reach symbol in the background is performed intermittently as described above. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the reach symbol (odd numbered symbol) not only when a reach is achieved with an odd numbered symbol, but also during the second effect route of the SPSP reach.

Next, the SPSP reach begins (see Figures 9(N) and 14(E)). The presentation of the SPSP reach here is basically the same as when the presentation of the first presentation route progresses, and when the SPSP reach begins, although not shown in Figure 14(E), presentation images for the second half battle, etc. are displayed across the entire screen area of the display screen 70 as SPSP reach presentation images displayed during the SPSP reach (see Figure 9(O)).

When the first presentation route is being played, the left-hand symbols are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left area, and the right-hand symbols are displayed in a reduced size in the upper right area, so the second half of the battle is played using the central area of the display screen 70, as described above with reference to Figure 9 (G). In contrast, when the second presentation route is being played, the reach symbols are represented by a tiny odd-numbered symbol background, so the second half of the battle can be played using a wider display area than when the first presentation route is being played.

(Second possibility suggestion)
Next, as the presentation of the second presentation route of the SPSP reach progresses, a second possibility suggestion presentation may be performed (see FIG. 9(P) and FIG. 14(G)), suggesting that there is a possibility that a winning notification presentation (see FIG. 9(S)) will be executed. In this embodiment, the second possibility suggestion presentation is a presentation in which vertically long strip-shaped images representing letters indicating the degree of possibility that a winning notification presentation will be executed are displayed on both the left and right sides of the display screen 70. FIG. 14(G) illustrates an example of the second possibility suggestion presentation being performed in which a strip-shaped image representing the letters "SUPER" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 70 and a strip-shaped image representing the letters "CHANCE!" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 70.

In this embodiment, the second possibility suggestion effect has only one presentation pattern, as illustrated in Figure 14 (G). As the second presentation route progresses, the second possibility suggestion effect may be executed or may not be executed; the former case has a higher reliability of a jackpot than the latter case (i.e., the winning notification effect of Figure 9 (S) is more likely to be executed during this pattern change).

As a result, when the second presentation route is progressing as part of the SPSP reach presentation, players can enjoy playing the game while hoping that the second possibility suggestion presentation will occur.

This second possibility suggestion effect can be executed when the SPSP Reach effect is progressing along the second effect route, but cannot be executed when the SPSP Reach effect is progressing along the first effect route, and can be said to be an effect exclusive to the second effect route.

Although not shown in Figure 9, Figure 14 (H) illustrates an example of a first button operation prompting effect being performed in the latter half of an SPSP reach, encouraging the player to operate the first button 35. However, since this first button operation prompting effect is performed in the same way as during the first route of effect described above based on Figure 11 (F), a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

Figure 14(I) shows an example of a cut-in occurring in response to the first effect button 35 being operated during the validity period of the first effect button operation prompt effect of Figure 14(H), or in response to the validity period ending without the first effect button 35 being operated. The cut-ins here are of three types: weak cut-ins, medium cut-ins, and strong cut-ins, just like the cut-ins that occur during the first effect route, and Figure 14(H) shows an example of a medium cut-in occurring.

In this way, when a cut-in is made and the SPSP reach reaches its final stage, a second button operation prompting effect is performed, which prompts the player to operate the second button 36 (see FIG. 11 (H)), although this is not shown in FIG. 9. This second button operation prompting effect is performed in the same way as the second button operation prompting effect in FIG. 11 (H) that is performed during the first route, except that it is performed while the minimal 7 symbol background is displayed.

If the result of the first special symbol determination executed by the main CPU 81 at the start of this symbol change is a "miss," then, depending on whether the second symbol button 36 is operated during the valid period for the second symbol operation prompt effect, or whether the valid period for the second symbol operation prompt effect has ended without the second symbol button 36 being operated, a defeat effect similar to that described above based on Figure 11 (I) (see Figure 9 (T)) is performed, and a background destruction effect is performed (see Figure 15 (G)) showing the panel with the tiny 7 symbol background being destroyed as a miss indication effect suggesting a miss. The display of the tiny 7 symbol background ends, and the background is restored to the normal background.

Then, as a miss notification effect in Figure 9 (U), just before the display of the first special symbol changes, three symbols indicating a miss of "767" are pseudo-stopped (see Figure 15 (H)), and as the missing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the three symbols indicating a miss of "767" actually stop (see Figure 15 (I)).

(Featured double-digit pattern)
On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol determination executed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the current symbol variation is a "jackpot," then, depending on whether the second symbol button 36 is operated during the valid period for the second symbol button operation prompt effect, or whether the valid period for the second symbol button operation prompt effect has ended without the second symbol button 36 being operated, a victory effect (see FIG. 9(Q)) showing the main character defeating the enemy character and a double-digit symbol attention effect (see FIG. 9(R)) that draws attention to the effect symbol suggesting that a jackpot game will be played are performed as operation-responsive effects. Note that the victory effect is omitted in FIG. 15, and specific examples of the double-digit symbol attention effect are shown in FIGS. 15(B) to 15(E).

Here, if the presentation proceeds along the first presentation route, regardless of whether the three presentation symbols representing a doublet are odd or even, a doublet presentation symbol spotlight presentation similar to the above-described doublet presentation symbol spotlight presentation based on Figures 16 (G) to (H) will be performed. This is because, when the presentation proceeds along the first presentation route, the extremely small odd number background (see Figures 14 (C) to (I)) is not displayed. In contrast, as exemplified in Figures 14 and 15, if the extremely small odd number background (here, the extremely small 7 symbol background) is displayed when the presentation proceeds along the second presentation route and a doublet presentation symbol spotlight presentation is performed, a doublet presentation symbol spotlight presentation that is partially different from when the presentation proceeds along the first presentation route will be performed. Specifically, it is as follows:

In other words, in response to the operation of the second effect button 36 in response to the second effect button operation prompt effect of Fig. 15(A), a victory effect is first performed, not shown in Fig. 15, depicting the main character defeating the enemy character. Then, as part of the doublet effect symbol attention effect that follows this victory effect, each of the small odd number symbols represented by the small odd number symbol background is collected (moved) to each of the following display areas: the left symbol display area where the left symbol is displayed in a pseudo-stop state, the middle symbol display area where the middle symbol is displayed in a pseudo-stop state, and the right symbol display area where the right symbol is displayed in a pseudo-stop state. The small odd number symbols collected in each display area are combined to generate a symbol. By repeating this series of effects, a collection combination expansion effect is performed in which the same symbol that appears in each display area gradually becomes larger (see Figs. 15(B)-(C)). Figures 15(B) and (C) show examples of how the smallest 7 symbols displayed in various locations on the display screen 70 are gathered and combined into one of the three display areas, causing the 7 symbols generated in each display area to gradually become larger.

In this way, as a result of the group combination expansion effect, when normal-sized 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped and displayed in each of the right symbol display area, center symbol display area, and right symbol display area, a series of double-digit symbol attention effects similar to those described above based on Figures 16(G)-(H) are executed (see Figures 15(D)-(E)). Figures 15(D)-(E) show an example of how the attention to these three symbol effects increases as the three symbols representing the double digit "777" pseudo-stopped and displayed by the group combination expansion effect of Figures 15(B)-(C) are gradually enlarged.

In this way, when a victory effect (see FIG. 9 (Q)) or a double-digit effect symbol attention effect (see FIG. 9 (R), FIGS. 15 (B) to (E)) is performed in response to operation of the second effect button 36, the three effect symbols representing the double-digit "777" are pseudo-stopped and displayed in their normal size (see FIG. 15 (F)), and as the jackpot symbol (here, jackpot symbol X1 indicating a win in 3R probability change A: see FIG. 6 (B)) is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a win notification effect (see FIG. 9 (S)) is performed in which the three effect symbols representing the double-digit "777" actually stop.

(Other configurations related to double-digit performance pattern attention performance)
The following configuration may be adopted for the double-digit effect symbol attention effect. That is, in this embodiment, when the first effect route of the SPSP reach is performed and then the winning notification effect is performed, the double-digit effect symbol attention effect exemplified in FIGS. 16(G) to (H) is executed. When the second effect route of the SPSP reach is performed and then the winning notification effect is performed, the double-digit effect symbol attention effect exemplified in FIGS. 16(G) to (H) is executed, which is partially different from the double-digit effect symbol attention effect of FIGS. 16(G) to (H). In contrast, in other embodiments, for example, when the effect of the second effect route progresses, the double-digit effect symbol attention effect of FIGS. 15(D) to (E) is executed without the group combination expansion effect of FIGS. 15(B) to (C). Therefore, when the effect progresses along the second effect route, a double-digit effect symbol attention effect common to when the effect progresses along the first effect route may be executed.

In addition, this embodiment will be described using an example in which an effect in which three effect symbols indicating a doublet are simultaneously enlarged is executed as a doublet effect symbol attention effect, but other effects different from the effect exemplified in this embodiment may be executed as a doublet effect symbol attention effect as long as they can draw the player's attention to the three effect symbols indicating a doublet. An example of such other effects would be an effect in which three effect symbols indicating a doublet are displayed in a pseudo-stop state and a decorative image of a predetermined color is added to these effect symbols. It is also conceivable to adopt a method in which the movement or rotation of the three effect symbols indicating a doublet is combined with such other effects to increase the attention of these three effect symbols.

[Features of each noteworthy effect performed in normal effect mode and related effects]
Up to this point, we have explained the featured effects that are performed when effects are controlled in normal effect mode, and the flow and specific examples of the features of the featured effects related to these featured effects, mainly with reference to Figures 8 to 18. Below, we will explain the features of the featured effects and related effects that are performed in normal effect mode with reference to Figure 19. Here, Figure 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the features of the featured effects and related effects that are performed in normal effect mode.

In Figure 19, the effect whose variation type is "pre-target variation" is a pre-reading effect that is performed in a pattern variation prior to the pre-reading target variation, based on the results of a preliminary determination regarding the pre-reading target variation, and the effect whose variation type is "pre-reading target variation" (the variation) is a performance that is performed in the pre-reading target variation, based on the results of the first special pattern determination made at the start of the pre-reading target variation.

(Featured double-digit pattern)
The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to execute a double-digit effect pattern attention effect as a "different attention effect" different from any of the reach symbol attention effect that draws attention to the second effect symbol (an odd number symbol displayed as a reach symbol), the first effect symbol attention effect that draws attention to the first effect symbol (for example, an even number symbol), and the second effect symbol attention effect that draws attention to the second effect symbol (for example, an odd number symbol displayed when a reach symbol is not being executed). Specifically, the gaming machine 1 is configured to execute, for example, a post-reach effect (an example of an "expectation effect") from FIG. 9(C) onward that draws attention to the effect symbol suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed (in this embodiment, three effect symbols indicating a double-digit effect) that draws attention to the effect symbol suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed.

This double-digit performance symbol attention effect has been described above with reference to Figures 8 (Q), 9 (R), 15 (B)-(E), 16 (G)-(H), etc., and has the characteristic that it can be executed if the result of the first special pattern determination performed by the main CPU 81 when the first special pattern begins to change in normal gaming mode is a "jackpot," but it will not be executed if the result of this first special pattern determination is a "miss." For this reason, the double-digit performance symbol attention effect is an effect that indicates a strong possibility of a jackpot when it occurs (i.e., an effect with a 100% jackpot reliability), and can be said to be a definitive suggestion effect that definitively suggests that a win notification effect will be executed.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, only in the first case where a win notification effect is executed in an SPSP reach, a double-digit display symbol focus effect is executed prior to this win notification effect, and in the second case where a win notification effect is executed in a normal reach, or in the third case where a win notification effect is executed in an SP reach, a double-digit display symbol focus effect is not executed. In contrast to this, in other embodiments, in the second and third cases, the double-digit display symbol focus effect may be executed prior to the win notification effect, as in the first case.

(First performance pattern featured performance)
As described above based on Figures 8 and 12, the first performance pattern attention effect (see Figure 8 (D)) is an effect that draws attention to the first performance pattern (in this embodiment, an even number pattern) displayed by the weak chance eye effect (see Figure 8 (C)) when the pre-target fluctuation in which the no-reach effect and miss notification effect are performed ends (see Figures 12 (C) to (D)), and in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the first performance pattern attention effect is set to approximately 15% (see Figure 19).

In this embodiment, as described above, the jackpot reliability of the first performance symbol focus effect is set to a relatively high value of approximately 15%, and in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the first performance symbol focus effect is executed (together with the weak chance eye effect) in the target pre-variation, some kind of reach effect will always be executed in the subsequent pre-read target variation. This is because the sub-CPU 91 executes the first performance symbol focus effect only when advance judgment information is obtained indicating that the first special pattern variation pattern that will result in the execution of some reach effect in the pre-read target variation will be selected at the start of the pre-read target variation. Furthermore, the combination of the weak chance eye effect and the first performance symbol focus effect in the target pre-variation makes it easier for the double-digit performance symbol focus effect (and win notification effect) to be executed in the pre-read target variation than when the weak chance eye effect is executed alone in the target pre-variation. For this reason, by executing the first performance symbol attention effect in the pre-target variation before a reach is achieved in the predictive target variation and a reach effect is performed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance symbol, and as a result, it is possible to effectively suggest that there is a possibility that a performance symbol attention effect such as a double-digit performance symbol attention effect will be executed in the predictive target variation.

(Second performance pattern attention performance)
As described above based on Figures 8 and 12, the second performance pattern attention effect (see Figure 8 (F)) is an effect that draws attention to the second performance pattern (in this embodiment, an odd numbered pattern) displayed by the strong chance eye effect (see Figure 8 (E)) when the pre-target fluctuation in which the no-reach effect and miss notification effect are performed ends (see Figures 12 (G) to (H)), and in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the second performance pattern attention effect is set to approximately 31% (see Figure 19).

In this embodiment, as described above, the jackpot reliability of the second performance pattern focus effect is set to approximately 31%, which is higher than the jackpot reliability of the first performance pattern focus effect (approximately 15% in this embodiment). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when a second performance pattern focus effect is executed in a pre-target variation (together with a strong chance eye effect), a reach effect of SP reach or higher (at least one of SP reach or SPSP reach) is always executed in the subsequent pre-read target variation. This is because the sub-CPU 91 executes the second performance pattern focus effect only when advance determination information is obtained indicating that a first special pattern variation pattern that will result in at least one of SP reach or SPSP reach being executed in the pre-read target variation will be selected at the start of the pre-read target variation. Furthermore, the second performance symbol focus effect has the characteristic that when a strong chance eye effect and a second performance symbol focus effect are combined in the target pre-change, it is more likely that a doublet effect pattern focus effect (and a win notification effect) will be executed in the pre-read target change than when a strong chance eye effect is executed alone in the target pre-change. Therefore, by executing the second performance symbol focus effect in the target pre-change before a reach is achieved in the pre-read target change and a reach effect of SP reach or higher is executed, it is possible to focus the player's attention more on the performance symbol than when the first performance symbol focus effect is executed, and as a result, it is possible to effectively suggest that a focus effect such as a doublet effect pattern focus effect may be executed in the pre-read target change.

(Attention-grabbing reach symbol effects)
The reach pattern attention effect (see Figures 8(V) and 9(C)) is an attention effect that draws attention to the second performance pattern (in this embodiment, an odd numbered pattern) when a reach is achieved using a performance pattern, and when a reach is achieved using a performance pattern that targets the first performance pattern (in this embodiment, an even numbered pattern), no attention effect that draws attention to this first performance pattern is executed.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 8, the reach symbol attention effect (see FIG. 8(V)) is an effect that is executed following the reach achievement effect (see FIG. 8(U)) that follows the reach achievement teaser effect (see FIG. 8(S)) before the start of the SPSP reach (see FIG. 8(P)). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the reach symbol attention effect is not executed following the reach achievement effect of FIG. 8(K). In this way, the reach symbol attention effect is not executed when the reach achievement effect of FIG. 8(K) is executed. This is because, after the reach achievement effect of FIG. 8(K), a miss notification effect (see FIG. 8(N)) is often executed in a normal reach (see FIG. 8(L)). If a reach symbol attention effect were to be executed before the start of such a normal reach, it would cause discomfort to the player, and there is a concern that it would decrease interest rather than increase it.

In this way, in this embodiment, the reach symbol attention effect (see FIG. 8(V)), which is executed following the reach completion effect (see FIG. 8(U)) that is executed after the reach completion prompting effect (see FIG. 8(S)), has a jackpot reliability set to approximately 39%. In this embodiment, the reach completion prompting effect, which has a relatively high jackpot reliability, is executed when a reach is achieved with odd symbols, but is not executed when a reach is achieved with even symbols. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing while hoping that the reach completion effect (see FIG. 8(U)) that notifies the achievement of a reach with odd symbols will be executed, rather than the reach completion effect (see FIG. 8(U)) that notifies the achievement of a reach with even symbols.

(A reduction of the reach symbol is displayed in the upper left and right areas)
As described above based on Figures 9 (D) to (F) and Figures 16 (D) to (F), in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the first presentation route is presented as an SPSP reach presentation, the presentation pattern is displayed in the first display mode, where the left pattern as a reach pattern is displayed in a pseudo-stop state in a reduced state in the upper left area of the display screen 70, and the right pattern as a reach pattern is displayed in a pseudo-stop state in a reduced state in the upper right area of the display screen 70.

As is clear from the notation in Figure 9, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in some of the cases where the doublet effect symbol attention effect (see Figure 9(R)) and the win notification effect (see Figure 9(S)) are performed, an effect is performed in which the reach symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas (see Figure 9(E)). Furthermore, in the doublet effect symbol attention effect, as described above based on Figures 16(G)-(H), etc., an effect is performed that draws attention to the three effect symbols indicating the doublet, whereas in the effect in which the reach symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas, as is clear from a comparison between the notation in Figure 16(F) and the notation in Figures 16(G)-(H), an effect is performed that subtly draws attention to the left and right symbols of the three effect symbols. For this reason, the effect of displaying the reach symbol in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas, the double-digit effect symbol focus effect, as shown in Figure 19, can be said to be an effect that suggests there is a possibility that the double-digit effect symbol focus effect will be executed, and in this embodiment, the reliability of this jackpot is set to approximately 27%.

(First possibility suggestion)
As described above, the first possibility suggestion effect (see FIGS. 9(H) and 11(E)) is an effect in which possibility suggestion characters indicating the degree of possibility that a winning notification effect will be executed are displayed between the left and right reach symbols in the upper area of the display screen 70. As described above, in this embodiment, two types of possibility suggestion characters are prepared: "CHANCE" and "VERY GOOD CHANCE." The jackpot reliability of the first possibility suggestion effect displaying the characters "CHANCE" is set to approximately 18%, and the jackpot reliability of the first possibility suggestion effect displaying the characters "VERY GOOD CHANCE" is set to approximately 40%. FIG. 11(E) illustrates an example of the first possibility suggestion effect displaying the characters "CHANCE."

As is clear from the notation in Figure 9, this first possibility suggestion effect (see Figure 9(H)) is an effect that can be executed when an effect in which the reach symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas (see Figure 9(E)) is being performed, i.e., during part of the time when the first effect route is being performed as an SPSP reach effect, but is not executed when the second effect route is being performed as an SPSP reach effect (i.e., when an effect in which a background image representing a very small reach symbol is being displayed is being performed) (see Figure 19).

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute an icon change effect targeting a reserved icon that suggests that a pre-read target change is on hold, based on the results (pre-determination information) of a pre-determination process related to the right to determine the first special pattern that corresponds to the pre-read target change (see FIG. 8). The first possibility suggestion effect has the characteristic that, when an icon change effect is executed, the first possibility suggestion effect is more likely to be executed than when the icon change effect is not executed. Therefore, by executing an icon change effect targeting a reserved icon that suggests that a pre-read target change is on hold prior to the start of the pre-read target change, the first effect route will proceed as an SPSP reach effect in the pre-read target change, and the player can be made to expect that the first possibility suggestion effect will be executed in the process.

In this embodiment, in order to achieve the above-mentioned feature that the first possibility suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when an icon change effect is executed compared to when an icon change effect is not executed, the sub-CPU 91 performs the following processing. That is, when advance determination information relating to the right to determine the first special pattern corresponding to the pre-read target change is obtained indicating that a first special pattern change pattern in which an SPSP reach is executed in the pre-read target change will be selected at the start of the pre-read target change, the icon change effect targeting the reserved icon indicating that the pre-read target change is on hold is executed with a higher probability than when advance determination information is obtained indicating that a first special pattern change pattern in which an SPSP reach is not executed in the pre-read target change will be selected at the start of the pre-read target change.

(Displaying a background image showing a minimal reach pattern)
As described above based on Figures 9 (K) to (N) and Figure 14, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the second presentation route (see Figure 9) is performed as the presentation of an SPSP reach, the background image of the extremely small reach pattern is displayed full screen on the display screen 70 as a presentation in which the presentation pattern is displayed in the second display mode.For example, Figure 14 (C) illustrates a state in which, since a reach with a 7 pattern has been achieved, the extremely small 7 pattern background of the extremely small 7 pattern is displayed full screen as the background image of the extremely small reach pattern.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 9, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in some cases where the doublet effect symbol attention effect (see FIG. 9(R)) and the win notification effect (see FIG. 9(S)) are performed, the effect of FIG. 9(L) is performed, displaying a background image representing a very small reach symbol (in this embodiment, a very small odd symbol background). As illustrated in FIG. 19, the jackpot reliability of the effect displaying this background image representing a very small reach symbol is set to approximately 42% in this embodiment, which is higher than the jackpot reliability of the effect displaying the reach symbol in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas (approximately 27% in this embodiment). Therefore, it can be said that the doublet effect symbol attention effect (see FIG. 9(R)) and the win notification effect (see FIG. 9(S)) are more likely to be performed when an effect displaying a background image representing a very small reach symbol is performed than when an effect displaying the reach symbol in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas is performed.

As described above based on Figure 9 etc., the effect of displaying a reduced-size reach symbol in the upper left and right areas (see Figure 9(E)) can be executed regardless of whether the reach symbol is an odd number symbol or an even number symbol, whereas the effect of displaying a background image representing a minimal reach symbol (see Figure 9(L)) is executed only when the reach symbol is an odd number symbol. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the effect of displaying a background image representing a minimal reach symbol (see Figure 9(L)) is executed, it is always preceded by an odd number symbol reach establishment effect (see Figure 9(B)) that notifies the establishment of a reach with an odd number symbol, and a reach symbol attention effect (see Figure 9(C)) that draws attention to the reach symbol (in this embodiment, an odd number symbol). Therefore, instead of the even symbol reach-achi effect that notifies the completion of a reach with an even symbol, the player will first see the odd symbol reach-achi effect that notifies the completion of a reach with an odd symbol, and then the player can enjoy playing while anticipating the performance of the background image that shows the smallest reach symbol.

In this way, by consecutively executing an odd number symbol reach completion effect that notifies players that a reach has been achieved with an odd number symbol, and a reach symbol attention effect that draws attention to the reach symbol (in this embodiment, the odd number symbol), and by further executing an effect that displays a background image representing a minimal reach symbol, it is possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for the execution of the doublet symbol attention effect (and win notification effect).

Note that the reach symbols (minimal odd symbols: see, for example, Figure 14(C)) displayed by a presentation that displays a background image representing a minimal reach symbol (see Figure 9(L)) are smaller than the reach symbols (left and right symbols: see Figure 16(F)) displayed by a presentation that displays a reduced version of the reach symbol in the upper left and right areas (see Figure 9(E)). In other words, when the second presentation route proceeds as the SPSP reach symbol, the displayed reach symbols are smaller than when the first presentation route proceeds as the SPSP reach symbol. This allows players to enjoy the game while paying attention to the size of the reach symbols displayed during an SPSP reach symbol.

(Intermittent illumination of extremely small reach symbols in the background)
The intermittent illumination effect of the extremely small reach symbol in the background (see FIG. 9(M)) is an effect in which the extremely small reach symbol (in this embodiment, the extremely small odd symbol) represented by the extremely small odd symbol background is illuminated intermittently, and FIGS. 14(D) to (I) show an example of a number of extremely small 7 symbols intermittently illuminating as the extremely small reach symbol. This intermittent illumination effect of the extremely small reach symbol in the background uses the extremely small reach symbol represented by the extremely small odd symbol background, and is therefore characterized in that it is only executed when the extremely small reach symbol is displayed by the extremely small odd symbol background (see FIG. 19).

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when an effect displaying a background image representing a tiny reach pattern is executed, an intermittent illumination effect of a tiny reach pattern in the background is always executed as a set, so the jackpot reliability of the intermittent illumination effect of a tiny reach pattern in the background is approximately 42%, the same as the effect displaying a background image representing a tiny reach pattern.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when a reach is achieved with an odd numbered symbol after the reach achievement prompting effect (see Figure 9 (A)), the reach achievement effect (see Figure 9 (B)) and the reach symbol attention effect (see Figure 9 (C)) are executed, and the above-mentioned intermittent light emission effect is executed during the subsequent second effect route, so that it is possible to draw the player's attention to the reach symbol not only when a reach is achieved with an odd numbered symbol, but also thereafter.

(Second possibility suggestion)
As described above, the second possibility suggestion effect (see Fig. 9(P) and Fig. 14(G)) is an effect in which vertically long band-shaped images representing letters indicating the degree of possibility of a winning notification effect being executed are displayed on both the left and right sides of the display screen 70, and in this embodiment, the probability of a winning is set to approximately 55%, as illustrated in Fig. 19. Fig. 14(G) illustrates an example of the second possibility suggestion effect being performed, in which a band-shaped image representing the letters "SUPER" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 70 and a band-shaped image representing the letters "CHANCE!" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 70.

As is clear from the notation in Figure 9, this second possibility suggestion effect (see Figure 9 (P)) is an effect that can be executed when an effect displaying a background image representing a very small reach pattern (see Figure 9 (L)) is being performed, i.e., during part of the time when the second presentation route is progressing as an SPSP reach effect, but is characterized by the fact that it is not executed when the first presentation route is progressing as an SPSP reach effect (i.e., when an effect is being executed in which the reach pattern is displayed in reduced size in the upper left and right areas) (see Figure 19).

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute an icon change effect targeting a reserved icon that suggests that a pre-read target change is on hold, based on the results (pre-determination information) of a pre-determination process related to the right to determine the first special pattern that corresponds to the pre-read target change (see FIG. 8). Similar to the first possibility suggestion effect, the second possibility suggestion effect has the characteristic that, when an icon change effect is executed, the second possibility suggestion effect is more likely to be executed than when the icon change effect is not executed. Therefore, by executing an icon change effect targeting a reserved icon that suggests that a pre-read target change is on hold prior to the start of the pre-read target change, the second effect route will proceed as an SPSP reach effect in the pre-read target change, and the player can be made to expect that the second possibility suggestion effect will be executed in the process.

In this embodiment, when an icon change effect is executed, the sub-CPU 91 performs the following process to achieve the above-mentioned feature that the second possibility suggestion effect is more likely to be executed than when an icon change effect is not executed. That is, when advance determination information relating to the right to determine the first special pattern corresponding to the pre-read target change is obtained indicating that a first special pattern change pattern in which an SPSP reach is executed in the pre-read target change will be selected at the start of the pre-read target change, the icon change effect targeting the reserved icon indicating that the pre-read target change is on hold is executed with a higher probability than when advance determination information is obtained indicating that a first special pattern change pattern in which an SPSP reach is not executed in the pre-read target change will be selected at the start of the pre-read target change.

By performing this type of processing, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can effectively suggest that there is a possibility that the first possibility suggestion effect or the second possibility suggestion effect will be executed by executing an icon change effect targeting the reserved icon, which indicates that a predictive target change is on hold.

[About the effects that occur during jackpot games]
As described above, if the result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is a "jackpot," one of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 (see FIG. 6B ) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41. Accordingly, three effect symbols representing a double number, such as "222," are stopped on the display screen 70. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the double numbers "777" and "333" are effect symbols that definitively indicate that the game will be controlled in a probability variable game state after the jackpot game ends. In some cases where 3R probability variable A is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination (when the jackpot symbol X1 is stopped and displayed), one of these double numbers will be stopped on the display screen 70 as the three effect symbols indicating a probability variable jackpot.

In this way, when the three effect symbols representing the double numbers "777" or "333," which definitely indicate a special jackpot, stop as the jackpot symbol X1 is displayed, a jackpot game is executed, including a long-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 are opened for a long time, as described above based on FIG. 6(B). Therefore, during this long-open round game, a launch promotion effect (see FIGS. 20(B) and (C)) is executed as an in-round effect to encourage the player to launch the game ball aimed at the V prize opening 287. When the game ball passes through the V prize opening 287 during this long-open round game, the launch promotion effect ends, and a V prize notification effect (see FIG. 20(D)) is executed to notify the player that the game ball has entered the V prize.

On the other hand, in some cases where 3R Probability A is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, and in cases where 3R Normal (see Figure 6(B)) is selected, one of seven types of double numbers (excluding the double numbers "777" and "333"), namely "111," "222," "444," "555," "666," "888," and "999," will stop on the display screen 70. Here, if three display symbols representing the double numbers "777" or "333" stop, a guaranteed jackpot notification effect is displayed during the opening period of the jackpot game, definitively announcing that a jackpot has occurred. On the other hand, if three display symbols representing any of the seven types of double numbers stop, an operation prompt effect is displayed during the opening period of the jackpot game, prompting the player to operate the first display button 35, for example. Depending on the operation of the first display button 35, a success effect (announcement of a guaranteed jackpot) or a failure effect (announcement of a normal jackpot) is displayed. Specifically, if the type of jackpot is 3R probability A, a success effect is executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35, and if the type of jackpot is 3R normal, a failure effect is executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35.

In this way, if the above-mentioned probability change confirmation notification effect or a success effect (in response to operation of the first effect button 35) is executed during the opening period of a jackpot game (when 3R probability change A is won), three rounds of long-open round games are played, including a long-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 are long-opened. These three rounds of long-open round games are as described above with reference to Figure 6 (B) and other figures. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned failure effect is executed during the opening period of a jackpot game (when 3R normal win is won), as described above with reference to Figure 6 (B), a first round of round games in which the second large prize opening 28 is short-opened and two long-open round games in which the first large prize opening 26 is long-opened are played.

<When a V prize is announced>
20 is a screen diagram showing an example of a presentation when a V prize is announced during a jackpot game. When the result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is a "jackpot," and the jackpot symbol X1 (see FIG. 6B) indicating a 3R probability variable A is displayed stopped on the first special symbol display 41, three presentation symbols indicating a double number "777," for example, may stop on the display screen 70. In this case, the following presentation is performed during a jackpot game related to the 3R probability variable A.

First, during the opening period of a jackpot game related to 3R Probability Variable A, a predetermined opening effect is executed (see Figure 20 (A)). Specifically, as illustrated in Figure 20 (A), the words "RUSH BONUS" indicating the type of jackpot this time are displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, and the words "RIGHT HIT" and a right-pointing arrow encouraging the player to hit right are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70. The "RUSH BONUS" words definitively notify the player that the game will be controlled in a probability variable game state after the jackpot game ends, and the effect displaying the words "RUSH BONUS" functions as the above-mentioned probability variable confirmation notification effect.

Following the opening period of the jackpot game related to the 3R probability variation A in which such an opening effect is performed, a predetermined in-round effect is executed in association with the first round of round play, which is a long-open round play in which the second large prize entry port 28 and the V prize entry port 287 are long-opened (see Figures 20(B) and (C)). Specifically, as illustrated in Figures 20(B) and (C), three arrows (with the words "hit right") pointing to the V prize entry port 287 and large letters saying "Aim for V" are displayed large on the display screen 70, and a shot promotion effect is executed in which the voice "Aim for V" is output from the speaker 38. In addition, the three "777" effect symbols that actually stopped before the current jackpot game started are displayed small in the upper left area of the display screen 70.

In this way, during the first round of play, in which a launch promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to launch a game ball aimed at the V winning opening 287, the second large winning opening 28 is opened for a long time, and 1.5 seconds after the second large winning opening 28 begins to open, the V winning opening 287 begins to be opened for a long time. This long opening of the V winning opening 287 continues until the tenth game ball enters the second large winning opening 28 or the V winning opening 287 has been open for 10 seconds. Therefore, as long as the player hits the ball to the right in accordance with the launch promotion effect, the player can easily have the game ball enter the V winning opening 287. Note that this embodiment describes an example in which the launch promotion effect begins with the start of the first round of play. However, in other embodiments, the launch promotion effect may begin partway through the opening period or at the start of the opening period.

Next, when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 287 during the first round of play, a predetermined V winning notification effect is executed to notify the player that the game ball has won a V prize (see Figure 20 (D)). Specifically, for example, a display effect is displayed showing two characters holding up a star-shaped emblem containing the letter "V" in joy, and a predetermined V winning notification sound is output from the speaker 38.

In this way, when the V-winning notification effect is executed to notify players that the game ball has entered the V-winning hole during the first round of play, a predetermined interval period begins, and during the subsequent second round of play (the long-open round play of the first large prize slot 26), the star-shaped emblem is displayed in small size in the lower left area of the display screen 70 (see FIG. 20(E)). Although not shown in FIG. 20, the same effect as during the second round of play is displayed during the third round of play. Then, when the ending period of the jackpot play following the third round of play begins, the words "Gekitou RUSH Enter!" are displayed in large size in the center of the display screen 70, and the sound "Gekitou RUSH Enter!" is output from the speaker 38 to notify players that a mode called "Gekitou RUSH" will begin, which definitely notifies players that they are in a "probable chance game state."

[Robot-type gimmick 15 and swinging effects]
Next, with reference to Figure 21, we will explain the schematic configuration of the robot-type gimmick 15 provided in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment and the rocking effect using this robot-type gimmick 15. Here, Figure 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the robot-type gimmick 15 and the rocking effect using the robot-type gimmick 15. As described above based on Figure 1, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the robot-type gimmick 15 is provided in a position on the front frame 31 that can be looked down upon by a seated player. This robot-type gimmick 15 is provided at the back of the upper tray 33, so that when a player looks at the upper tray 33, the robot-type gimmick 15 will naturally come into view.

As shown in Figure 21, the robot-type gimmick 15 is composed of an upper body 151, a lower body 152, and a connecting portion 153. This robot-type gimmick 15 is a movable prop that resembles an ally character that may appear midway through the SPSP reach (second half battle) described above, with the connecting portion 153 representing the waist area of the ally character, the upper body 151 representing the body above the waist, and the lower body 152 representing the body below the waist.

The lower body 152 has both feet (two lower ends) fixed to the front frame 31 (see Figure 1). In contrast, the upper body 151 and the connecting part 153 are fixed to each other, and are configured to be able to move integrally on the lower body 152. Although not shown, the connecting part 153 is provided with a rotational axis whose axial direction is perpendicular to the plane of the paper in Figure 21. Also, although not shown, the robot-type gimmick swing motor 154 (see Figure 5) that operates the robot-type gimmick 15 is provided within the front frame 31 with its rotational axis, the same as the rotational axis of the connecting part 153, and whose axial direction is perpendicular to the plane of the paper in Figure 21. The rotational axis of the robot-type gimmick swing motor 154 is connected to the rotational axis of the robot-type gimmick 15 via a drive transmission mechanism (not shown) so that drive can be transmitted. Therefore, by alternately rotating the rotation shaft of the robot-type gimmick swing motor 154 forward and backward, the upper body 151 (and the connecting part 153) can be swung counterclockwise and clockwise.

Figure 21(A) illustrates the robot gimmick 15 in its initial position. Figure 21(B) illustrates the robot gimmick 15 in a left-tilt position where the upper body 151 (and connecting part 153) is tilted to the left by rotating the rotation axis of the robot gimmick swing motor 154 forward, and Figure 21(C) illustrates the robot gimmick 15 in a right-tilt position where the upper body 151 (and connecting part 153) is tilted to the right by rotating the rotation axis of the robot gimmick swing motor 154 backward.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to execute various swing effects in which the robot gimmick 15 swings between a left-tilted position and a right-tilted position (via its initial position) by the lamp CPU 121 (see Figure 5) controlling the rotation of the robot gimmick swing motor 154. These swing effects will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 22 to 25.

[A series of performances including swinging performances]
In the following, various swing effects performed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state will be explained with reference to Figures 22 and 23. Here, Figure 22 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of a series of effects in the pre-target variation, and Figure 23 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of a series of effects in the pre-read target variation.

The pre-target variation illustrated in FIG. 22 is the same as the pre-target variation described above based on FIG. 8, and in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in the pre-target variation illustrated in FIG. 8, the series of effects illustrated in FIG. 22 may be performed based on advance judgment information related to the right to determine the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target variation. In addition, the pre-read target variation illustrated in FIG. 23 is the same as the pre-read target variation described above based on FIG. 8, and in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in the pre-read target variation illustrated in FIG. 8, the series of effects illustrated in FIG. 23 may be performed based on the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the pre-read target variation. In the following explanation, the effects after the SPSP reach in the pre-read target variation (the effects from FIG. 23 (J) onwards) will be referred to as "following effects," and the effects performed before that will be referred to as "advancing effects."

<The flow of the series of effects during target pre-change>
First, as described above with reference to Figure 8 (A), in a state in which the right to determine the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target change is reserved in the normal game state, the display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol as a pre-target change may be started (see Figure 22 (A)). Here, when a game ball enters the first start hole 21 during the display of the first special symbol change in the normal game state and the right to determine the first special symbol related to the pre-read target change is reserved, the main CPU 81 executes a pre-determination process based on the acquired information such as the jackpot random number acquired at the time of the win, and the sub-CPU 91 may set to execute a pre-swing effect in the pre-target change based on the result of this pre-determination process (pre-determination information).

(Pre-swing effect)
In this way, when it is set to execute a pre-swaying effect, the sub-CPU 91 executes a pre-swaying effect that sways the robot gimmick 15 while the first special symbol and the effect symbol are being displayed as pre-target variations (see FIG. 22B for an example of a "first first swinging effect"). This pre-swaying effect alternates between forward and reverse rotation of the robot gimmick swing motor 154 at extremely short time intervals (e.g., 0.1 second intervals), thereby swinging the robot gimmick 15 at ultra-high speeds. The swinging time from the start to the end of the swinging of the robot gimmick 15 in the pre-swaying effect is preset to 1 second (see FIG. 22B). As described above, this robot-type gimmick 15 is modeled after an ally character that may appear during the SPSP reach (second half battle), and by executing such a pre-swinging effect prior to the predicted target change, it is possible to effectively make the player expect that the second half battle will take place during the predicted target change and that an ally character will appear during that second half battle.

This type of pre-swing effect is performed when the result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the target pre-variation is a "miss" and a first special symbol variation pattern that results in a no-reach effect is selected. Therefore, during the target pre-variation, three effect symbols indicating a scatter pattern are pseudo-stopped on the display screen 70, and as a missing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a no-reach miss notification effect is performed in which the three effect symbols indicating the scatter pattern are actually stopped (see Figure 22 (C)).

Although not shown in Figure 22, the pre-swing effect is executed by utilizing a pre-target fluctuation in which the first special symbol fluctuation time is relatively short (for example, a pre-target fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds). For this reason, the pre-swing effect is not executed during the execution of the first button operation prompting effect that prompts the player to operate the first button 35, during the execution of an operation-responsive effect in response to the operation of the first button 35 in response to this first button operation prompting effect, during the execution of the second button operation prompting effect that prompts the player to operate the second button 36, or during the execution of an operation-responsive effect in response to the operation of the second button 36 in response to this second button operation prompting effect.

Up to this point, we have referred to Figure 22 and explained an example in which a pre-swing effect (see Figure 22 (B)) is executed in a pre-target variation, but there are also cases in which a no-reach miss notification effect (see Figure 22 (C)) is executed without a pre-swing effect being executed. The pre-swing effect has the following characteristics. Specifically, when the pre-determination result for the right to determine the first special pattern corresponding to the pre-read target variation indicates a "jackpot," the pre-swing effect is more likely to be executed than when it indicates a "miss." Another characteristic is that the longer the variation time of the first special pattern identified based on the pre-determination result (pre-determination information) for the right to determine the first special pattern corresponding to the pre-read target variation, the more likely the pre-swing effect is to be executed.

In addition, because the pre-swing effect is an effect that does not use the display screen 70, it can be combined with other look-ahead effects. In the pre-target fluctuation, a pre-swing effect (see Figure 22 (B)) may be performed before a weak chance eye effect (see Figure 9 (C)) and a first performance symbol focus effect (see Figure 9 (D)) are performed, or a pre-swing effect (see Figure 22 (B)) may be performed before a strong chance eye effect (see Figure 9 (E)) and a second performance symbol focus effect (see Figure 9 (F)) are performed. It can be said that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when these look-ahead effects are performed in combination than when they are performed alone.

<Flow of a series of effects when predicting target changes>
Next, referring to Figure 23, a series of effects performed during the variable display of the first special symbol and performance symbol related to the pre-reading target variation will be described. Note that here, during the variable display of the first special symbol and performance symbol related to the pre-reading target variation, a series of effects including various swing effects using the robot type gimmick 15 will be described using an example in which the effects progress in the order of pre-reach performance (see Figure 8 (J)), reach establishment performance (see Figure 8 (K)), normal reach (see Figure 8 (L)), SP reach (see Figure 8 (O)), and SPSP reach (see Figure 8 (P)).

In normal game mode, when a predetermined time has elapsed since a losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol at the end of the pre-target variation immediately preceding the pre-read target variation, the main CPU 81 executes a first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-read target variation, and the sub-CPU 91 sets the presentation patterns for the various presentations that will be performed during the display of the first special symbol (and) presentation symbols related to the pre-read target variation based on a variation start command from the main control board 80 that includes the results of this first special symbol determination. In this way, at the start of the pre-read target variation, the main CPU 81 executes a first special symbol determination, and when the sub-CPU 91 sets the presentation patterns for the various presentations performed during the pre-read target variation, the presentation may be performed in the following manner, as illustrated in FIG. 23.

(Incompatible swing effect when fluctuation starts)
That is, when the first special pattern determination corresponding to the pre-read target change is executed, the display of the first special pattern (and effect pattern) related to the pre-read target change begins (see FIG. 23(A)). In this way, when the display of the first special pattern (and effect pattern) related to the pre-read target change begins, a non-operation-responsive swing effect at the start of change (an example of a "second first swing effect", see FIG. 23(B)) may be performed. This non-operation-responsive swing effect at the start of change is a swing effect that swings the robot-type gimmick 15 regardless of the player's operation of the first effect button 35 (or the second effect button 36) at approximately the same time as the display of the first special pattern (and effect pattern) begins, or immediately thereafter. In addition, the non-operation-compatible rocking effect at the start of fluctuation is an effect in which the robot-type gimmick 15 is rocked at high speed by alternately switching between forward and reverse rotation of the robot-type gimmick rocking motor 154 at short time intervals (for example, 0.2 second intervals), and the rocking time from the start to the end of the rocking of the robot-type gimmick 15 in the non-operation-compatible rocking effect at the start of fluctuation is set in advance to 2 seconds (see Figure 23 (B)).

This non-operation-compatible swing effect at the start of fluctuation (see Figure 23 (B)) is an effect that occurs before the reach-established effect in Figure 23 (F), and can therefore be said to be one of the pre-reach effects described above based on Figure 8 (J) etc.

Note that this non-operation-responsive shaking effect at the start of fluctuation (see Figure 23 (B)) is not necessarily executed when the first special pattern (and performance pattern) related to the predicted target fluctuation starts to change; there are cases where the non-operation-responsive shaking effect at the start of fluctuation is executed, and cases where the non-operation-responsive shaking effect at the start of fluctuation is not executed.

Next, after the non-operation-responsive shaking effect at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 23(B)) has been performed, or if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the predicted target fluctuation without the non-operation-responsive shaking effect at the start of fluctuation being performed, a first button operation prompting effect may be performed to prompt the player to operate the first button 35 (see FIG. 23(C)). This first button operation prompting effect is performed in the same way as the first button operation prompting effect described above based on FIG. 11(F), for example, and therefore a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

(Dialogue preview)
Here, if the player operates the first effect button 35 during the valid period for the first effect button operation prompt effect in Fig. 23(C), or if the valid period ends without the player operating the first effect button 35, a line preview is given as an operation-responsive effect (an example of a "first operation-responsive effect": see Fig. 23(D)). The line preview here is as described above based on Fig. 10(F), and is configured as an effect in which an effect image showing a predetermined character uttering a line is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, and audio with the same content as the line is output from the speaker 38.

(Pre-reach operation corresponding to shaking effect)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect (an example of a "second first shaking effect," see FIG. 23(E)) may be performed in conjunction with the above-mentioned line announcement (see FIG. 23(D)). This pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect is similar to the line announcement in that it is an operation-responsive effect executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 in response to the first effect button operation prompt effect of FIG. 23(C). The pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect is an effect in which the robot-type gimmick 15 is swung at a medium speed by alternately switching the forward and reverse rotation of the robot-type gimmick swing motor 154 at medium time intervals (e.g., 0.5 second intervals), and the swing time from the start to the end of the swing of the robot-type gimmick 15 in the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect is preset to 3.5 seconds (see FIG. 23(E)).

This pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect (see Figure 23(E)), like the non-operation-responsive shaking effect at the start of fluctuation (see Figure 23(B)) and the dialogue preview (see Figure 23(D)), is an effect that occurs before the reach establishment effect in Figure 23(F), and therefore can be said to be one of the pre-reach effects described above based on Figure 8(J) etc.

The pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect may be executed in parallel with the line preview, or the line preview may be executed alone without the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect. The former case has a higher chance of winning than the latter. For this reason, the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect can be said to be a chance-boosting effect that increases the chance of winning the line preview.

So far, we have explained that depending on the operation of the first effect button 35 in response to the first effect button operation prompt effect in Figure 23 (C), both the line preview (see Figure 23 (D)) and the pre-reach operation corresponding shaking effect (see Figure 23 (E)) will be executed, or only the line preview will be executed. However, depending on the effect pattern set by the sub-CPU 91, the first effect button operation prompt effect may not be executed. In this case, since no validity period is set for the first effect button operation prompt effect, the line preview and the pre-reach operation corresponding shaking effect will not be executed even if the player operates the first effect button 35.

In this way, once the pre-reach effect is performed and a predetermined time has passed since the start of the predictive target change, the reach completion effect (see Figure 23 (F)) is performed and a normal reach begins (see Figure 23 (G)), after which a predetermined development effect is performed and the SP reach (first half battle) begins. In this way, the flow of the effects progressing in the order of reach completion effect, start of normal reach, and start of SP reach (first half battle) is as described above based on Figures 8 (K), (L), (O), etc.

During an SP Reach (first half battle), a battle presentation is held to show the main character battling an enemy character, but here, the change presentation pattern that develops from the SP Reach (first half battle) to the SPSP Reach (second half battle) is set by the sub-CPU 91 at the start of this change. For this reason, as mentioned above, before and after the start of the SPSP Reach, the outcome of the first half battle during the SP Reach is not decided, and a series of presentations is held to show the SP Reach developing into an SPSP Reach and the second half battle starting anew.

(SP Reach non-operational shaking effect)
In this way, during the SP reach in which the first half battle is conducted, an operation-incompatible shaking effect during the SP reach (an example of a "second first shaking effect", see FIG. 23(I)) may be performed. This operation-incompatible shaking effect during the SP reach is common to the pre-swing shaking effect (see FIG. 22(B)) and the operation-incompatible shaking effect at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 23(B)) in that it is an effect in which the robot-type gimmick 15 is shaken regardless of the player's operation of the first effect button 35 (or the second effect button 36). However, the operation-incompatible shaking effect during the SP reach has a different shaking pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 from the pre-swing shaking effect and the operation-incompatible shaking effect at the start of fluctuation. In other words, the non-operation-compatible shaking effect during SP reach is an effect in which the robot-type gimmick 15 is swung at a slow speed by alternately switching the robot-type gimmick shaking motor 154 between forward and reverse rotation at relatively long time intervals (for example, 0.75 second intervals), and the shaking time from the start to the end of the robot-type gimmick 15's shaking during SP reach is set in advance to 4.5 seconds (see Figure 23 (I)).

Note that this operation-incompatible shaking effect during SP reach is not necessarily executed when SP reach begins; it may occur during SP reach, or it may not occur at all during SP reach. This operation-incompatible shaking effect during SP reach has the characteristic that it is more likely to develop from an SP reach (first half battle) to an SPSP reach (second half battle) when an operation-incompatible shaking effect during SP reach is performed during SP reach than when an operation-incompatible shaking effect during SP reach is not performed during SP reach.

Furthermore, since there is a possibility that an ally character represented by the robot-type gimmick 15 will appear during the SPSP reach (second half of the battle) (i.e., there is a possibility that the ally character appearance display effect shown in Figure 23 (N) described below will be performed), by executing the SP reach operation-incompatible shaking effect that shakes the robot-type gimmick 15 during the SP reach, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the ally character and effectively increase the player's anticipation for the ally character appearing during the SPSP reach (second half of the battle).

As is clear from the explanation so far, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is capable of executing a number of different oscillation effects with different oscillation patterns, such as the non-operational oscillation effect during SP reach (see FIG. 23(I)), the non-operational oscillation effect at the start of the fluctuation (see FIG. 23(B)), and the operation-responsive oscillation effect before the reach (see FIG. 23(E)), in addition to the non-operational oscillation effect during the pre-read target fluctuation, before the SP reach (see FIG. 23(I)). By executing these oscillation effects alone or in combination, the game will progress to the SPSP reach, which has the highest reliability of a jackpot out of the three types of reach fluctuation, and it is possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for the ally character appearance display effect (see FIG. 23(N)) to be performed midway through the SPSP reach.

Comparing the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect (see Figure 22(B)), the operation-incompatible shaking effect at the start of fluctuation (see Figure 23(B)), the operation-compatible shaking effect before reach (see Figure 23(E)), and the operation-incompatible shaking effect during SP reach (see Figure 23(I)), the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect is an effect executed in conjunction with a line preview as an operation-responsive effect, whereas the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect, the operation-incompatible shaking effect at the start of fluctuation, and the operation-incompatible shaking effect during SP reach are effects executed when an operation-responsive effect such as a line preview is not being executed, and are therefore different from the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, four types of rocking patterns are provided for the robot-type gimmick 15 in these rocking effects that can be executed during the advance performance: ultra-high-speed rocking for 1 second (see Figure 22(B)), high-speed rocking for 2 seconds (see Figure 23(B)), medium-speed rocking for 3.5 seconds (see Figure 23(E)), and low-speed rocking for 4.5 seconds (see Figure 23(I)).The rocking effects that can be executed during the advance performance have the feature that the robot-type gimmick 15 rocks in different rocking patterns depending on the execution timing.

Up to this point, we have explained the "preliminary effects" that take place before the SPSP reach is initiated. From here on, we will explain the effects that occur after the SPSP reach is initiated. As described above with reference to Figure 9 and other figures, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment provides two SPSP reach effects: a first effect route and a second effect route, and various effects are available for both effect routes. However, for the sake of convenience, Figure 23 omits the illustration of some of these effects, and instead focuses on effects that are directly or indirectly related to the various swing effects that may be executed before the SPSP reach is initiated.

(SPSP Reach (second half battle) begins)
When the SPSP reach (second half battle) begins (see FIG. 23(J)), a first button operation prompt effect is performed during the battle (see FIG. 23(K)), and if the player operates the first button 35 during the valid period of the first button operation prompt effect, a cut-in occurs (see FIG. 23(L)). These first button operation prompt effect and cut-ins are as described above based on FIGS. 11(F)-(G) and 14(H)-(I), and the cut-in is one of a weak cut-in, a medium cut-in, and a strong cut-in (an example of a "second operation-responsive effect").

Next, as a cut-in occurs and the SPSP reach reaches its final stage, a second button operation prompting effect is displayed to prompt the player to operate the second button 36, as described above with reference to Figures 11 (H) and 15 (A) (see Figure 23 (M)). If the result of the first special symbol determination executed by the main CPU 81 at the start of this pre-read target change is a "miss," a defeat effect is displayed, depicting the main character being defeated by an enemy character, depending on whether the second button 36 is operated during the valid period for the second button operation prompting effect, or whether the valid period for the second button operation prompting effect has ended without the second button 36 being operated (see Figure 23 (S)). This defeat effect is as described above with reference to Figures 9 (I) and 11 (I).

In this way, when a defeat effect is performed as the result effect of a battle effect (second half battle) during an SPSP reach, as described above based on Figure 9 (J) etc., three effect symbols indicating a reach loss are pseudo-stopped just before the end of this predictive target variation, and as the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a loss notification effect is performed in which the three effect symbols indicating the reach loss are actually stopped (see Figure 23 (T)).

(Allied character appearance display)
When the player operates the second effect button 36 during the valid period of the second effect button operation promotion effect in Figure 23 (M), an ally character appearance display effect may be displayed as an operation-responsive effect in response to that operation (see Figure 23 (N)), and by executing both the ally character appearance display effect (see Figure 23 (N)) and the victory effect (see Figure 23 (P)) as operation-responsive effects, an ally character will appear in the middle of the second half of the battle, and an effect pattern will be displayed in which the main character and ally character fight together to defeat the enemy character.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, even if the player operates the second effect button 36 during the valid period of the second effect button operation prompt effect in Figure 23 (M), the ally character appearance display effect may not be performed. In this case, only the victory effect (see Figure 23 (P)) is executed as the operation-responsive effect, and an effect pattern in which the main character alone defeats the enemy character is performed.

(Winning indication shaking effect)
In addition, if the result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of this pre-read target variation is a "jackpot," regardless of whether or not an ally character appearance display effect (see FIG. 23(N)) is performed, a win suggestion swing effect (an example of a "second swing effect," see FIG. 23(O)), a victory effect (see FIG. 23(P)), and a double-digit effect symbol attention effect (see FIG. 23(Q)) are always executed. Of these three effects, the victory effect and the double-digit effect symbol attention effect are as described above based on FIGS. 9(R) and (S), etc. On the other hand, the winning indication swing effect is an effect that definitely suggests that the double-digit pattern attention effect (and winning notification effect) will be executed by swinging the robot-type gimmick 15, and is an effect in which the robot-type gimmick swing motor 154 alternates between forward and reverse rotation at the longest time interval (for example, 1.0 second intervals), causing the robot-type gimmick 15 to swing at an extremely slow speed, and the swing time from the start to the end of the swing of the robot-type gimmick 15 in the winning indication swing effect is preset to 10 seconds (see Figure 23 (O)).

In addition, when an ally character appearance display effect (see Figure 23 (N)) is performed as an operation-responsive effect, a win suggestion shaking effect (see Figure 23 (O)) will begin at almost the same time as the ally character appearance display effect begins, and the win suggestion shaking effect will continue until the double-digit effect pattern attention effect ends.

In this way, when the ally character appearance display effect (see Figure 23 (N)), win suggestion swing effect (see Figure 23 (O)), victory effect (see Figure 23 (P)), and double digit effect pattern attention effect (see Figure 23 (Q)) are performed, the three effect patterns indicating double digits that were enlarged by the double digit effect pattern attention effect return to their normal size and then appear pseudo-stopped, and as the jackpot pattern is displayed as the first special pattern, the three effect patterns indicating double digits will stop as they are (see Figure 23 (R)).

[Features of each swing effect and its related effects executed in normal effect mode (normal gaming state)]
Next, referring to FIG. 24, the characteristics of each swing effect and its associated effects executed in the normal effect mode (normal game state as the game state) will be described. Here, FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the characteristics of each swing effect and its associated effects executed in the normal effect mode. As described above with reference to FIG. 7 and other figures, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the main CPU 81 controls the game in one of the game states: the normal game state, the probability variable game state, and the time-saving game state. In contrast, the sub-CPU 91 controls the effects in the normal effect mode when the game is controlled in the normal game state, controls the effects in the probability variable game state when the game is controlled in the probability variable game state, and controls the effects in the time-saving game state when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state. In this way, by controlling the effects in the effect mode corresponding to each game state, it is possible to perform effects in an effect mode corresponding to the game state. Here, the characteristics of the swing effect and its associated effects executed when the game is controlled in the normal game state and when the effects are controlled in the normal effect mode will be described.

(Pre-swing effect)
The pre-swaying effect is an effect in which, when the right to determine the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target change is reserved, the robot-type gimmick 15 is swayed in a pre-target change (a loss change in which a loss notification effect is executed) that occurs before the pre-read target change based on the pre-determination result (pre-determination information) related to this right, as exemplified in Figure 24. As described above based on Figure 22 (B), this pre-swaying effect is an effect in which the robot-type gimmick 15 is swayed at ultra-high speed for one second, and the jackpot reliability is set to approximately 28% (see Figure 24).

As such, because the jackpot reliability of the pre-sway effect is set at a relatively high value of approximately 28%, it can be said that if the pre-sway effect is executed before the start of the pre-read target change, the win suggestion swing effect and the like are more likely to be executed during the pre-read target change than if the pre-sway effect is not executed (see Figure 24). Note that the win suggestion swing effect and the like here are specifically effects that are only executed before the win notification effect (see Figure 23 (R)) of the ally character appearance display effect (see Figure 23 (N)), win suggestion swing effect (see Figure 23 (O)), victory effect (see Figure 23 (P)), and double-digit effect pattern attention effect (see Figure 23 (Q)) described above based on Figure 23.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if a pre-determination process related to the right to determine the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target variation results in a pre-determination result indicating that a first special symbol variation pattern that will result in the execution of an SPSP reach (which may involve the above-mentioned winning suggestion swing effect, etc.) will be selected, the pre-determination result will be a higher probability of the pre-determination swing effect being executed than if a pre-determination result indicates that a first special symbol variation pattern that will not result in the execution of an SPSP reach will be selected. For this reason, as described above, when a pre-determination swing effect is executed, winning suggestion swing effect, etc. are more likely to be executed than when a pre-determination swing effect is not executed, making it possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for the execution of a winning suggestion swing effect, etc.

Furthermore, as described above with reference to FIG. 6(B) and other figures, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment provides two types of jackpots related to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state: a "3R Probable Variable A" in which the jackpot symbol X1 is displayed as a stopped jackpot, and a "3R Normal" in which the jackpot symbol X2 is displayed as a stopped jackpot. When advance determination information indicating that the jackpot symbol X1 will be displayed as advance determination information related to the right to determine the first special symbol corresponding to the pre-read target variation is obtained, the advance oscillation effect is executed with a higher probability than when advance determination information indicating that the jackpot symbol X2 will be displayed as a stopped jackpot (see FIG. 24). Therefore, when the advance oscillation effect is executed, the game is more easily controlled in the probability variable game state after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the pre-read target variation than when the advance oscillation effect is not executed, making it possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for the probability variable jackpot.

(Swing effect not compatible with operation when fluctuation starts)
The non-operation-compatible swing effect at the start of fluctuation is an effect in which the robot-type gimmick 15 is swung at the start of the pre-read target fluctuation, as exemplified in Fig. 24. Also, as described above based on Fig. 23(B), the non-operation-compatible swing effect at the start of fluctuation is an effect in which the robot-type gimmick 15 is swung at high speed for 2 seconds, and the probability of winning is set to about 31% (see Fig. 24).

In this way, the jackpot reliability of the non-operation-responsive shaking effect at the start of fluctuation is set to approximately 31%, a value slightly higher than that of the pre-flickering shaking effect. It can be said that if the non-operation-responsive shaking effect at the start of fluctuation is executed at the start of the pre-flickering target fluctuation, the win suggestion shaking effect is more likely to be executed during the pre-flickering target fluctuation than if the non-operation-responsive shaking effect at the start of fluctuation is not executed (see Figure 24).

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if a first special symbol variation pattern that results in the execution of an SPSP reach (which may involve the above-mentioned winning suggestion swing effect, etc.) is selected based on the first special symbol determination made at the start of a predictive target variation, the winning suggestion swing effect will be executed with a higher probability than if a first special symbol variation pattern that does not result in the execution of an SPSP reach is selected. For this reason, as described above, when a winning suggestion swing effect is executed at the start of variation, winning suggestion swing effect, etc. is more likely to be executed than when a winning suggestion swing effect is not executed, making it possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for the execution of winning suggestion swing effect, etc.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the result of the first special pattern determination made at the start of the predictive target variation is "3R Probable Variable A," there is a higher probability that the fluctuation start operation-incompatible swing effect will be executed compared to when it is "3R Normal" (see FIG. 24). Therefore, when the fluctuation start operation-incompatible swing effect is executed, the game is more likely to be controlled in the probability variable game state after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the predictive target variation, compared to when the fluctuation start operation-incompatible swing effect is not executed, making it possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for a probability variable jackpot.

Note that the non-operational shaking effect at the start of fluctuation is relatively easy to distinguish from the pre-swaying effect because the shaking pattern, including the shaking time of the robot-type gimmick 15, is different from the pre-swaying effect.

(Dialogue preview)
The line preview in this embodiment (an example of a "first operation-responsive effect," see FIG. 23(D)) is an operation-responsive effect that is executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period of the first effect button operation prompt effect (see FIG. 23(C)). This line preview is an effect in which an effect image showing a predetermined character speaking a line is displayed on the display screen 70, and has the characteristic that the reliability of a jackpot changes depending on the type of character speaking the line, the content of the line, and the color of the text indicating the line, and the reliability of the jackpot is variable between approximately 6% and approximately 43% (see FIG. 24).

Thus, although there is a wide range in the reliability of the dialogue previews for a jackpot, there are cases where a dialogue preview is executed that has a higher reliability of a jackpot than a pre-swing effect or a swing effect that does not support operation at the start of fluctuation.Like these swing effects, the dialogue preview can be said to be an effect that suggests the possibility of a win suggestion swing effect or the like being executed, and by executing a dialogue preview, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation for the execution of a win suggestion swing effect or the like.

(Pre-reach operation corresponding to shaking effect)
The pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect (see FIG. 23(E)) is an operation-responsive effect that can be executed in parallel with the dialogue announcement in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period of the first effect button operation prompt effect (see FIG. 23(C)) (see FIG. 24). As described above based on FIG. 23(E), this pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect causes the robot-type gimmick 15 to shake at a medium speed for 3.5 seconds, and its jackpot reliability is set to approximately 25% (see FIG. 24).

As illustrated in Figure 24, although the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect has a slightly lower reliability of a jackpot compared to pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effects and shaking effects not responsive to operations at the start of fluctuation, when the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect is executed in conjunction with a dialogue preview, it has the characteristic that a win suggestion shaking effect, etc. is more likely to be executed in the pre-read target fluctuation than when the dialogue preview is executed alone (without the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect being executed) (see Figure 24).

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if a first special symbol variation pattern that results in the execution of an SPSP reach (which may involve the above-mentioned winning suggestion swing effect, etc.) is selected based on the first special symbol determination made at the start of the predictive target variation, the pre-reach operation corresponding swing effect will be executed with a higher probability than if a first special symbol variation pattern that does not result in the SPSP reach is selected. For this reason, as described above, when a pre-reach operation corresponding swing effect is executed, winning suggestion swing effect, etc. is more likely to be executed than when a line preview is executed alone, making it possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for the execution of winning suggestion swing effect, etc.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the result of the first special symbol determination made at the start of the predictive target variation is "3R Probable Variable A," the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect is executed with a higher probability than when it is "3R Normal" (see FIG. 24). Therefore, when the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect is executed, the game is more likely to be controlled in a probable variable game state after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the predictive target variation, compared to when the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect is not executed, making it possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for a probable variable jackpot.

As is clear from the notation in Figure 24, the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect is relatively easy to distinguish from the pre-reach shaking effect and the start-of-fluctuation operation-incompatible shaking effect, which are performed at different execution times, because the shaking pattern, including the shaking time of the robot-type gimmick 15, is different.

As is clear from the explanation so far, the pre-swing effect, the swing effect not responding to operations at the start of fluctuation, and the swing effect responding to operations before a reach are all more likely to be executed when the result of the first special symbol determination executed at the start of the pre-read target fluctuation is "3R Probable Change A" than when it is "3R Normal." By executing at least one of these swing effects, it is possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for the odd symbol reach completion effect being executed as a reach completion effect (see Figure 23 (F)).

(SP Reach non-operational shaking effect)
The non-operation-compatible swing effect during SP reach (see FIG. 23(I)) is an effect in which the robot-type gimmick 15 swings regardless of the player's operation of the first effect button 35 (or the second effect button 36) when the SP reach (first half battle) is being performed. As described above based on FIG. 23(I), this non-operation-compatible swing effect during SP reach is an effect in which the robot-type gimmick 15 swings at a low speed for 4.5 seconds, and its jackpot reliability is set to approximately 34%.

The non-operational shaking effect during SP reach is similar to other shaking effects in that it is an effect that shakes the robot-type gimmick 15, but it is a shaking effect that differs from other shaking effects in that it is performed during SP reach (during the first half of the battle). In this way, the non-operational shaking effect during SP reach is performed at a different execution timing from other shaking effects, that is, during SP reach (during the first half of the battle), and therefore, compared to other shaking effects, it can make the player more aware of the ally characters that may appear during the SPSP reach (during the second half of the battle). In this sense, it can be said to be the effect that most effectively suggests that the ally character appearance display effect (see Figure 23 (N)), which is a strong victory effect, may be performed (see Figure 24).

As illustrated in Figure 24, the non-operation-compatible shaking effect during SP reach has a slightly higher reliability of a jackpot compared to the pre-swing shaking effect, the non-operation-compatible shaking effect at the start of fluctuation, and the operation-compatible shaking effect before the reach, and has the characteristic that when the non-operation-compatible shaking effect during SP reach is executed, it is more likely that a win suggestion shaking effect will be executed during the pre-read target fluctuation than when the non-operation-compatible shaking effect during SP reach is not executed.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if a first special symbol variation pattern that results in the execution of an SPSP reach (which may involve the above-mentioned win suggestion swing effect, etc.) is selected based on the first special symbol determination made at the start of the predictive target variation, the SP reach operation-incompatible swing effect will be executed with a higher probability than if a first special symbol variation pattern that does not result in the SPSP reach is selected. For this reason, as described above, when an SP reach operation-incompatible swing effect is executed, it is more likely that the SP reach (first half battle) will progress to the SPSP reach (second half battle) and that a win suggestion swing effect, etc. will be executed than when an SP reach operation-incompatible swing effect is not executed. Therefore, by executing an SP reach operation-incompatible swing effect, it is possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for the progression to the second half battle and the execution of a win suggestion swing effect, etc.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the predictive target variation is "3R Probable Variable A," the SP Reach Operation-Incompatible Shaking Effect will be executed with a higher probability than if it is "3R Normal" (see FIG. 24). Therefore, when the SP Reach Operation-Incompatible Shaking Effect is executed, the game is more likely to be controlled in the Probable Variable game state after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the predictive target variation, compared to when the SP Reach Operation-Incompatible Shaking Effect is not executed. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, during the SP Reach, the left and right symbols are pseudo-stopped as reach symbols. This synergistic effect with the pseudo-stopped display of two 7 symbols (or 3 symbols) as reach symbols and the pseudo-stopped display of two odd-numbered symbols (excluding 3 and 7 symbols) as reach symbols can further effectively enhance the player's anticipation for a probable variable jackpot.

As is clear from the notation in Figure 24, the non-operation-compatible shaking effect during SP reach is a different shaking effect from the pre-swing shaking effect, the non-operation-compatible shaking effect at the start of fluctuation, and the pre-reach operation-compatible shaking effect in that it is executed during SP reach (during the first half of the battle). Furthermore, the shaking pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 in the non-operation-compatible shaking effect during SP reach is also different from these shaking effects, so it is relatively easy to distinguish it from these shaking effects.

Now, to explain the winning notification effects of this embodiment, the winning notification effects of this embodiment can be broadly categorized into first effect pattern display effects that display multiple first effect patterns (for example, three effect patterns representing even numbers) to notify that a jackpot game will be played, and second effect pattern display effects that display multiple second effect patterns (for example, three effect patterns representing odd numbers) to notify that a jackpot game will be played.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the likelihood of a first shaking effect (pre-swing effect, operation-incompatible shaking effect at the start of fluctuation, operation-compatible shaking effect before a reach, operation-incompatible shaking effect during an SP reach) being executed prior to a second effect symbol display effect is higher than the likelihood of a first shaking effect (pre-swing effect, operation-incompatible shaking effect at the start of fluctuation, operation-compatible shaking effect before a reach, operation-incompatible shaking effect during an SP reach) being executed prior to a first effect symbol display effect. Therefore, by executing at least one of the pre-swing effect, operation-incompatible shaking effect at the start of fluctuation, operation-compatible shaking effect before a reach, and operation-incompatible shaking effect during an SP reach as the first shaking effect, it is possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for the execution of the second effect symbol display effect rather than the first effect symbol display effect.

(Strong cut-in)
As for the strong cut-in (an example of a "second operation-responsive effect"), it is as described above based on Figure 11 (G) etc., but the strong cut-in is one of the cut-ins (see Figure 23 (L)) as an operation-responsive effect that is executed in response to operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the first effect button operation promotion effect (see Figure 23 (K)), and its probability of winning is higher than that of a weak cut-in or a medium cut-in, and in this embodiment it is set to approximately 57% (see Figure 24).

As such, the strong cut-in has an extremely high jackpot reliability of approximately 57%, so when a strong cut-in is executed, it is clear that there is a higher probability that a win suggestion shaking effect will be executed than when the other effects listed in Figure 24 (excluding the win suggestion shaking effect) are executed.

The strong cut-in is similar to the dialogue preview described above in that it is an operation-responsive effect that is executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35. However, as is clear from the notation in Figure 24, no matter what type of effect the dialogue preview is executed in, the strong cut-in has a higher reliability of a jackpot than the dialogue preview, and it can be said that when a strong cut-in is executed, a win suggestion swing effect and the like are more likely to be executed than when a dialogue preview is executed.

(Winning indication shaking effect)
The winning suggestion swing effect (see FIG. 23(O)) is an effect in which the robot-type gimmick 15 swings in response to the operation of the second effect button 36 during the valid period of the second effect button operation prompt effect (see FIG. 23(M)) when an SPSP reach (second half battle) is being performed. As described above based on FIG. 23(O), this winning suggestion swing effect is an effect in which the robot-type gimmick 15 swings at an extremely slow speed for 10 seconds, and when this winning suggestion swing effect is executed, the winning notification effect (see FIG. 23(R)) is always executed afterwards. Therefore, the winning suggestion swing effect can be said to be a strong jackpot effect in which a jackpot is highly likely when it occurs (see FIG. 24).

The win indication swing effect is an effect that indicates in advance that a win notification effect will be executed, and is executed during a jackpot variation, which is a pattern variation that results in a win notification effect (see Figure 23 (R)), but is not executed during a loss variation, which is a pattern variation that results in a loss notification effect (see Figure 23 (T)).

In this embodiment of the gaming machine 1, nine types of double numbers - "111," "222," "333," "444," "555," "666," "777," "888," and "999" - are available as combinations of symbols that are fixedly stopped on the display screen 70 to indicate a jackpot. However, in the win indication oscillation effect, the oscillation pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 is fixed regardless of the type of symbol that is fixedly stopped (finally stopped) on the display screen 70 by the win indication effect, and regardless of which of the three double numbers indicating the double number is fixedly stopped, the robot-type gimmick 15 will oscillate at an extremely slow speed for 10 seconds.

The winning notification effects of this embodiment can be broadly categorized into first effect pattern display effects that display multiple first effect symbols (for example, three effect symbols representing even numbers) to notify that a jackpot game will be played, and second effect pattern display effects that display multiple second effect symbols (for example, three effect symbols representing odd numbers) to notify that a jackpot game will be played.The winning indication shaking effect of this embodiment can be said to be a winning indication shaking effect when the above-mentioned first effect pattern display effect is played, and a winning indication shaking effect when the above-mentioned second effect pattern display effect is played, in which the robot-type gimmick 15 shakes in a shaking pattern that is common to both.

As is clear from the explanation so far, the execution timing and the swing patterns of the robot-type gimmick 15 for the pre-swing shaking effect, the operation-incompatible swing effect at the start of fluctuation, the operation-compatible swing effect before a reach, the operation-incompatible swing effect during an SP reach, and the win suggestion swing effect are all different, and in terms of the swing time of the robot-type gimmick 15, the win suggestion swing effect has the longest.

As is clear from the explanation so far based on Figures 22 to 24, during the advance performance, which is the performance until the SPSP reach (see Figure 23 (J)) is started in the predictive target change, at least one of the following shaking performances can be executed as shaking performances to shake the robot-type gimmick 15: advance shaking performance (see Figure 22 (B)), shaking performance not compatible with operation at the start of change (see Figure 23 (B)), shaking performance compatible with operation before the reach (see Figure 23 (E)), and shaking performance not compatible with operation during the SP reach (see Figure 23 (I)).

These shaking effects that can be executed during the advance performance are effects that make the player expect that they will develop into an SPSP reach in which the second half of the battle will take place, and that an ally character appearance display effect (see Figure 23 (N)) or a win suggestion shaking effect (see Figure 23 (O)) will be executed during the second half of the battle. Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which these shaking effects that can be executed during the advance performance are not executed during the subsequent performance, which is the performance that occurs after the SPSP reach (see Figure 23 (J)) has started in the predictive target change.

In addition, during the subsequent performance, it is possible to execute a win suggestion shaking effect (see Figure 23 (O)), which has a different shaking pattern for the robot-type gimmick 15 from the shaking effects described above. However, if a configuration is adopted in which a win suggestion shaking effect is executed during a preceding performance, for example by executing the win suggestion shaking effect (see Figure 23 (O)) before the pre-reach operation corresponding shaking effect (see Figure 23 (E)), then even if the pre-reach operation corresponding shaking effect is executed, the player will not be able to expect that the win suggestion shaking effect will be executed later, and as a result, there is a concern that the interest of the pre-reach operation corresponding shaking effect will be significantly reduced.

For this reason, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the winning indication shaking effect (see Figure 23 (O)) can be executed during the following performance, but the winning indication shaking effect is not executed during the preceding performance.

Note that the execution timing of each of the shaking effects exemplified in Figures 23 and 24 is not necessarily limited to the execution timing exemplified in this embodiment. For example, it is possible to employ a configuration in which a shaking effect that does not support operation at the start of fluctuation (see Figure 23 (B)) is executed during a subsequent effect with an extremely low execution probability, or a configuration in which a winning indication shaking effect (see Figure 23 (O)) is executed during a preceding effect with an extremely low execution probability.

However, since adopting such a configuration may raise the above concerns, it is preferable to change the configuration within the scope of a configuration in which other shaking effects (swing effects other than the win suggestion shaking effect) are more likely to be executed than the win suggestion shaking effect during the advance performance, and the win suggestion shaking effect is more likely to be executed than other shaking effects (swing effects other than the win suggestion shaking effect) during the follow-up performance.

[Regarding the execution rate of pre-sway effects]
Next, with reference to Figure 25, the execution rate of the pre-swaying effect that can be executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. Here, Figure 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pre-swaying effect. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to execute the pre-swaying effect described above based on Figure 22 (B) etc. when the effect is controlled by the sub-CPU 91 in the normal effect mode (i.e., when the game is controlled by the main CPU 81 in the normal game state). And, the sub-CPU 91 can execute the pre-swaying effect in the same manner as described above based on Figure 22 (B) etc. when controlling the effect in the probability variable effect mode (i.e., when the game is controlled by the main CPU 81 in the normal game state).

Here, with reference to Figure 25, we will explain the execution rate of the pre-swaying effect in the normal game state (normal presentation mode) and the execution rate of the pre-swaying effect in the special game state (special game mode). First, we will explain the processing executed by the main CPU 81 and sub-CPU 91 when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved and the pre-swaying effect is executed based on the pre-determination information related to that right.

<Preliminary determination process based on first acquired information and preliminary rocking performance execution control>
When a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21 while the first special symbol is being displayed in a normal gaming state (normal presentation mode) (or while the second special symbol is being displayed in a high probability gaming state (high probability presentation mode)), the main CPU 81 acquires first acquired information such as a jackpot random number in response to the winning, and then stores the acquired first acquired information in one of the reserved memory areas 831 to 834 shown in FIG. 26(A) described below as information indicating that the right to determine the first special symbol related to the pre-read target variation is reserved. At that time, the main CPU 81 executes a pre-determination process based on the first acquired information before storing it in one of the reserved memory areas 831 to 834, and transmits a reserve command including pre-determination information indicating the result of the pre-determination process to the sub-control board 90 as information indicating that the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved.

In response to this, if the hold command received from the main control board 80 includes the above-mentioned pre-determination information, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute a pre-sway effect based on that pre-determination information. If it decides to execute a pre-sway effect, it sends a hold icon display command to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 to instruct the execution of that pre-sway effect.

<Preliminary determination process based on second acquired information and preliminary rocking performance execution control>
Next, the processing executed by the main CPU 81 and the sub-CPU 91 to reserve the right to determine the first special symbol and execute a pre-swing effect based on the pre-determination information related to that right will be described. That is, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 22 during a high probability game state (high probability game mode) (during the display of a second special symbol variation), the main CPU 81 acquires second acquired information, such as a jackpot random number, in response to the winning. The acquired second acquired information is then stored in one of the reserved memory areas 835-838 shown in FIG. 26A (described later) as information indicating that the right to determine the second special symbol related to the pre-read target variation is reserved. At that time, the main CPU 81 executes a pre-determination process based on the second acquired information before storing it in one of the reserved memory areas 835-838, and transmits a reserve command including pre-determination information indicating the result of the pre-determination process to the sub-control board 90 as information indicating that the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved.

In response to this, if the hold command received from the main control board 80 includes the above-mentioned pre-determination information, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute a pre-sway effect based on that pre-determination information. If it decides to execute a pre-sway effect, it sends a hold icon display command to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 to instruct the execution of that pre-sway effect.

<Preliminary shaking effect based on first acquired information>
In relation to the above processing being executed by the main CPU 81 and the sub-CPU 91 to execute the pre-swaying effect based on the above-mentioned first acquired information and the pre-swaying effect based on the above-mentioned second acquired information, Figure 25 illustrates examples of the execution rate of the pre-swaying effect under various conditions.

As illustrated in Figure 25, for example, if a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21 while the first special symbol is being displayed during normal gameplay (normal presentation mode), the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the first acquisition information is acquired, and advance judgment information is obtained indicating that the first special symbol variation pattern that will ultimately result in a variation presentation that notifies the player of a win or loss in a normal reach will be selected at the start of the pre-read target variation, then if the result of the first special symbol judgment specified based on that advance judgment information is a "jackpot," a advance oscillation presentation will be executed with an execution probability of 8/100, and if the result of this first special symbol judgment is a "miss," a advance oscillation presentation will be executed with an execution probability of 3/100.

Also, as illustrated in FIG. 25, for example, if a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21 while the first special symbol is being displayed during normal gameplay (normal presentation mode), the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the first acquisition information is acquired, and advance judgment information is obtained indicating that the first special symbol variation pattern that will ultimately result in a variation presentation to notify the winner or loser with an SPSP reach will be selected at the start of the pre-read target variation, then if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment specified based on that advance judgment information is a "jackpot," the advance oscillation presentation will be executed with an execution rate of 38/100, and if the judgment result of this first special symbol judgment is a "miss," the advance oscillation presentation will be executed with an execution rate of 13/100.

On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 25, for example, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable probability game state (variable probability presentation mode), the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, and the first acquisition information is acquired, if the result of the first special symbol determination identified from the pre-determination information obtained by the pre-determination process based on this first acquisition information is a "jackpot," then the pre-swaying presentation is executed with an execution rate of 1/100, and if the result of this first special symbol determination is a "miss," then the pre-swaying presentation is not executed (execution rate: 0/100).

As is clear from the explanation so far, even when the pre-swaying effect is executed in the same way based on the results of the pre-determination process related to the reserved right to determine the first special pattern, the execution rate of the pre-swaying effect differs between the normal game state (normal presentation mode) and the high probability game state (high probability game mode). In this embodiment, it can be said that the pre-swaying effect is more likely to be executed in response to the reservation of the right to determine the first special pattern in the normal game state (normal presentation mode) than in the high probability game state (high probability game mode).

<Preliminary shaking effect based on second acquired information>
Next, the pre-swaying effect based on the second acquisition information will be explained. As illustrated in Fig. 25, for example, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 22 during the variable display of the second special symbol in the probability variable game state (probability variable effect mode), the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved, and the second acquisition information is acquired, and when the pre-determination information is obtained indicating that the variable pattern of the second special symbol, which will ultimately be used to perform the variable effect of notifying the winning or losing of the SP reach, is selected at the start of the pre-reading target variable, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination specified based on the pre-determination information is "jackpot", the pre-swaying effect is executed at an execution rate of 10/100, and if the determination result of this second special symbol determination is "miss", the pre-swaying effect is executed at an execution rate of 4/100.

Also, as illustrated in FIG. 25, for example, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 22 while the second special symbol is being displayed during a probability variation game state (probability variation presentation mode), the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved, and second acquisition information is acquired, and advance judgment information is obtained indicating that the second special symbol variation pattern that will ultimately result in a variation presentation announcing a win or loss with an SPSP reach will be selected at the start of the pre-read target variation, if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment specified based on that advance judgment information is a "jackpot," then the advance oscillation presentation will be executed with an execution rate of 33/100, and if the judgment result of this second special symbol judgment is a "miss," then the advance oscillation presentation will be executed with an execution rate of 11/100.

Up to this point, we have explained, with reference to Figure 25, the execution rate of the pre-swaying effect executed in the normal gaming state (normal presentation mode) and the execution rate of the pre-swaying effect executed in the high probability gaming state (high probability presentation mode). From this, it can be said that regardless of whether the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved or the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved, the first execution probability of the pre-swaying effect being executed in the normal gaming state (normal presentation mode) and the second execution probability of the pre-swaying effect being executed in the high probability gaming state (high probability presentation mode) are different, and the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the first execution probability is higher than the second execution probability.

In addition, even if the right to determine the first special symbol is similarly reserved, the rate at which the pre-swing effect is executed based on the pre-determination information related to that right will differ depending on the game state (presentation mode) at the time of reservation.

Note that, while we have used the pre-sway effect as an example to explain the execution rate of the pre-sway effect executed in the normal game state (normal effect mode) and the execution rate of the pre-sway effect executed in the special game state (special game mode), other swing effects (for example, win suggestion swing effects) may be executed in both the normal game state (normal effect mode) and the special game state (special game mode) with similar execution rate trends.

Furthermore, the probability variable game state is a right-side advantageous state in which it is easier to hit a jackpot by shooting the game ball into the right game area 3R than by shooting it into the left game area 3L. As illustrated in Figures 6(B) and (C), all jackpots related to the second special symbol determination are probability variable jackpots, while half of the jackpots related to the first special symbol determination are regular jackpots. Therefore, in the probability variable game state (probability variable effect mode), if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 and the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, executing a pre-swing effect in response to this is likely to cause discomfort to the player, and is therefore undesirable.

In the example shown in FIG. 25, if a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21 during a probability variable game state (probability variable presentation mode) and the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the pre-swaying presentation is executed at an execution rate of 1/100 only if the result of the first special symbol determination specified by the pre-determination information is a "jackpot," but this execution rate may also be set to zero. In other words, if the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 21 during a probability variable game state (probability variable presentation mode), the pre-swaying presentation based on the pre-determination information related to this reservation may not be executed at all.

As such, when gameplay is controlled in a guaranteed variable game state (the same applies to a time-limited game state), it is undesirable to execute a pre-reading effect such as a pre-swing effect based on pre-determination information related to the reserved right to determine the first special symbol. Therefore, it is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which, when in a high base state (in this embodiment, the guaranteed variable game state and the time-limited game state), the pre-determination process related to the reserved right to determine the first special symbol is not executed. Therefore, in Figure 28, which will be described later, it will be explained that, when in a high base state (when step S218 returns "YES"), the pre-determination process in step S219 related to the reserved right to determine the first special symbol is not executed.

The following explains the RAM configuration of each control board and the processing performed by each control board to achieve the game control and presentation control described above with reference to Figures 1 through 25.

[Configuration example of main RAM 83]
26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the memory areas of the main RAM 83 and the information stored in each memory area. As illustrated in FIG. 26(A), the main RAM 83 is provided with a determination memory area 830, a special symbol 1/first reserve memory area 831, a special symbol 1/second reserve memory area 832, a special symbol 1/third reserve memory area 833, and a special symbol 1/fourth reserve memory area 834 as memory areas for storing acquired information, etc., acquired when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21. In addition, the main RAM 83 is provided with the determination memory area 830, a special symbol 2/first reserve memory area 835, a special symbol 2/second reserve memory area 836, a special symbol 2/third reserve memory area 837, and a special symbol 2/fourth reserve memory area 838 as memory areas for storing acquired information, etc., acquired when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 22.

The determination memory area 830 is a memory area that stores various information used in the special pattern determination when the special pattern determination is actually performed. Special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 through Special symbol 1/fourth reserved memory area 834 are memory areas that store various information related to the first special pattern determination, and Special symbol 2/first reserved memory area 835 through Special symbol 2/fourth reserved memory area 838 are memory areas that store various information related to the second special pattern determination. Furthermore, if both the first and second special pattern determinations are reserved, the second special pattern determination is consumed with priority over the first special pattern determination. Therefore, when a reserved special pattern determination is performed, the various information stored in Special symbol 2/first reserved memory area 835 is shifted into the determination memory area 830 if the second special pattern determination is reserved, and the various information stored in Special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 is shifted into the determination memory area 830 if only the first special pattern determination is reserved.

As illustrated in Figure 26 (B), reserved memory areas 831-838 are areas for storing information for reserving the right to determine a special symbol, and each area includes an area for storing a jackpot random number obtained by the main CPU 81, an area for storing a symbol random number, an area for storing a reach random number, an area for storing a variable pattern random number, and an area for storing pre-determination information, which is information indicating the pre-determination result.

Here, the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number are as described above. The pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination process (see Figure 29) described below based on the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number. Specifically, the pre-determination information includes winning start gate information, information indicating whether the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, information indicating the type of jackpot if a jackpot is found, information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol, and information indicating the gaming status of the gaming machine 1. Here, the winning start gate information is information indicating whether the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number stored in the same reserved memory area were acquired as a result of the gaming ball entering the first start gate 21 or as a result of the gaming ball entering the second start gate 22. The pre-determination information, including this information, is stored in the same reserved memory area as the jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number used in the pre-determination process.

In the gaming machine 1, each time a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21, the five pieces of information described based on FIG. 26(B) are stored in one of the special chart 1/first holding memory area 831 to the special chart 1/fourth holding memory area 834, starting from the special chart 1/first holding memory area 831. Furthermore, each time a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 22, the above five pieces of information are stored in one of the special chart 2/first holding memory area 835 to the special chart 2/fourth holding memory area 838, starting from the special chart 2/first holding memory area 835.

For example, if a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21 when information is stored in the determination memory area 830 and no information is stored in any of the special symbol 1/first holding memory area 831 to the special symbol 1/fourth holding memory area 834, five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination newly acquired in response to that winning will be stored in the special symbol 1/first holding memory area 831. Also, for example, if a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21 when five pieces of information are stored in each of the determination memory area 830, the special symbol 1/first holding memory area 831, and the special symbol 1/second holding memory area 832, five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination newly acquired in response to that winning will be stored in the special symbol 1/third holding memory area 833.

Furthermore, when the information stored in the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 is shifted to the judgment memory area 830 during the execution of the first special symbol judgment, the information stored in the reserved memory areas related to the first special symbol judgment from the special symbol 1/second reserved memory area 832 onwards is shifted to the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831. For example, when information is stored in each of the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 to the special symbol 1/third reserved memory area 833 and the information stored in the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 is shifted to the judgment memory area 830, the information stored in the special symbol 1/second reserved memory area 832 is shifted to the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831, and the information stored in the special symbol 1/third reserved memory area 833 is shifted to the special symbol 1/second reserved memory area 832.

This type of information shifting process is also performed in the special symbol 2/first reserved memory area 835 to the special symbol 2/fourth reserved memory area 838, where information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. Note that in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are reserved, i.e., when information is stored in both the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 and the special symbol 2/first reserved memory area 835, the shifting process for the special symbol 2/first reserved memory area 835 to the special symbol 2/fourth reserved memory area 838 is performed first, before the shifting process for the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 to the special symbol 1/fourth reserved memory area 834.

However, even if a game ball enters the first start port 21 or the second start port 22 during the variable display of a special symbol or during a jackpot game and various random numbers are obtained, it is not possible to immediately perform a special symbol determination or display the variable special symbol. For this reason, when various random numbers are obtained under such circumstances, the main CPU 81 stores the various obtained random numbers, etc. in one of the reserved memory areas 831-838 as information reserving the right to determine the special symbol, as described above. On the other hand, when a variable special symbol is not being displayed, a special symbol determination is not being reserved, and the game is not currently in a jackpot game, the main CPU 81 directly stores the various random numbers, etc. obtained in response to the ball entering the start port in the determination memory area 830.

[Interrupt processing by the main control board 80]
Next, the interrupt processing executed by the main control board 80 will be described with reference to Figure 27. Here, Figure 27 is a flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing executed by the main control board 80. During normal operation, except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or off, the main control board 80 repeatedly executes the series of processes illustrated in Figure 27 at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Note that the processing of the main control board 80, which will be described based on the flowcharts from Figure 27 onwards, is performed in accordance with commands issued by the main CPU 81 based on a program stored in the main ROM 82.

First, the main CPU 81 executes a random number update process to update the various random numbers, including the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, variable pattern random number, and normal symbol random number (step S1). The jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, variable pattern random number, and normal symbol random number are incremented by "1" each time step S1 is executed. Note that a loop counter is used as the counter for executing step S1, and after each random number reaches a preset maximum value, it is reset to "0" and updated.

Following the processing of step S1, the main CPU 81 executes a sensor detection process (step S2), which includes a process of acquiring various random numbers in response to the input of detection signals from the first start opening sensor 211, the second start opening sensor 221, and the gate sensor 251. This sensor detection process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 28.

Following the processing of step S2, the main CPU 81 executes special pattern determination, causes the first special pattern display device 41 or the second special pattern display device 42 to variably display the special pattern, and then executes special pattern processing (step S3), which includes processing for statically displaying the special pattern indicating the result of the special pattern determination. This special pattern processing will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 30.

Following the processing of step S3, the main CPU 81 executes normal pattern determination, executes normal pattern processing including processing to cause the normal pattern display 43 to variably display the normal pattern, and then statically display the normal pattern indicating the result of the normal pattern determination (step S4).

Following the processing of step S4, if the main CPU 81 determines, as a result of the normal pattern determination, that the second start port 22 should be opened, it executes a second start port opening/closing control process to control the second start port solenoid 222, which operates the opening/closing member 23, to open and close the second start port 22 (step S5).

Following the processing of step S5, if the main CPU 81 determines that a "jackpot" has occurred in the jackpot determination processing executed in the special symbol processing of step S3, it executes a large prize opening opening open/close control processing that controls the first large prize opening solenoid 262 (or the second large prize opening solenoid 282) to open or close the first large prize opening 26 (or the second large prize opening 28) (step S6). This large prize opening open/close control processing will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 34 to 36.

Following the processing of step S6, the main CPU 81 executes prize ball processing to control the payout of prize balls in response to winning game balls (step S7).

Following the processing of step S7, the main CPU 81 executes a transmission process to transmit to the sub-control board 90 the various commands and information necessary to determine the performance content that were set (stored) in the main RAM 83 in the processing steps prior to step S7 (step S8).

[Sensor detection process by main control board 80]
28 is a detailed flowchart of the sensor detection process in step S2 of FIG. 27. As illustrated in FIG. 28, following the random number update process of step S1, the main CPU 81 determines whether the gate sensor 251 has detected the passage of a gaming ball through the gate 25 based on whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate sensor 251 (step S201). Here, if it is determined that the gate sensor 251 has detected the passage of a gaming ball through the gate 25 (step S201: YES), it determines whether or not the reserved number F of normal symbol determinations stored in the main RAM 83 is less than a preset maximum reserved number Fmax of normal symbol determinations ("4" in this embodiment) (step S202).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the reserved number F is less than "4" (step S202: YES), it updates the reserved number F by adding "1" (step S203), and obtains the value of the normal pattern random number, which is updated each time the random number update process of step S1 is performed, at the time when the passage of the gaming ball through gate 25 is detected, and stores this value in a specified area of the main RAM 83 (step S204).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S204, determines that the gate sensor 251 has not detected the passage of a gaming ball through the gate 25 (step S201: NO), or determines that the number of reserved balls F is not less than "4" (step S202: NO), it determines whether the second starting hole sensor 221 has detected the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 22 based on whether a detection signal has been input from the second starting hole sensor 221 (step S206). Here, if it determines that the second starting hole sensor 221 has detected the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 22 (step S206: YES), it determines whether the number of reserved balls T2 for the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is less than the preset maximum number of reserved balls T2max for the second special symbol determination ("4" in this embodiment) (step S207).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the reserved number T2 is less than "4" (step S207: YES), it updates the reserved number T2 by adding "1" (step S208), and obtains the values of the timing at which the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 22 was detected for the jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variable pattern random number, which are updated each time the random number update process of step S1 is performed (step S209).

In this way, various random numbers related to the second special symbol determination are obtained in response to the establishment of the acquisition condition that a game ball has entered the second starting hole 22 when the reserved number T2 is less than the maximum reserved number T2max. If various random numbers are obtained in a situation where the second special symbol determination and the variable display of the second special symbol can be performed immediately, these random numbers are stored directly in the determination memory area 830; if various random numbers are obtained in a situation where they cannot be performed immediately, these random numbers are stored in one of the areas: special symbol 2/first reserved memory area 835 to special symbol 2/fourth reserved memory area 838.

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S209, it determines whether the current state is a high base state (step S210). A time-saving game flag is stored in the main RAM 83. This time-saving game flag is set to "OFF" when the operation of the opening/closing member 23 is controlled to create a low base state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the second starting hole 22, and is set to "ON" when the operation of the opening/closing member 23 is controlled to create a high base state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the second starting hole 22. In step S210, the main CPU 81 determines whether the current state is a high base state based on whether the time-saving game flag is set to "ON."

When the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is a high base state (step S210: YES), i.e., when the time-saving game flag is set to "ON," it executes a pre-determination process related to the reservation of the second special symbol determination (step S211). Specifically, prior to the execution of the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) and the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, based on the various random numbers obtained in response to the game ball entering the second starting hole 22, the main CPU 81 executes a pre-determination process to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the various random numbers obtained in the process of step S209, and to pre-determine which variation pattern will be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the second special symbol determination is executed. The pre-determination information resulting from this pre-determination process is stored in the same reserved memory area where the jackpot random numbers, etc. used in the pre-determination process are stored.

Note that if a game ball enters the second starting hole 22 when the game is not in a jackpot game, when the special symbol is not being displayed, and the reserved number T2 for the second special symbol determination is "0," various random numbers obtained in response to the winning are stored directly in the determination memory area 830, and a second special symbol determination based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, the second special symbol determination is not reserved, and therefore the pre-determination process for the second special symbol determination is not performed. This pre-determination process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 29.

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S211 or determines that the high base state is not in effect (step S210: NO), it sets a hold command for the second special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S212). This hold command is a command notifying that the second special symbol determination has been put on hold, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission processing of step S8. Note that if the processing of step S212 is performed without performing the preliminary determination processing of step S211, a hold command that does not include preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, if the processing of step S212 is performed after the preliminary determination processing of step S211, a hold command that includes preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S212, if it determines that the second start hole sensor 221 has not detected the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 22 (step S206: NO), or if it determines that the reserve number T2 for the second special symbol determination is not less than "4" (step S207: NO), it determines whether the first start hole sensor 211 has detected the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 21 based on whether a detection signal has been input from the first start hole sensor 211 (step S214). Here, if it determines that the first start hole sensor 211 has detected the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 21 (step S214: YES), it determines whether the reserve number T1 for the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is less than the preset maximum reserve number T1max for the first special symbol determination ("4" in this embodiment) (step S215).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the reserved number T1 is less than "4" (step S215: YES), it updates the reserved number T1 by adding "1" (step S216), and obtains the values of the timing at which the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 21 was detected for the jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and variable pattern random number, which are updated each time the random number update process of step S1 is performed (step S217).

In this way, various random numbers related to the first special symbol determination are obtained in response to the establishment of the acquisition condition that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 21 when the reserved number T1 is less than the maximum reserved number T1max. If various random numbers are obtained in a situation where the first special symbol determination and the first special symbol variable display can be performed immediately, these random numbers are stored directly in the determination memory area 830; if various random numbers are obtained in a situation where they cannot be performed immediately, these random numbers are stored in one of the areas Special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 to Special symbol 1/fourth reserved memory area 834.

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S217, it determines whether the current state is a high base state (step S218), similar to the processing of step S210. If it determines that the current state is not a high base state (step S218: NO), i.e., if the time-saving game flag is set to "OFF," it executes a pre-determination process related to the reservation of the first special symbol determination (step S219). Specifically, prior to the execution of the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) and the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, based on the various random numbers acquired in response to the game ball entering the first starting hole 21, the main CPU 81 executes a pre-determination process to determine whether a jackpot will occur based on the various random numbers acquired in the processing of step S217, and to pre-determine which variation pattern will be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the first special symbol determination is executed. The pre-determination information resulting from this pre-determination process is stored in the same reserved memory area where the jackpot random numbers, etc. used in the pre-determination process are stored.

Note that if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 when the game is not in a jackpot, when the special symbol is not being displayed, and the reserved number T1 for the first special symbol determination is "0," various random numbers obtained in response to the winning are stored directly in the determination memory area 830, and a first special symbol determination based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, the first special symbol determination is not reserved, and therefore the pre-determination process for the first special symbol determination is not performed. This pre-determination process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 29.

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S219 or determines that a high base state exists (step S218: YES), it sets a hold command for the first special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S220). This hold command is a command notifying that the first special symbol determination has been put on hold, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission processing of step S8. Note that if the processing of step S220 is performed without performing the preliminary determination processing of step S219, a hold command that does not include preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, if the processing of step S220 is performed after the preliminary determination processing of step S219, a hold command that includes preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

[Preliminary Determination Process by Main Control Board 80]
The preliminary determination process executed by the main control board 80 will be described below with reference to Fig. 29. Fig. 29 is a detailed flowchart of the preliminary determination process in steps S211 and S219 in Fig. 28. Note that, here, the preliminary determination process performed when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved will be described as an example, but the same preliminary determination process is also performed when the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved, except that the random numbers and tables used are different.

28 (step S210: YES), or if the main CPU 81 determines that the game is not in a high base state (step S218: NO), it executes a jackpot determination process (step S2191). Specifically, if the game is in a low probability state (which in this embodiment corresponds to the "normal game state" or "time-limited game state"), it reads the low-probability jackpot random number table (see FIG. 6(A)) from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83. On the other hand, if the game is in a high probability state (which in this embodiment corresponds to the "high probability game state"), it reads the high-probability jackpot random number table (see FIG. 6(A)) from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83. Then, based on whether the jackpot random number obtained in the processing of step S209 in FIG. 28 (or the processing of step S217 in FIG. 28) matches any of the winning values stored in the jackpot random number table set in the main RAM 83, it is determined whether a jackpot will be determined at the start of the fluctuation.

Next, based on the determination result of step S2191, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not a jackpot is determined to have occurred at the start of the fluctuation (step S2192). Here, if it determines that a jackpot is determined to have occurred at the start of the fluctuation (step S2192: YES), the main CPU 81 reads out the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2193).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot is not reached at the start of the variation (step S2192: NO), it determines whether or not a reach effect will be performed during the variation (step S2194). Specifically, it determines whether or not a reach effect will be performed during the variation based on whether or not the reach random number obtained together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process of step S2191 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 82.

If the main CPU 81 determines that a reach effect will be performed (step S2194: YES), it reads out a reach miss variation pattern selection table from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2195).

However, if the result of the first special pattern determination is a "miss" and no reach effect is produced during that variation, the variation pattern of the first special pattern is determined based on the number of reserved first special pattern determinations at the start of that variation. The number of reserved first special pattern determinations may differ before and after the reserved first special pattern determinations are consumed. For this reason, the variation pattern of the special pattern obtained before the first special pattern determination is consumed may differ from the variation pattern of the special pattern selected when that first special pattern determination is actually consumed. In other words, for the right of a first special pattern determination for which no reach effect is produced during that variation, it may not be possible to obtain the accurate variation pattern of the first special pattern prior to that first special pattern determination.

For this reason, if the main CPU 81 determines that a reach effect will not be performed (step S2194: NO), the process proceeds to step S212 (or step S220) in FIG. 28 without performing the variable pattern random number determination process of step S2196 (described below) or the process of storing pre-determination information of step S2197. Therefore, if the determination result of the special pattern determination is a "miss" and a no-reach effect will be performed, a hold command that does not include pre-determination information will be set.

However, if a variation pattern that can be selected regardless of the number of reserved symbols at the start of the variation is prepared as a variation pattern for a no-reach miss, it is possible to identify the variation pattern of the special symbol that will be selected at the start of the predicted variation by pre-determining processing. Therefore, for such variation patterns, it is possible to execute the processing of step S2196 (processing to identify the variation pattern that will be selected at the start of the variation) and step S2197, which will be described later.

After setting the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table or the reach miss fluctuation pattern selection table, the main CPU 81 executes a fluctuation pattern random number determination process (step S2196). Specifically, the main CPU 81 determines the special symbol fluctuation pattern to be selected in the special symbol determination performed at the start of the fluctuation based on which random number value specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the main RAM 83 matches the fluctuation pattern random number obtained when the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2191 and the starting gate win.

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S2196, it generates pre-determination information and stores it in the main RAM 83 (step S2197). The area in which this pre-determination information is stored is as described above with reference to Figure 26.

In this way, the main CPU 81 acquires the fluctuation pattern (i.e., fluctuation time) of the first special symbol (or second special symbol) based on acquired information such as a jackpot random number acquired when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21 (or second starting hole 22) before performing the jackpot determination process and fluctuation pattern selection process based on this acquired information.

[Special symbol processing by the main control board 80]
Next, the details of the special symbol processing executed by the main control board 80 will be described with reference to Fig. 30. Here, Fig. 30 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of Fig. 27.

As illustrated in FIG. 30, the main CPU 81 determines whether a jackpot game is in progress based on whether the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S301). This jackpot game flag indicates whether a jackpot game is in progress, and is set to "ON" when a jackpot game begins and is set to "OFF" when the jackpot game ends. If it is determined that a jackpot game is in progress (step S301: YES), processing proceeds to normal symbol processing in step S4.

When the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game is not currently being played (step S301: NO), it determines whether a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302). If it determines that a special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S302: NO), it determines whether the reserved number T2 for the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is "1" or greater (step S303). If it determines that the reserved number T2 is "1" or greater (step S303: YES), it updates the reserved number T2 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" from it (step S304).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the reserved number T2 is not "1" or greater (step S303: NO), it determines whether the reserved number T1 for the first special pattern determination stored in the main RAM 83 is "1" or greater (step S305). Here, if it determines that the reserved number T1 is "1" or greater (step S305: YES), it updates the reserved number T1 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" from it (step S306).

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S304 or the processing of step S306, it executes a shift process on the reserved memory area of the main RAM 83 (step S307). Specifically, when executing the processing of step S307 following the processing of step S304, it executes a shift process to shift the information stored in the special drawing 2/first reserved memory area 835 to the judgment memory area 830. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved memory areas from the special drawing 2/second reserved memory area 836 onwards, it also executes a shift process to shift this information to the special drawing 2/first reserved memory area 835. On the other hand, when executing a shift process following the processing of step S306, it executes a shift process to shift the information stored in the special drawing 1/first reserved memory area 831 to the judgment memory area 830. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved memory areas from the special drawing 1/second reserved memory area 832 onwards, it also executes a shift process to shift this information to the special drawing 1/first reserved memory area 831.

The main CPU 81 stores the information necessary for the second special pattern determination (or first special pattern determination), such as the jackpot random number and the pattern random number, in the determination memory area 830 through the shift process of step S307, and then executes the jackpot determination process of step S308 and the variation pattern selection process of step S309 based on this information.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first start hole 21 (or second start hole 22) when the jackpot game is not in progress, when the special symbol variable display is not in progress, and when the reserved number T1 for the first special symbol determination and the reserved number T2 for the second special symbol determination are both "0", information such as the jackpot random number and symbol random number obtained in response to the winning is stored directly in the determination memory area 830. In such a case, the jackpot determination process and variable pattern selection process are executed without executing the shift process of step S307.

The main CPU 81 executes a jackpot determination process based on the random number stored in the determination memory area 830 (step S308). By executing this jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has occurred, and if a jackpot has been determined, the type of jackpot (jackpot symbol) is determined. Special symbol setting information indicating the results of these processes is then set in the main RAM 83. This jackpot determination process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 31.

Following the jackpot determination process in step S308, the main CPU 81 executes a variation pattern selection process to select a variation pattern for the special symbol (step S309). This variation pattern selection process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 32.

Following the processing of step S309, the main CPU 81 sets in the main RAM 83 a fluctuation start command including the special symbol setting information set in the processing of step S308, information indicating whether this special symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination, setting information for the fluctuation pattern selected in the processing of step S309, information regarding the gaming status of the gaming machine 1, etc. (step S310). This fluctuation start command is a command that instructs the start of a presentation accompanying the display of a fluctuating special symbol, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission processing of step S8. This initiates a fluctuation presentation including the display of a fluctuating presentation pattern on the display screen 70.

Following the processing of step S310, the main CPU 81 begins displaying the variation of the special symbols based on the setting information for the variation pattern included in the variation start command set in the processing of step S310 (step S311). At that time, if the processing of steps S308 to S310 is performed with information related to the first special symbol determination stored in the determination memory area 830, the display of the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 begins. On the other hand, if the processing of steps S308 to S310 is performed with information related to the second special symbol determination stored in the determination memory area 830, the display of the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 42 begins.

Next, the main CPU 81 begins measuring the elapsed time since the variable display of the special symbol began in step S311 (step S312). When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S312, or when it determines that the variable display of the special symbol is in progress (step S302: YES), it determines whether the elapsed time measured in the processing of step S312 has reached the variable time of the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection processing of step S309 (step S313). Here, if it is determined that the elapsed time has not reached the variable time (step S313: NO), processing proceeds to the normal symbol processing of step S4.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the elapsed time has reached the fluctuation time (step S313: YES), it sets a fluctuation end command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the fluctuating display of the special symbol will end (step S314). This fluctuation end command is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, processing such as stopping the display of the effect symbol that was fluctuating on the display screen 70 in a manner that indicates the result of the special symbol determination is performed.

Following the processing of step S314, the main CPU 81 ends the variable display of the special symbol that began in the processing of step S311 (step S315). Specifically, the special symbol (jackpot symbol or losing symbol) set in the processing of step S308 is displayed as a static display on the special symbol display device that has been displaying the variable special symbol. Note that this static display of the special symbol continues until at least a predetermined symbol determination time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed.

In this way, the main CPU 81 causes the first special pattern display device 41 or the second special pattern display device 42 to variably display the special pattern, and then causes the first special pattern display device 41 or the second special pattern display device 42 to stop and display the special pattern (jackpot pattern or losing pattern) indicating the result of the jackpot determination process.

Following the processing of step S315, the main CPU 81 resets the elapsed time that began to be measured in the processing of step S312 (step S316), and executes processing when the special symbol stops, including processing to start a jackpot game if a jackpot has been reached (step S317). This processing when the special symbol stops will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 33.

[Jackpot Determination Processing by the Main Control Board 80]
FIG. 31 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 30 . The main CPU 81 first performs a jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number stored in the determination memory area 830 (step S3081). Specifically, the main CPU 81 determines whether a jackpot has occurred based on whether the jackpot random number stored in the determination memory area 830 matches a preset winning value (see FIG. 6A ). The winning value here is the winning value for a jackpot specified in the high-probability jackpot random number table or the low-probability jackpot random number table. When a jackpot determination is performed in a high-probability state (which corresponds to the "high probability game state" in this embodiment), the winning value stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table is used. On the other hand, when a jackpot determination is performed in a low-probability state (which corresponds to the "normal game state" and the "time-saving game state" in this embodiment), the winning value stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table is used.

In this way, when a start condition is met, such as when acquired information such as a jackpot random number obtained upon a game ball entering the first start port 21 or the second start port 22 is stored in the determination memory area 830, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player based on the jackpot random number.

Following the processing of step S3081, the main CPU 81 determines whether the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" (step S3082). Here, if it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination is not a "jackpot" (step S3082: NO), that is, if the result of the jackpot determination is a "miss," setting information for a missing symbol is set in the main RAM 83 (step S3083). As a result, when processing step S315 above, the missing symbol set here will be displayed in a stopped state on the first special symbol display device 41 or the second special symbol display device 42. In this case, a jackpot game will not be played.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" (step S3082: YES), it executes a jackpot symbol selection process to select a jackpot symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41 or the second special symbol display device 42 (step S3084). Specifically, if the symbol random number stored in the determination memory area 830 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination in step S3081 is related to the first special symbol determination, one of the jackpot symbols is selected based on which random number value of the jackpot symbol specified in the symbol determination table for the first starting gate winning (see Figure 6(B)) matches that symbol random number. In this case, one of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 illustrated in Figure 6(B) is selected. Additionally, if the symbol random number is related to the second special symbol determination, one of the jackpot symbols is selected based on which random number value of the jackpot symbol specified in the symbol determination table for the second starting gate winnings matches that symbol random number. In this case, one of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y4 shown in Figure 6(C) is selected.

The main CPU 81 then sets the setting information for the selected jackpot symbol in the main RAM 83 (step S3085). As a result, during the processing of step S315, the jackpot symbol set here is displayed as a stopped jackpot symbol on the first special symbol display device 41 or the second special symbol display device 42, and then a jackpot game corresponding to that jackpot symbol is played.

[Variation pattern selection process by main control board 80]
Fig. 32 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S309 in Fig. 30. After executing the jackpot determination process in step S308 in Fig. 30, the main CPU 81 determines whether the determination result in step S3081 is a jackpot (step S3091). If it is determined that a jackpot has occurred (step S3091: YES), the main CPU 81 reads out the jackpot variation pattern selection table from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S3092).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot is not reached (step S3091: NO), it determines whether to perform a reach effect that encourages the player to expect a jackpot, based on whether the reach random number stored in the determination memory area 830 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 82 (random number value corresponding to the reach effect) (step S3093). If it determines that a reach effect should be performed (step S3093: YES), it reads out a reach miss variation pattern selection table from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S3094). Conversely, if it determines that a reach effect should not be performed (step S3093: NO), it reads out a no-reach miss variation pattern selection table from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S3095).

The main CPU 81 executes a fluctuation pattern random number determination process by referencing the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the main RAM 83 by the process of step S3092, step S3094, or step S3095 (step S3096). Specifically, when a jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table or a reach-miss fluctuation pattern selection table is set in the main RAM 83, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the determination memory area 830 is read from the set fluctuation pattern selection table, thereby selecting one fluctuation pattern. Furthermore, when a no-reach-miss fluctuation pattern selection table is set in the main RAM 83, a reserved number is identified based on the reserved number T1 for the first special symbol determination (or the reserved number T2 for the second special symbol determination) stored in the main RAM 83, and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the identified reserved number is read from the no-reach-miss fluctuation pattern selection table, thereby selecting one fluctuation pattern. By selecting a special symbol fluctuation pattern in this manner, the special symbol fluctuation time is inevitably determined.

When the main CPU 81 selects a variation pattern, it sets the setting information for the selected variation pattern in the main RAM 83 (step S3097). This variation pattern setting information, along with the symbol setting information set in the main RAM 83 by the jackpot determination process in step S308 described above, is included in a variation start command and sent to the sub-control board 90.

[Processing by the main control board 80 when special drawings are stopped]
Fig. 33 is a detailed flowchart of the process when the special symbol stops in step S317 of Fig. 30. After resetting the elapsed time by the process of step S316, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred (step S3171), as exemplified in Fig. 33, in the same manner as the process of step S3082 (see Fig. 31). If it is determined that a jackpot has occurred (step S3171: YES), the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S3172).

Next, the main CPU 81 sets the probability variable game flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "OFF" (step S3173), and also sets the time-saving game flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "OFF" (step S3174). Here, the probability variable game flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the probability of a jackpot being determined in the special symbol determination is relatively high.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the gaming state is controlled by the settings of the variable probability gaming flag and the time-saving gaming flag. That is, when the gaming state is controlled to the "variable probability gaming state," both the variable probability gaming flag and the time-saving gaming flag are set to "ON." When the gaming state is controlled to the "normal gaming state," both the variable probability gaming flag and the time-saving gaming flag are set to "OFF." When the gaming state is controlled to the "time-saving gaming state," the variable probability gaming flag is set to "OFF" and the time-saving gaming flag is set to "ON."

Following the processing of step S3174, the main CPU 81 sets an opening command in the main RAM 83 to notify the player that a jackpot game is about to begin (step S3175). This opening command includes information such as the type of jackpot and the opening pattern of the first jackpot opening 26 (or the second jackpot opening 28 or V jackpot opening 287) during the jackpot game, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission processing of step S8.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot has not been reached (step S3171: NO), it determines whether the probability variable play flag is set to "ON" (step S3176). Here, if it determines that the probability variable play flag is set to "ON" (step S3176: YES), that is, if the special symbol determination is being performed in a high probability state, it updates the remaining number of high probability play times K stored in the main RAM 83 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3177). This remaining number of high probability play times K indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol determination will be performed in a high probability state.

Following the processing of step S3177, the main CPU 81 determines whether the remaining number of high-probability games K is "0" (step S3178). Here, if it determines that the remaining number of high-probability games K is "0" (step S3178: YES), it sets the probability variable game flag to "OFF" (step S3179). This causes special symbol determination to be performed in a low probability state.

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S3179, determines that the probability variable play flag is not set to "ON" (step S3176: NO), or determines that the remaining number of high-probability play times K is not "0" (step S3178: NO), it determines whether the time-saving play flag is set to "ON" (step S3180). Here, if it determines that the time-saving play flag is set to "ON" (step S3180: YES), it updates the remaining number of time-saving play times J stored in the main RAM 83 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3181). This remaining number of time-saving play times J indicates the remaining number of times that special symbol determination will be performed in the time-saving state (high base state).

Following the processing of step S3181, the main CPU 81 determines whether the remaining number of times J for time-saving play is "0" (step S3182). Here, if it determines that the remaining number of times J for time-saving play is "0" (step S3182: YES), it sets the time-saving play flag to "OFF" (step S3183). As a result, the support function that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting hole 22 is no longer provided.

[Big prize opening/closing control process by the main control board 80]
Figures 34 to 36 are detailed flowcharts of the big prize opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of Figure 27. Following the second start opening opening/closing control process in step S5 of Figure 27, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the big prize game flag is set to "ON" (step S601), as exemplified in Figure 34. If it is determined that the big prize game flag is not set to "ON" (step S601: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process in step S7.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S601: YES), it determines whether or not the opening period for the jackpot game is in progress (step S602), for example, based on whether or not the elapsed time since the opening command for the jackpot game was set by the processing of step S3175 (see Figure 33) has reached a predetermined opening time.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the opening period for a jackpot game is in progress (step S602: YES), it determines whether the opening time has elapsed (step S603). If it determines that the opening time has not elapsed (step S603: NO), processing proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7. On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), it sets the number of rounds Rmax for the jackpot game, the operation pattern, etc., and stores this setting information in the main RAM 103 (step S604). Specifically, the main CPU 81 sets the number of rounds Rmax based on the opening pattern of the jackpot openings for each jackpot, as illustrated in Figures 6(B) and 6(C), and sets the operation patterns of the opening/closing member 27, the opening/closing member 29, and the slide member 285 so that the first jackpot opening 26, the second jackpot opening 28, and the V jackpot opening 287 are opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot.

By executing the processing of step S604, various times related to the jackpot game, such as the interval time from the end of one round of play until the start of the next round of play, and the ending time after the end of the final round of play, are also set.

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S604, it updates the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 by adding "1" to the number (step S605). This number of rounds R is set to "0" before the start of a jackpot game, and is updated by adding "1" each time the processing of step S605 is executed.

Following the processing of step S605, the main CPU 81 determines whether the number of rounds R updated in the processing of step S605 is "1" (step S606). In this embodiment, as described above with reference to Figures 6(B) and (C), for all jackpots, the second large prize opening 28 is used for the first round of round play, and the first large prize opening 26 is used for round play from the second round onwards. Therefore, if the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R is "1" (step S606: YES), it starts second large prize opening opening/closing control, which controls the opening and closing of the second large prize opening 28 (and V prize opening 287) via the second large prize opening solenoid 282 (and V prize opening solenoid 286) (step S607). Then, it sets a second large prize opening opening/closing round play start command in the main RAM 83, notifying that a round play to open and close the second large prize opening 28 will begin (step S808).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R updated in the processing of step S605 is not "1" (step S606: NO), that is, if the number of rounds R is "2" or greater, it starts first large prize opening opening/closing control, which controls the opening and closing of the first large prize opening 26 via the first large prize opening solenoid 262 (step S609).

Following the processing of step S609, the main CPU 81 sets a first large prize opening/closing round game start command in the main RAM 83 to notify that a round game in which the first large prize opening 26 is to be opened and closed will begin (step S610).

The second large prize opening/closing round game start command set in the processing of step S608 and the first large prize opening/closing round game start command set in the processing of step S610 are transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission processing of step S8 in Figure 27.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines in the processing of step S602 that the current period is not the opening period of the jackpot game (step S602: NO), it determines whether the current period is the ending period of the jackpot game (step S613). Specifically, it determines whether the current period is the ending period based on whether the elapsed time since the end of the final round of the jackpot game has reached a predetermined ending time. Here, if it is determined that the current period is the ending period (step S613: YES), processing proceeds to step S626 (see FIG. 36) described below.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the current period is not the ending period of the jackpot game (step S613: NO), it determines whether the current period is an interval period, for example, based on whether a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the end of the previous round of play (step S614). Here, if it determines that the current period is not an interval period (step S614: NO), processing proceeds to step S617 (see FIG. 35), which will be described later.

If the main CPU 81 determines that it is currently in the interval period (step S614: YES), it determines whether the interval time set in the processing of step S604 above has elapsed since the end of the previous round of play (step S615). If it determines that the interval time has not elapsed (step S615: NO), processing proceeds to the prize ball processing of step S7. Conversely, if it determines that the interval time has elapsed (step S615: YES), processing from step S605 onwards is executed.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the game is not currently in an interval period (step S614: NO), i.e., if a round of play is in progress, it determines whether the second large prize opening 28 is currently open, as illustrated in FIG. 35 (step S617). Specifically, after executing the processing of step S607, it determines whether the second large prize opening 28 is currently open based on whether either a first termination condition for the control of the opening and closing of the second large prize opening 28, that is, a predetermined number of game balls have entered the game opening since the opening of the second large prize opening 28, or a second termination condition for the control of the opening and closing of the second large prize opening 28, that is, a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the second large prize opening 28, is satisfied. If neither the first termination condition nor the second termination condition is satisfied, it can be determined that the second large prize opening 28 is currently open. If it is determined here that the second large prize opening 28 is not open (step S617: NO), processing proceeds to step S621, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the second large prize opening 28 is open (step S616: YES), it determines whether the gaming ball has passed through the V prize opening 287 based on the presence or absence of a detection signal from the V prize opening sensor 283 (step S618). Here, if it is determined that the gaming ball has not passed through the V prize opening 287 (step S618: NO), processing proceeds to step S621, which will be described later.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the gaming ball has passed through the V winning opening 287 (step S618: YES), it sets the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "ON" (step S619). This V winning flag is a flag that indicates whether the gaming ball has passed through the V winning opening 287 (i.e., whether the gaming ball has made a V winning), and although it is normally set to "OFF," it is set to "ON" when the V winning opening sensor 283 detects the passage of the gaming ball.

Following the processing of step S619, the main CPU 81 sets a V winning command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the gaming ball has won a V winning (step S620).

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S620, when it determines that the second large prize opening 28 is not currently open (step S617: NO), or when it determines that the gaming ball has not passed through the V prize opening 287 (step S618: NO), it determines whether the second large prize opening opening/closing control started in the processing of step S607 (or the first large prize opening opening/closing control started in the processing of step S609) has ended (step S621). Here, if it determines that the large prize opening opening/closing control has not ended (step S621: NO), processing proceeds to the prize ball processing of step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the control of opening and closing the large prize opening has ended (step S621: YES), it determines whether the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 matches the number of rounds Rmax set in the processing of step S604 (step S622). Here, if it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: NO), processing proceeds to prize ball processing in step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R matches the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: YES), it starts measuring the ending time, which is the time elapsed since the beginning of the ending period (step S623), and sets an ending command in the main RAM 83 notifying the beginning of the ending period (step S624). This ending command is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the sending process of step S8.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines in the processing of step S613 in FIG. 34 that the game is currently in the ending period (step S613: YES), it determines whether the ending time has elapsed (step S626), as illustrated in FIG. 36. Specifically, it determines whether the ending time has elapsed based on whether the ending time measurement started in the processing of step S623 has reached the ending time set in the processing of step S604. Here, if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S626: NO), processing proceeds to the prize ball processing of step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the ending time has elapsed (step S626: YES), it determines whether the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S627). Here, if it determines that the V winning flag is set to "ON" (step S627: YES), it sets the probability variable game flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "ON" (step S628), sets the remaining number of high probability games K stored in the main RAM 83 to "100" (step S629), and, although not shown in FIG. 36, sets the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "OFF."

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S629, or when it determines that the V winning flag is not set to "ON" (step S627: NO), it sets the time-saving game flag to "ON" (step S630). Then, for example, based on the information indicating the type of jackpot contained in the opening command set in the main RAM 83 by the processing of step S3175 (see FIG. 33), it determines whether the jackpot that triggered the execution of the current jackpot game is a jackpot with a time-saving count of "100" (in this embodiment, 3R probability A, 10R probability A, or 3R probability B: see FIGS. 6(B) and (C)) (step S631).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot that triggered the execution of this jackpot game is a jackpot with a time-saving count of "100" (step S631: YES), it sets the remaining number of time-saving games J to "200" (step S632).If it determines that the jackpot is not a jackpot with a time-saving count of "100" (step S631: NO), it sets the remaining number of time-saving games J to "100" (step S633).In this way, when the processing of step S632 or step S633 is executed, the jackpot game flag is set to "OFF" (step S634).

[Interrupt processing by the sub-control board 90]
When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the sub-CPU 91 of the sub-control board 90 sets an interrupt cycle, which is the cycle for performing the interrupt processing described below. The sub-CPU 91 then repeats a random number update process, which updates the effect random numbers and other data used to determine the effect content, at a predetermined cycle shorter than the interrupt cycle. In other words, while the gaming machine 1 is running, the sub-CPU 91 repeats the random number update process at a predetermined cycle and also repeats the interrupt process at the interrupt cycle.

The interrupt processing executed by the sub-control board 90 will be described below with reference to Figure 37. Figure 37 is a flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing executed by the sub-control board 90. Similar to the interrupt processing executed by the main control board 80 (see Figure 27), the sub-CPU 91 repeatedly executes the series of processes illustrated in Figure 37 at regular intervals (e.g., 4 milliseconds). Note that the processing executed by the sub-control board 90, which will be described based on the flowcharts from Figure 37 onwards, is performed in accordance with commands issued by the sub-CPU 91 based on the program stored in the sub-ROM 92.

When the sub-CPU 91 receives a command from the main control board 80, it first executes a command reception process (step S10) to perform processing according to the command. This command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 38.

Following the processing of step S10, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether any of the first effect button 35, second effect button 36, or cross key (not shown) shown in FIG. 1 has been operated, based on whether or not operation information has been input from the first effect button detection sensor 96, second effect button detection sensor 97, or key operation detection sensor shown in FIG. 5 (step S30). If it determines that the first effect button 35, second effect button 36, or cross key has been operated (step S30: YES), an operation command notifying this fact is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S31). This operation command is sent to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the processing of step S32 (described below), and processing is performed to realize the effect corresponding to the operation of the first effect button 35, second effect button 36, or cross key.

When the sub-CPU 91 has executed the processing of step S31, or when it determines that no operation has been performed (step S30: NO), it executes a command transmission process (step S32). Specifically, it transmits the command set in the sub-RAM 93 by the command reception process of step S10 or the processing of step S31 to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120). Execution of this command transmission process instructs the image and sound control board 100 to execute effects such as displaying images and outputting sound effects, and instructs the lamp control board 120 to execute effects such as lighting up various lamps and using movable props.

Following the processing of step S32, the sub-CPU 91 executes a data transfer process (step S33). Specifically, data related to image and sound control is transmitted from the image and sound control board 100, and this data is transferred to the lamp control board 120. As a result, the lamp control board 120 controls the effects of the effect means, such as the frame lamp 37, panel lamp 5, and movable decorative member 14, so as to synchronize with the effects performed by the display screen 70 and speaker 38.

[Command Reception Processing by Sub-Control Board 90]
Fig. 38 is a detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of Fig. 37. As illustrated in Fig. 38, the sub-CPU 91 first determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S11). If it is determined that a command has not been received (step S11: NO), the process proceeds to step S30 described above.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that it has received a command from the main control board 80 (step S11: YES), it determines whether the command is a pending command sent from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S212 or step S220 in FIG. 28 (step S12). If it determines that the command is not a pending command (step S12: NO), processing proceeds to step S15, which will be described later.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is a pending command (step S12: YES), it executes pending command reception processing (step S13). This pending command reception processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 40.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a hold command (step S12: NO), it determines whether the command is a fluctuation start command sent from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S310 in FIG. 30 (step S15). Here, if it determines that the received command is not a fluctuation start command (step S15: NO), processing proceeds to step S17, which will be described later.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is a fluctuation start command (step S15: YES), it executes fluctuation start command reception processing (step S16). This fluctuation start command reception processing will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 44.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a change start command (step S15: NO), it determines whether the command is a change end command sent from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S314 in FIG. 30 (step S17). If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the command is a change end command (step S17: YES), it sets a change effect end command in the sub-RAM 93 that instructs the execution of processing to end the display of the change in the effect pattern and stop and display the effect pattern in a manner that indicates the result of the special pattern determination executed when the pattern change started (step S18).

This variable effect end command is sent to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command sending process of step S32, and as a result, a special pattern indicating the result of the first special pattern determination (or second special pattern determination) is displayed frozen on the first special pattern display device 41 (or second special pattern display device 42), and an effect pattern indicating the result of the first special pattern determination (or second special pattern determination) is displayed frozen on the display screen 70.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a variation end command (step S17: NO), it determines whether the command is an opening command sent from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S3175 in FIG. 33 (step S19). If it determines that the received command is an opening command (step S19: YES), it sets an opening effect start command in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) to start an opening effect that notifies the player of the type of jackpot and encourages the player to hit the right during the opening period of the jackpot game (step S20).

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not an opening command (step S19: NO), it determines whether the command is a round game start command (step S21). That is, it determines whether the sub-CPU 91 has received a second large prize opening/closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S608 in FIG. 34, or a first large prize opening/closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S610 in FIG. 34.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is a round game start command (step S21: YES), it executes a round game start command reception process that performs processing in accordance with the received round game start command (step S22).

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a round game start command (step S21: NO), it determines whether the command is a V winning command sent from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S620 in Figure 35 (step S23). Here, if it determines that the received command is a V winning command (step S23: YES), it executes a V winning command reception process that performs processing in accordance with the V winning command (step S24). Specifically, it sets in the sub-RAM 93 a V winning notification command that instructs the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) to execute the V winning notification effect illustrated in Figure 20.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a V winning command (step S23: NO), it executes an ending command reception process, which includes setting an ending performance start command in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) to execute a predetermined ending performance (step S25). The ending performance start command set in the sub-RAM 93 by the processing of step S25 is sent to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120), thereby executing the mode selection prompt performance described above.

[Hold command reception process by sub-control board 90]
39 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step S13 of FIG. 38. When the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S12: YES), it updates the number of hold special symbol determinations stored in the sub-RAM 93 to a value incremented by "1" (step S131), as illustrated in FIG. 39. Specifically, when a hold command related to a first special symbol determination is received, the number of hold special symbol determinations is updated to a value incremented by "1", and when a hold command related to a second special symbol determination is received, the number of hold special symbol determinations is updated to a value incremented by "1".

Following the processing of step S131, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether the received hold command includes advance judgment information (step S132). If it determines that the received hold command does not include advance judgment information (step S132: NO), it sets a hold icon display command in the sub-RAM 93 (step S133). This hold icon display command is a command that instructs the display of a hold icon that does not include setting information related to various pre-reading effects, such as icon change effect setting information (icon change effect pattern information, described below), and is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 and lamp control board 120 by the command transmission processing of step S32.

For example, when the image and sound control CPU 101 of the image and sound control board 100 receives a hold icon display command related to a first special pattern determination that does not include setting information for the icon change effect, it controls the drawing process by the VDP 104 to display a white hold icon in the hold icon display area 71. And, because no settings for the icon change effect have been made for this white hold icon, the icon change effect described above is not performed.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received hold command includes pre-determination information (step S132: YES), it stores the pre-determination information in the sub-RAM 93 (step S134). Next, the sub-CPU 91 executes an icon change effect pattern setting process to set the effect pattern for the icon change effect described above (step S135). This icon change effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 40.

Following the processing of step S135, the sub-CPU 91 executes chance eye effect pattern setting processing to set a chance eye effect pattern such as the weak chance eye effect described above with reference to Figures 8 (C) and 12 (C) or the strong chance eye effect described above with reference to Figures 8 (E) and 12 (G) (step S136). This chance eye effect pattern setting processing will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 41.

Following the processing of step S136, the sub-CPU 91 executes a performance symbol attention performance pattern setting process to set the performance pattern of the first performance symbol attention performance described above with reference to Figures 8 (D) and 12 (D) and the second performance symbol attention performance described above with reference to Figures 8 (F) and 12 (H) (step S137). This performance symbol attention performance pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 42.

Following the processing of step S137, the sub-CPU 91 executes a pre-sway effect pattern setting process to set the effect pattern of the pre-sway effect described above based on Figures 22(B), 24, 25, etc. (step S138). This pre-sway effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on Figure 43.

Following the processing of step S138, the sub-CPU 91 sets a pending icon display command in the sub-RAM 93 (step S139). Specifically, if information indicating the presentation pattern of the icon change presentation (icon change presentation pattern information) has been set in the sub-RAM 93 by the processing of step S135, a pending icon display command including that icon change presentation pattern information is set in the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the icon change presentation. Also, if information indicating the presentation pattern of the chance eye presentation (chance eye presentation pattern information) has been set in the sub-RAM 93 by the processing of step S136, a pending icon display command including that chance eye presentation pattern information is set in the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the chance eye presentation.

Furthermore, if information indicating the performance pattern of the performance symbol attention performance (performance symbol attention performance pattern information) is set in sub-RAM 93 by the processing of step S137, a hold icon display command including that performance symbol attention performance pattern information is set in sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the performance symbol attention performance. Further, if information indicating the performance pattern of the pre-sway performance (pre-sway performance pattern information) is set in sub-RAM 93 by the processing of step S138, a hold icon display command including that pre-sway performance pattern information is set in sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the pre-sway performance.

The pending icon display command set in the sub-RAM 93 in this way in step S139 is sent to the image/sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command sending process in step S32 of Figure 37. In response, the image/sound control CPU 101 and lamp CPU 121 execute the necessary performance control based on the performance pattern information contained in the pending icon display command received from the sub-control board 90, thereby realizing each of the pre-reading performances using the performance patterns set in steps S135 to S138.

[Icon Change Presentation Pattern Setting Process by Sub-Control Board 90]
Fig. 40 is a detailed flowchart of the icon change effect pattern setting process in step S135 of Fig. 39. Following the process of step S134, the sub-CPU 91 executes a series of icon change effect pattern setting processes exemplified in Fig. 40.

The sub-CPU 91 first obtains an icon change effect random number and stores it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1351). This icon change effect random number is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub-CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time it receives a hold command from the main control board 80 as the icon change effect random number.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 reads from the sub-ROM 92 an icon change effect pattern selection table for selecting an icon change effect pattern, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 (step S1352). This icon change effect pattern selection table associates the results of the special symbol determination (jackpot, miss), the special symbol variation pattern, the icon change effect pattern (including an effect pattern without icon change), and the random number value that is compared with the icon change effect random number.

In response to this, following the processing of step S1352, the sub-CPU 91 executes an icon change effect pattern selection process to select an effect pattern for the icon change effect (step S1353). Specifically, based on the pre-determination information stored in the sub-RAM 93 in the processing of step S134 of FIG. 39, one effect pattern for the icon change effect is selected by reading from the icon change effect pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93 one effect pattern corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol determination made at the start of the pre-read target variation, the special symbol variation pattern selected at the start of the pre-read target variation, and the icon change effect random number obtained in the processing of step S1351. Then, icon change effect pattern information indicating the selected effect pattern is set in the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the icon change effect (step S1354).

This icon change effect setting information is sent to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command sending process of step S32 described above (see Figure 37). In response, the image and sound control CPU 101 and lamp CPU 121 execute the necessary effect control based on the icon change effect setting information contained in the pending icon display command received from the sub-control board 90, thereby executing the icon change effect using the effect pattern set by the icon change effect pattern setting process of Figure 40.

[Chance Eye Presentation Pattern Setting Process by Sub-Control Board 90]
Fig. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the chance eye effect pattern setting process in step S136 of Fig. 39. Following the process of step S135, the sub-CPU 91 executes a series of chance eye effect pattern setting processes exemplified in Fig. 41. Note that the chance eye effect can be executed not only during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, but also during the variable display of the second special symbol in the probability variable gaming state (or the time-shortened gaming state). However, here, as described above with reference to Figs. 8 and 12, the process executed by the sub-CPU 91 to execute the chance eye effect during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state will be described.

The sub-CPU 91 first determines whether the pre-target change (see Figure 8) that occurs before the pre-read target change is a pattern change that results in a no-reach miss (step S1361).

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, each time the main CPU 81 reserves the right to determine the first special symbol, a reserve command including advance judgment information is sent from the main control board 80, and each time the sub-CPU 91 receives this reserve command, it stores the advance judgment information in the sub-RAM 93 by processing step S134 above. Therefore, it is possible to identify the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-target variation based on the advance judgment information corresponding to the pre-target variation that was stored in the sub-RAM 93 before the advance judgment information corresponding to the anticipated target variation, and the sub-CPU 91 executes the judgment process of step S1361 above based on the advance judgment information corresponding to the pre-target variation stored in the sub-RAM 93.

Here, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the target pre-change is not a no-reach miss pattern change (step S1361: NO), that is, if some kind of reach effect is performed in the target pre-change, it is not possible to execute a chance eye effect that uses the effect pattern displayed on the display screen 70 at the end of the target pre-change, and therefore the chance eye effect pattern setting process ends without performing the processing from step S1362 onwards, and the process proceeds to step S137 in Figure 39.

If multiple pre-target variations are reserved when the right to determine the first special pattern corresponding to the pre-read target variation is reserved, the determination process of step S1361 is executed for all of these pre-target variations, and the process of step S1362, described below, is executed only if all of the pre-target variations are pattern variations with no reach and a miss.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the pre-target variation is a pattern variation with no reach and a miss (step S1361: YES), it acquires a chance eye effect random number and stores it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1362). This chance eye effect random number is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub-CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the hold command from the main control board 80 as the chance eye effect random number.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute a chance eye effect based on whether the chance eye effect random number acquired and stored by the processing of step S1362 matches any of the multiple random number values stored in the sub-ROM 92 (step S1363). Note that in this embodiment, multiple random number values (multiple random number values for jackpots) are compared with the chance eye effect random number when the determination result of the first special symbol determination specified based on the advance determination information corresponding to the pre-read target variable is a "jackpot," and multiple random number values (multiple random number values for losses) are compared with the chance eye effect random number when the determination result of the first special symbol determination specified based on the advance determination information corresponding to the pre-read target variable is a "loss." These values are stored separately in the sub-ROM 92.

For this reason, the sub-CPU 91 determines the result of the first special pattern determination performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the pre-read target variation based on the advance determination information stored in the sub-RAM 93 and corresponding to the pre-read target variation, and based on this determination result, selects either the multiple random number values for the jackpot or the multiple random number values for the loss, and executes the processing of step S1363 by referring to the selected multiple random number values.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines not to execute a chance eye effect (step S1363: NO), it executes the process of step S137 in FIG. 39 without executing the processes of step S1364 and subsequent steps described below. Conversely, if it determines to execute a chance eye effect (step S1363: YES), it reads out a chance eye effect pattern selection table from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 (step S1364), and executes a chance eye effect pattern selection process by referring to the set chance eye effect pattern selection table (step S1365).

Although not shown in the figure, the chance eye effect pattern selection table associates the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, multiple effect patterns for the chance eye effect, and a random number value to be compared with the chance eye effect random number. In the processing of step S1365 above, the sub-CPU 91 selects one effect pattern for the chance eye effect by reading out from the chance eye effect pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93 one effect pattern corresponding to the determination result of the first special symbol determination made at the start of the pre-read target change, the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected at the start of the pre-read target change, and the chance eye effect random number obtained in the processing of step S1362, based on the advance determination information corresponding to the pre-read target change stored in the sub-RAM 93 in the processing of step S134 of FIG. 39. Then, the sub-CPU 91 sets chance eye effect pattern information indicating the selected effect pattern in the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the chance eye effect (step S1366).

This setting information for the chance eye effect is sent to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command sending process of step S32 described above (see Figure 37). In response, the image and sound control CPU 101 and lamp CPU 121 execute the necessary effect control based on the setting information for the chance eye effect included in the pending icon display command received from the sub-control board 90, thereby executing the chance eye effect with the effect pattern set by the chance eye effect pattern setting process of Figure 41.

[Processing for setting the effect symbol attention effect pattern by the sub-control board 90]
Fig. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the effect symbol attention effect pattern setting process in step S137 of Fig. 39. Following the process of step S136, the sub-CPU 91 executes a series of effect symbol attention effect pattern setting processes exemplified in Fig. 42.

The sub-CPU 91 first determines whether a chance eye effect will be executed in the target-front variation based on whether the setting information for the chance eye effect has been set in the sub-RAM 93 through the processing of step S1366 in FIG. 41 (step S1370). The performance symbol attention effect in this embodiment is an effect that is executed in conjunction with a weak chance eye effect or a strong chance eye effect, as described above with reference to FIGS. 8 and 12. Therefore, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a chance eye effect will not be executed in the target-front variation (step S1370: NO), the processing proceeds to step S138 in FIG. 39 without executing the processing from step S1371 onwards.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a chance eye effect will be executed in the target pre-variation (step S1370: YES), it acquires a performance symbol attention performance random number and stores it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1371). This performance symbol attention performance random number is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub-CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time of receiving a hold command from the main control board 80 as the performance symbol attention performance random number.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not a featured effect will be executed during the pre-read target variation (step S1372). As described above with reference to Figures 8 and 9, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that if the result of the first special symbol determination executed at the start of the pre-read target variation is a "jackpot" and the pre-read target variation develops into an SPSP reach (second half battle), a victory effect (see, for example, Figure 9 (Q)) and a doublet effect symbol featured effect (see Figure 9 (R)) are executed as the result effect of this SPSP reach. The sub-ROM 92 stores information indicating which variation pattern of the first special symbol selected by the main CPU 81 will result in the execution of a victory effect or a doublet effect symbol featured effect.

For this reason, in the processing of step S1372 above, the sub-CPU 91, based on the advance judgment information corresponding to the predicted target variation stored in the sub-RAM 93, identifies the judgment result of the first special pattern judgment performed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the predicted target variation and the variation pattern of the first special pattern selected by the main CPU 81 at the start of the predicted target variation, and by referring to the information in the sub-ROM 92 based on these identification results, determines whether or not a double-digit performance pattern attention performance will be performed in the predicted target variation.

The sub-ROM 92 stores a display pattern focus effect execution decision table for when a focus effect is present and a display pattern focus effect execution decision table for when a focus effect is not present. If the sub-CPU 91 determines that a double-digit display pattern focus effect will be executed in the pre-read target change (step S1372: YES), it reads the display pattern focus effect execution decision table for when a focus effect is present from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1373). Conversely, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a double-digit display pattern focus effect will not be executed in the pre-read target change (step S1372: NO), it reads the display pattern focus effect execution decision table for when a focus effect is not present from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1374).

Then, when the sub-CPU 91 sets either one of the effect symbol focus effect execution determination tables in the sub-RAM 93 by processing step S1373 or step S1374, it executes the effect symbol focus effect execution determination process (step S1375). Although not shown in the figure, the effect symbol focus effect execution determination table set in the sub-RAM 93 associates the determination result of the first special pattern determination, the variation pattern of the first special pattern, and a random number value to be compared with the effect symbol focus effect random number. In processing step S1375, the sub-CPU 91 identifies the determination result of the first special pattern determination executed at the start of the pre-read target variation and the variation pattern of the first special pattern selected at the start of the pre-read target variation based on the advance determination information corresponding to the pre-read target variation stored in the sub-RAM 93. Then, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a special effect pattern in the pre-target variation, based on whether or not the special effect pattern random number acquired by the processing of step S1371 matches one of multiple random number values associated with the combination of the result of the identified first special pattern determination and the variation pattern of the first special pattern in the special effect pattern execution decision table set in sub-RAM 93.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether the result of the execution determination process in step S1375 is that a performance symbol focus effect will be executed during the target-front variation (step S1376). Here, if it is determined that the result of the execution determination process is that a performance symbol focus effect will not be executed during the target-front variation (step S1376: NO), the sub-CPU 91 executes the process of step S138 in FIG. 39 without executing the processes from step S1377 onwards, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the result of the execution determination process is that a special effect symbol will be executed during the target-front variation (step S1376: YES), it determines whether the special effect symbol executed during the target-front variation is a weak special effect symbol based on the setting information for the special effect symbol set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1377). Here, if it determines that it is a weak special effect symbol (see FIG. 8(C)) (step S1377: YES), it sets the setting information for the first special effect symbol special effect (see FIG. 8(D)) in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1378). If it determines that it is not a weak special effect symbol (step S1377: NO), that is, if it is a strong special effect symbol (see FIG. 8(E)), it sets the setting information for the second special effect symbol special effect (see FIG. 8(F)) in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1379).

The setting information for this first performance symbol focus effect (or second performance symbol focus effect) is sent to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command sending process (see FIG. 37) of step S32 described above. In response, the image and sound control CPU 101 and lamp CPU 121 execute the necessary performance control based on the setting information for the first performance symbol focus effect (or second performance symbol focus effect) contained in the pending icon display command received from the sub-control board 90, thereby executing the performance symbol focus effect in the performance pattern set by the performance symbol focus effect pattern setting process of FIG. 42.

The performance symbol focus effect execution decision table for with focus effect, which is referenced when a double-digit performance symbol focus effect is executed in a pre-read target variation, has more random number values associated with it than the performance symbol focus effect execution decision table for without focus effect, which is referenced when a double-digit performance symbol focus effect is not executed in a pre-read target variation. For this reason, when the processing of step S1375 above is executed with reference to the former table, there is a higher probability that the first performance symbol focus effect (or second performance symbol focus effect) will be executed than when the processing of step S1375 above is executed with reference to the latter table.

[Preliminary shaking performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Fig. 43 is a detailed flowchart of the pre-sway effect pattern setting process in step S138 of Fig. 39. Following the process of step S137, the sub-CPU 91 executes a series of pre-sway effect pattern setting processes exemplified in Fig. 43.

As illustrated in FIG. 43, the sub-CPU 91 first determines whether the pre-target variation (see FIG. 8) that occurs before the pre-read target variation is a no-reach miss pattern variation (step S1381), similar to the determination process of step S1361 in FIG. 41 described above. Here, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the pre-target variation is not a no-reach miss pattern variation (step S1381: NO), that is, if some kind of reach effect is performed in the pre-target variation, the pre-swing effect pattern setting process ends without performing the processes from step S1382 onwards, and processing proceeds to step S139 in FIG. 39.

If multiple pre-target variations are reserved when the right to determine the first special pattern corresponding to the pre-read target variation is reserved, the determination process of step S1381 is executed for all of these pre-target variations, and the process of step S1382, described below, is executed only if all of the pre-target variations are pattern variations with no reach and a miss.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the pre-target variation is a pattern variation with no reach and a miss (step S1361: YES), it acquires a pre-sway effect random number and stores it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1382). This pre-sway effect random number is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub-CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the hold command from the main control board 80 as the pre-sway effect random number.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether the current presentation mode is the normal presentation mode based on the presentation mode information indicating the current presentation mode stored in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1383). If it determines that the current presentation mode is the normal presentation mode (step S1383: YES), that is, if the current game state is the normal game state, it reads out the pre-sway presentation execution determination table for the normal presentation mode from the sub-RAM 93 and sets it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1384). Conversely, if it determines that the current presentation mode is not the normal presentation mode (step S1383: NO), that is, if the current game state is the variable probability game state, it reads out the pre-sway presentation execution determination table for the variable probability presentation mode from the sub-RAM 93 and sets it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1385).

In this way, when the sub-CPU 91 sets either one of the pre-sway effect execution decision tables in the sub-RAM 93 by processing step S1384 or processing step S1385, it performs a pre-sway effect execution determination process to determine whether or not to execute the above-mentioned pre-sway effect based on Figures 22(B), 24, 25, etc. (step S1386).

Although not shown in the figure, the pre-swing effect execution determination table set in the sub-RAM 93 associates the winning start slot type, the determination result of the special pattern determination, the special pattern change pattern, and the random number value to be compared with the pre-swing effect random number. In the processing of step S1386 above, the sub-CPU 91 first identifies the starting slot type, the determination result of the special pattern determination performed at the start of the pre-read target change, and the special pattern change pattern selected at the start of the pre-read target change based on the pre-determination information corresponding to the pre-read target change stored in the sub-RAM 93. Then, by referring to the pre-swing effect execution determination table set in the sub-RAM 93, it determines whether or not to execute a pre-swing effect based on whether the pre-swing effect random number obtained by the processing of step S1382 above matches any of the multiple random number values associated with the identified combination of winning start slot type, special pattern determination result, and special pattern change pattern.

Then, based on the result of the execution determination process of step S1386, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the pre-sway effect (step S1387). If it determines that the pre-sway effect will be executed (step S1387: YES), it sets the setting information for the pre-sway effect in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1388).

This pre-sway effect setting information is sent to the image/sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command sending process of step S32 described above (see FIG. 37). In response, the image/sound control CPU 101 and lamp CPU 121 execute the necessary effect control based on the pre-sway effect setting information contained in the hold icon display command received from the sub-control board 90, thereby executing the pre-sway effect using the effect pattern set by the pre-sway effect pattern setting process of FIG. 43.

As described above with regard to the processing of steps S1384 and S1385, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, two execution decision tables are provided to be referenced when determining whether or not to execute a pre-swaying effect: a pre-swaying effect execution decision table for the normal presentation mode and a pre-swaying effect execution decision table for the special effect presentation mode. By switching between and referencing these two tables, the pre-swaying effect is executed at the execution ratio described above based on Figure 25.

[Fluctuation start command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
Fig. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S16 of Fig. 38. When the sub-CPU 91 determines that the command received from the main control board 80 is a fluctuation start command (step S15: YES), it executes a series of fluctuation start command reception processes exemplified in Fig. 44.

That is, the sub-CPU 91 acquires the value of the effect random number, which is updated appropriately by the random number update process on the sub-control board 90, at the time when it receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board 80, and stores this value in the sub-RAM 93 (step S161). Then, it analyzes the received fluctuation start command (step S162).

As described above, this fluctuation start command includes the symbol setting information indicating the result of the jackpot determination process, winning start gate information indicating whether the symbol setting information relates to the first or second special symbol determination, setting information for the special symbol fluctuation pattern, and information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation start command, the type and result of the special symbol determination can be identified. That is, it is possible to determine whether it is a jackpot or a miss, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot. Furthermore, by determining whether the fluctuation pattern is a miss fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern setting information, it is possible to determine whether a reach effect or a no-reach effect needs to be performed. Similarly, based on the fluctuation pattern setting information, the special symbol fluctuation time can be determined. Furthermore, based on the information indicating the gaming state, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be determined.

When the sub-CPU 91 analyzes the variation start command, it executes a variation effect pattern setting process based on the analysis results to set the variation effect pattern for the variation effect associated with the variable display of the special symbol (step S163). By executing this variation effect pattern setting process, the variation mode of the effect symbol, the presence or absence of a reach effect, the presence or absence of a pseudo-consecutive effect, the type of effect symbol that constitutes the reach effect symbol, the type and content of the reach effect, the content of the pseudo-consecutive effect, the type of effect symbol that will be stopped and displayed, etc. will be determined. This variation effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 45.

Following the processing of step S163, the sub-CPU 91 executes a preview effect pattern setting process (step S164) to set various preview effects that are executed when the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the variable effect pattern set in the processing of step S163. This preview effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 46.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 sets a variable performance start command in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the start of a variable performance using the variable performance pattern set in the processing of step S163, and to execute a preview performance using the preview performance pattern set in the processing of step S164 (step S170).

This variable performance start command includes information indicating the variable performance pattern set by the processing of step S163 and information indicating the preview performance pattern set by the processing of step S164, and is sent to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command sending processing of step S32. As a result, the variable performance and preview performance, whose performance patterns have been determined by the sub-control board 90, are realized by the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

Following the processing of step S170, the sub-CPU 91 updates the pending number stored in the sub-RAM 93 to a value minus "1" (step S171). Specifically, if the variation start command received from the main control board 80 notifies the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the sub-CPU 91 updates the pending number for the first special symbol determination to a value minus "1". On the other hand, if the variation start command received notifies the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the sub-CPU 91 updates the pending number for the second special symbol determination to a value minus "1".

[Variable performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Fig. 45 is a detailed flowchart of the variable effect pattern setting process in step S163 of Fig. 44. Following the process of step S162, the sub-CPU 91 executes a fixed effect pattern setting process (step S1631) to set the effect pattern to be finally fixedly displayed (mainly stopped) on the display screen 70 in association with the stopped display of the first special pattern (or the second special pattern).

Next, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not a reach effect needs to be produced in conjunction with the current display of the special symbol change, based on the setting information for the special symbol change pattern included in the received change start command (step S1632). If it determines that a reach effect does not need to be produced (step S1632: NO), it sets a change effect pattern for a no-reach effect (step S1633). For example, it reads one of the change effect patterns corresponding to the effect random number obtained in the processing of step S161 from a no-reach change effect pattern selection table in which multiple types of no-reach change effect patterns are associated with each special symbol change pattern, and sets information indicating that change effect pattern in the sub-RAM 93.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a reach effect is necessary (step S1632: YES), it sets a reach effect variable presentation pattern (step S1634). For example, it reads one of the variable presentation patterns corresponding to the presentation random number obtained in the processing of step S161 from a reach effect variable presentation pattern selection table in which multiple reach effect variable presentation patterns are associated with each combination of the special symbol determination result and the special symbol variable presentation pattern, and sets information indicating that variable presentation pattern in the sub-RAM 93.

By performing the processing of step S1633 or step S1634, it is determined what variation pattern the display symbols will use, which reach effect will be used if a reach effect is to be performed, and how the reach effect will be developed if the reach effect is to be developed.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a variable performance start command instructing the start of a variable performance using the variable performance pattern set in the processing of step S1633 (or the processing of step S1634) is sent from the sub-control board 90 to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120), thereby realizing a variable performance including the display of a variable performance pattern.

[Preview effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Fig. 46 is a detailed flowchart of the preview effect pattern setting process in step S164 of Fig. 44. Following the variable effect pattern setting process in step S163, the sub-CPU 91 executes a series of preview effect pattern setting processes exemplified in Fig. 46. That is, first, a focus effect pattern setting process is executed to set effect patterns for various focus effects to be executed in the pre-read target variation (the variation) (step S165). This focus effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 47.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 sets presentation patterns for other preview presentations, such as step-up previews, dialogue previews (see Figure 23 (D)), and cut-ins (see Figure 23 (L)) (step S168). Note that the process for setting presentation patterns for these preview presentations can be performed in the same manner as in the past, and therefore detailed explanations will be omitted here.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 executes the oscillation effect pattern setting process (step S169) to set the effect patterns for the various oscillation effects executed in the pre-read target fluctuations described above with reference to FIG. 23. This oscillation effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 48.

[Attention-grabbing performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Fig. 47 is a detailed flowchart of the attention effect pattern setting process in step S165 of Fig. 46. Following the process of step S163 of Fig. 44, the sub-CPU 91 executes a series of attention effect pattern setting processes exemplified in Fig. 47. Note that the various attention effects described above based on Fig. 9 etc. are executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, so here we will explain a series of processes related to the attention effect that is executed by the sub-CPU 91 when a variation start command notifying that the variable display of the first special symbol will start in the normal gaming state is received from the main control board 80.

The sub-CPU 91 first determines whether or not the display of the first special symbol will progress to an SPSP reach during the upcoming display of the first special symbol, based on the setting information for the variable presentation pattern set in the sub-RAM 93 by the variable presentation pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. 44 (step S1651). Here, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the display will not progress to an SPSP reach (step S1651: NO), processing proceeds to step S168 of FIG. 46 without executing the processing of step S1652 described below.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the game will progress to an SPSP reach (step S1651: YES), it determines whether the game will progress directly to an SPSP reach (step S1652). That is, it determines whether the game will progress directly to an SPSP reach, without going through a normal reach (see Figure 8 (L)) or an SP reach (see Figure 8 (O)), by going through the reach establishment prompting effect of Figure 9 (A) or the reach establishment effect of Figure 9 (B) described above. This determination process of step S1652 can be executed based on the setting information for the variable presentation pattern set in the sub-RAM 93, just like the determination process of step S1651 described above.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the game will not progress directly to an SPSP reach (step S1652: NO), i.e., if the game will progress to an SPSP reach via a normal reach or an SP reach, it will not execute the reach symbol attention effect described above based on Figure 9 (C) etc., and will therefore perform the processing of step S1655 described below without executing the processing of step S1653.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the game will progress directly to an SPSP reach (step S1652: YES), it determines whether the reach symbol is an odd number symbol or not based on the setting information for the variable presentation pattern set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1653). Here, if it determines that the reach symbol is not an odd number symbol (step S1653: NO), the reach symbol attention presentation described above will not be executed based on Figure 9 (C) etc., and therefore the process of step S1655 described below is performed without executing the process of step S1654 described below.

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the reach symbol is an odd symbol (step S1653: YES), it sets the reach symbol attention effect setting information of FIG. 9(C) including information indicating the type of reach symbol to be focused on (here, any odd symbol) in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1654). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a variable effect start command including this reach symbol attention effect setting information is sent to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120), and the reach symbol attention effect described above is executed based on FIGS. 13(G) to (I), etc.

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 executes the processing of step S1654, if it determines that the game will not progress directly to an SPSP reach (step S1652: NO), or if it determines that the reach symbol is not an odd number symbol (step S1653: NO), it executes the following processing to select whether to display the reach symbol in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas during the SPSP reach, as shown in Figure 9 (E), or to display a background image representing a minimal reach symbol, as shown in Figure 9 (L).

That is, the sub-CPU 91 acquires a symbol display mode selection random number for selecting the display mode of the reach symbol displayed during the SPSP reach (i.e., the display of FIG. 9(E) or the display of FIG. 9(L)) and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 (step S1655). Next, the sub-CPU 91 reads from the sub-ROM 92 the reach symbol display mode selection table to be referenced when selecting the display mode of the reach symbol and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 (step S1656), and executes the reach symbol display mode selection process (step S1657).

Although not shown in the figure, the reach symbol display mode selection table correlates the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the display mode of the reach symbol during an SPSP reach, and the random number value to be compared with the symbol display mode selection random number. Note that the display mode of the reach symbol during an SPSP reach here is either the first display mode or the second display mode. The first display mode is the display mode of the reach symbol when two reach symbols are displayed in reduced size in the upper left and right areas, as shown in Figure 11 (C), for example, and the second display mode is the display mode of the extremely small reach symbol when a background image representing an extremely small reach symbol is displayed, as shown in Figure 14 (C), for example.

In the processing of step S1657 above, the sub-CPU 91 first identifies the result of the current first special symbol determination by the main CPU 81 and the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected by the main CPU 81 based on the analysis result of the variation start command in step S162 of FIG. 44. Then, based on whether the pattern display mode selection random number obtained in the processing of step S1655 above matches the random number value associated with the first display mode or the random number value associated with the second display mode in the reach symbol display mode selection table for the combination of the determined first special symbol determination result and the determined variation pattern of the first special symbol, the sub-CPU 91 selects either the first display mode or the second display mode as the display mode of the reach symbol during the SPSP reach.

Although not shown in the figure, in the reach symbol display mode selection table, the second display mode is associated with more random number values than the first display mode for the "jackpot" determination result of the first special symbol determination. Conversely, the first display mode is associated with more random number values than the second display mode for the "miss" determination result of the first special symbol determination. Therefore, when the reach symbol display mode selection table is referenced to select the reach symbol display mode during an SPSP reach, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the reach symbol is displayed in the second display mode (for example, when the reach symbol is displayed as a minimal reach symbol, as in Figure 14(C)) than when the reach symbol is displayed in the first display mode (for example, when the reach symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas, as in Figure 11(C)). This is as described above with reference to Figure 19.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 47, following the processing of step S1657 above, the sub-CPU 91 sets setting information for the SPSP reach-in reach symbol display effect in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1658). This setting information for the SPSP reach-in reach symbol display effect includes type information indicating the type of reach symbol displayed during the SPSP reach, and selection information for whether the reach symbol will be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode (information indicating the result of the selection processing of step S1657). By transmitting a variable effect start command including this setting information for the SPSP reach-in reach symbol display effect to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120), the reach symbol will be displayed in either the first display mode (as shown in FIG. 11(C)) during the SPSP reach, or the reach symbol will be displayed in the second display mode (as shown in FIG. 14(C)) during the SPSP reach.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to display reach symbols in the upper left and right areas during an SPSP reach, based on the setting information set in the sub-RAM 93 by the processing of step S1658 (step S1659). In other words, it determines whether or not to display reach symbols in the first display mode during an SPSP reach. Here, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that reach symbols will be displayed in the upper left and right areas (step S1659: YES), it executes the following processing to control the execution of the first possibility suggestion effect described above based on Figures 9 (H) and 11 (E).

That is, the sub-CPU 91 acquires the first possibility suggestion effect random number and stores it in a specified area of the sub-RAM 93 (step S1660). Specifically, for the first possibility suggestion effect random number, which is updated appropriately each time the random number update process is performed in the sub-control board 90, the value at the time the current fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 80 is acquired and stored in the sub-RAM 93 as the first possibility suggestion effect random number. Then, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether to execute the first possibility suggestion effect based on, for example, whether the acquired first possibility suggestion effect random number matches any of multiple random number values stored in the sub-ROM 92 (which are compared with the first possibility suggestion effect random number) (step S1661).

Then, based on the result of the execution determination process of step S1661, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the first possibility suggestion effect (step S1662). If it determines that the first possibility suggestion effect should be executed (step S1662: YES), the sub-CPU 91 executes the following process. That is, as described above with reference to FIG. 9 (H) and FIG. 11 (E), in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, two types of possibility suggestion characters are provided for display by the first possibility suggestion effect: "CHANCE" and "VERY GOOD CHANCE." Therefore, the sub-CPU 91 executes a first possibility suggestion effect pattern selection process, which selects one of these two types of possibility suggestion characters, for example, by a lottery process using random numbers (step S1663). Information indicating the selection result of step S1663 is then set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the first possibility suggestion effect (step S1664).

In this way, the setting information for the first possibility suggestion effect set in a specified area of the sub-RAM 93 is included in the variable effect start command and sent to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command sending process of step S32 described above (see Figure 37). In response, the image and sound control CPU 101 and lamp CPU 121 execute the necessary effect control based on the setting information for the first possibility suggestion effect included in the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, thereby realizing the first possibility suggestion effect as shown in Figure 11 (E).

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the reach symbol will not be displayed in the upper left and right areas (step S1659: NO), it executes the following processing to control the execution of the second possibility suggestion effect described above based on Figures 9 (P) and 14 (G).

That is, the sub-CPU 91 acquires the second possibility suggestion effect random number and stores it in a specified area of the sub-RAM 93 (step S1666). Specifically, for the second possibility suggestion effect random number, which is updated appropriately each time the random number update process is performed in the sub-control board 90, the value at the time the current fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 80 is acquired and stored in the sub-RAM 93 as the second possibility suggestion effect random number. Then, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether to execute the second possibility suggestion effect based on, for example, whether the acquired second possibility suggestion effect random number matches any of multiple random number values stored in the sub-ROM 92 (which are compared with the second possibility suggestion effect random number) (step S1667).

Then, based on the result of the execution determination process of step S1667, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute a second possibility suggestion effect (step S1668). If it determines that a second possibility suggestion effect should be executed (step S1668: YES), the sub-CPU 91 executes the following process. That is, as described above with reference to FIG. 9(H) and FIG. 14(G), the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment provides only one display pattern for the second possibility suggestion effect: a band-shaped image representing the word "SUPER" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 70, and a band-shaped image representing the word "CHANCE!" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 70. Therefore, the sub-CPU 91 executes a second possibility suggestion effect pattern selection process that definitively selects this one effect pattern, for example, by a lottery process using random numbers (step S1669), and sets information indicating the selection result of step S1669 in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 as setting information for the second possibility suggestion effect (step S1670).

In this way, the setting information for the second possibility suggestion effect set in a specified area of the sub-RAM 93 is included in the variable effect start command and sent to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command sending process of step S32 described above (see Figure 37). In response, the image and sound control CPU 101 and lamp CPU 121 execute the necessary effect control based on the setting information for the second possibility suggestion effect included in the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, thereby realizing the second possibility suggestion effect as shown in Figure 14 (G).

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 executes the processing of step S1664, executes the processing of step S1670, determines not to execute the first possibility suggestion effect (step S1662: NO), or determines not to execute the second possibility suggestion effect (step S1668: NO), it determines whether the result of the current first special pattern determination is a "jackpot" based on the analysis result of step S162 of FIG. 44 (step S1671). Here, if it determines that the result of the current first special pattern determination is a "jackpot" (step S1671: YES), it sets the setting information for the above-mentioned doublet effect pattern attention effect in the sub-RAM 93 based on FIG. 9 (R), FIGS. 15 (B) to (E), and FIGS. 16 (G) to (H) (step S1672).

This setting information for the double-digit effect symbol attention effect includes type information indicating the type of the three effect symbols that represent the double-digits displayed in the winning notification effect, and display mode information indicating whether the display mode of the reach symbol during the SPSP reach is the first display mode or the second display mode. This information is included in the variable effect start command and transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process of step S32 described above (see FIG. 37). In response, the image and sound control CPU 101 and lamp CPU 121 execute the necessary effect control based on the setting information for the double-digit effect symbol attention effect included in the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, thereby realizing the double-digit effect symbol attention effect as illustrated in FIGS. 15(B)-(E) and 16(G)-(H).

[Swing performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Fig. 48 is a detailed flowchart of the swing effect pattern setting process in step S169 of Fig. 46. The sub-CPU 91 executes a series of swing effect pattern setting processes exemplified in Fig. 48 following the process of step S168 of Fig. 46 in order to execute and control various swing effects executed in the above-mentioned pre-read target fluctuation (the fluctuation) based on Figs.

The sub-CPU 91 first obtains a swing effect random number and stores it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1691). This swing effect random number is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub-CPU 91 obtains and stores the count value at the time when it receives a swing start command from the main control board 80 as the swing effect random number.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 performs a process for determining whether to execute the above-described operation-incompatible shaking effect at the start of fluctuation based on FIG. 23(B) etc. (step S1692). Specifically, for example, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether to execute the operation-incompatible shaking effect at the start of fluctuation based on whether the shaking effect random number acquired by the process of step S1691 matches any of multiple random number values stored in the sub-ROM 92 (to be compared with the shaking effect random number).

Here, if the result of the determination process in step S1692 is to execute the operation-incompatible shaking effect at the start of fluctuation (step S1693: YES), setting information for the operation-incompatible shaking effect at the start of fluctuation is set in sub-RAM 93 (step S1694). This setting information for the operation-incompatible shaking effect at the start of fluctuation includes information indicating the shaking pattern of robot-type gimmick 15, which involves shaking robot-type gimmick 15 at high speed for two seconds (see Figures 23(B) and 24).

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 has executed the processing of step S1694 above, or if the result of the determination processing of step S1692 above is that the non-operation-compatible shaking effect at the start of fluctuation will not be executed (step S1693: NO), it determines whether or not a line preview (see FIG. 23(D)) will be executed (step S1695), for example, based on the setting information stored in the sub-RAM 93 by the setting processing of step S168 of FIG. 46.

Here, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a line preview should be executed (step S1695: YES), it performs a pre-reach operation corresponding shaking effect execution determination process (step S1696) to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reach operation corresponding shaking effect described above based on FIG. 23(E) etc. Specifically, it determines whether or not to execute the pre-reach operation corresponding shaking effect based on, for example, whether or not the shaking effect random number acquired by the process of step S1691 matches any of multiple random number values stored in the sub-ROM 92 (which are compared with the shaking effect random number). Note that the multiple random number values referenced in the process of step S1696 are different from the multiple random number values referenced in the process of step S1692.

Here, if the result of the determination process in step S1696 above is to execute a pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect (step S1697: YES), setting information for the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect is set in sub-RAM 93 (step S1698). This setting information for the pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect includes information indicating the shaking pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15, which involves shaking the robot-type gimmick 15 at a medium speed for 3.5 seconds (see Figures 23(E) and 24).

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 executes the processing of step S1698 above, if it determines that a line preview will not be executed (step S1695: NO), or if the result of the determination processing of step S1696 above is that a pre-reach operation-responsive shaking effect will not be executed (step S1697: NO), it determines whether or not the game will develop into an SP reach (step S1699), for example, based on information indicating the variable effect pattern stored in the sub-RAM 93 by the variable effect pattern setting processing of step S163 of FIG. 44.

Here, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the game will progress to an SP reach (step S1699: YES), it performs an execution determination process for the SP reach operation-incompatible shaking effect (step S1700) to determine whether or not to execute the SP reach operation-incompatible shaking effect described above based on FIG. 23 (I) and other figures. Specifically, it determines whether or not to execute the pre-reach operation-compatible shaking effect based on, for example, whether the shaking effect random number acquired by the processing of step S1691 matches any of multiple random number values stored in the sub-ROM 92 (to be compared with the shaking effect random number). Note that the multiple random number values referenced in the processing of step S1700 are different from the multiple random number values referenced in the processing of step S1692 and the multiple random number values referenced in the processing of step S1696.

Here, if the result of the determination process in step S1700 above is to execute an operation-incompatible shaking effect during SP reach (step S1701: YES), setting information for the operation-incompatible shaking effect during SP reach is set in sub-RAM 93 (step S1702). This setting information for the operation-incompatible shaking effect during SP reach includes information indicating the shaking pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15, which involves shaking the robot-type gimmick 15 at a low speed for 4.5 seconds (see Figures 23(I) and 24).

Next, if the sub-CPU 91 executes the processing of step S1702 above, determines that the game will not progress to an SP Reach (step S1699: NO), or if the result of the determination processing of step S1700 above is that the non-operation-compatible shaking effect will not be executed during the SP Reach (step S1701: NO), it determines whether the game will progress to an SP SP Reach (step S1703), for example, based on information indicating the variable effect pattern stored in the sub-RAM 93 by the variable effect pattern setting processing in step S163 of FIG. 44.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the game will progress to an SPSP reach (step S1703: YES), it determines whether the result of the current first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" (step S1704), for example, based on the analysis result of step S162 in FIG. 44. Here, the win suggestion oscillation effect described above with reference to FIG. 23(O) is always executed when a win notification effect is executed in an SPSP reach, even if the player does not operate the second effect button 36. Therefore, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the result of the current first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" (step S1704: YES), it sets setting information for the win suggestion oscillation effect in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1705). This setting information for the win suggestion oscillation effect includes information indicating the oscillation pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15, which involves oscillating the robot-type gimmick 15 at an ultra-slow speed for 10 seconds (see FIGS. 23(O) and 24).

The setting information set in the sub-RAM 93 in the processing of step S1694, the setting information set in the sub-RAM 93 in the processing of step S1698, the setting information set in the sub-RAM 93 in the processing of step S1702, and the setting information set in the sub-RAM 93 in the processing of step S1705 are included in a variable effect start command and transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command transmission processing of step S32 described above (see FIG. 37). In response, the lamp CPU 121 of the lamp control board 120 controls the drive of the robot-type gimmick swing motor 154 based on the setting information included in the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, thereby realizing each of the swing effects described above based on FIGS. 23, 24, etc.

Here, the execution determination process of step S1692, the execution determination process of step S1696, and the execution determination process of step S1700 have been described using an example in which the execution determination process is performed by referencing multiple different random number values stored in sub-ROM 92. However, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if the result of the first special pattern determination performed at the start of the pre-read target variation is a "jackpot," the multiple random number values referenced will differ depending on the type of jackpot.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 6(B), two types of jackpots are prepared for the first special symbol determination in the normal game state: "3R Probable Variable A" and "3R Normal." In relation to this, for example, if the result of the current first special symbol determination is "3R Normal," the sub-CPU 91 determines in step S1692 whether the oscillation effect random number obtained in step S1691 matches any of the X (e.g., 50) random number values stored in the sub-ROM 92. On the other hand, if the result of the current first special symbol determination is "3R Probable Variable A," the sub-CPU 91 determines in step S1692 whether the oscillation effect random number obtained in step S1691 matches any of the Y (e.g., 80) random number values stored in the sub-ROM 92.

In this way, when the result of the first special symbol determination in normal game mode is a jackpot and the type of jackpot is "3R Probable A," more random numbers are used in the execution determination process than when it is "3R Normal." Therefore, in the processing of step S1692 above, it is more likely to be determined that the non-operation-compatible shaking effect will be executed when it is "3R Probable A" than when it is "3R Normal."

As is clear from the explanation so far, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the number of random numbers referenced in the case of "3R Probable A" is greater than the number of random numbers referenced in the case of "3R Normal". Therefore, as described above with reference to Figure 24, the operation-incompatible shaking effect at the start of fluctuation, the operation-compatible shaking effect before a reach, and the operation-incompatible shaking effect during an SP reach are each more likely to be executed in the case of a probability jackpot than in the case of a normal jackpot.

[Interrupt Processing by the Image and Sound Control Board 100]
Next, the interrupt processing executed in the image and sound control board 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 49. Fig. 49 is a flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing executed in the image and sound control board 100. During normal operation, except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or off, the image and sound control board 100 repeatedly executes the series of processes illustrated in Fig. 49 every fixed time (for example, 33 milliseconds).

First, the image and sound control CPU 101 executes image display control processing to control image display on the display screen 70 based on commands received from the sub-control board 90 (step S71). This image display control processing will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 50.

Following the processing of step S71, the image and sound control CPU 101 executes a sound effect output control process to output various sound effects from the speaker 38 either synchronously or asynchronously with the screen display on the display screen 70 (step S72).

Following the processing of step S72, the image and sound control CPU 101 executes a data transmission control process (step S73). Specifically, data related to the image and sound control performed by the image and sound control board 100 is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. In response, the sub-control board 90 transfers the data received from the image and sound control board 100 to the lamp control board 120. This controls the frame lamps 37, panel lamps 5, movable decorative members 14, etc. so as to synchronize with the effects performed by the display screen 70 and speakers 38.

[Image display control processing by the image and sound control board 100]
Fig. 50 is a detailed flowchart of the image display control process in step S71 of Fig. 49. The image and sound control CPU 101 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the sub-control board 90 has been received (step S711). If it is determined that a command has not been received (step S711: NO), the process proceeds to step S72.

On the other hand, if the image and sound control CPU 101 determines that it has received a command from the sub-control board 90 (step S711: YES), it sets the setting information included in the command in the control RAM 103 (step S712). Then, based on the setting information set in the control RAM 103, it determines how the effect image should be displayed on the display screen 70, creates a display list for controlling the drawing processing of the VDP 104, stores it in a predetermined area of the control RAM 103 (step S713), and sets this display list in the display list storage area of the VRAM 106 (step S714). The VDP 104 executes the drawing processing based on the display list set in this display list storage area, thereby realizing the effect display instructed by the sub-control board 90.

[Interrupt Processing by Lamp Control Board 120]
Next, the interrupt processing executed in the lamp control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 51. Here, Fig. 51 is a flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing executed in the lamp control board 120. During normal operation, excluding special cases such as when the power is turned on or off, the lamp control board 120 repeatedly executes the series of processes illustrated in Fig. 51 at regular intervals based on commands from the sub-control board 90 and data related to image and sound control transmitted from the image and sound control board 100 via the sub-control board 90.

The lamp CPU 121 of the lamp control board 120 first determines whether power has been applied to the lamp control board 120 (step S801). This determination of whether power has been applied can be performed by any process that can determine whether power has been applied to the lamp control board 120. In this embodiment, however, the lamp CPU 121 determines whether power has been applied to the lamp control board 120 based on whether calculation processing has begun when controlling the operation of the frame lamp 37, panel lamp 5, movable decorative member 14, robot-type gimmick 15, effect display 125, effect first special symbol hold display 126, effect second special symbol hold display 127, etc. If it is determined that power has not been applied to the lamp control board 120 (step S801: NO), i.e., if it is not time to start powering the lamp control board 120, the process proceeds to step S803 without performing step S802.

On the other hand, if the lamp CPU 121 determines that power has been applied to the lamp control board 120 (step S801: YES), i.e., if it is time to start applying power to the lamp control board 120, it starts a preemptive speed-change swing effect using the robot gimmick 15 (step S802). As described above with reference to Figures 21 to 25, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to execute multiple swing effects that cause the robot gimmick 15 to swing in various swing patterns. However, the preemptive speed-change swing effect swings the robot gimmick 15 in a swing pattern that is different from these multiple swing effects, and is different from the multiple swing effects in that it is only performed when power is applied to the lamp control board 120, not during the variable display of special symbols. Additionally, the multiple rocking effects here are realized by the lamp CPU 121 performing the necessary performance control based on the fluctuation start command sent from the sub-control board 90, but the advance speed change rocking effect is a rocking effect that is executed independently by the lamp CPU 121, regardless of the command from the sub-control board 90, and is therefore different from the multiple rocking effects described above.

As described above, for example, in the case of a pre-swing effect (see Figure 22 (B)), the robot-type gimmick 15 is swayed at ultra-high speed for 1 second, and for example, in the case of a swing effect that does not support operation during an SP reach (see Figure 23 (I)), the robot-type gimmick 15 is swayed at a slow speed for 4.5 seconds. In contrast, in the advance speed change swing effect, the robot-type gimmick 15 is swung in a composite swing pattern that combines the swing pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 in the advance swing effect (see FIG. 22(B)), the swing pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 in the operation-incompatible swing effect at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 23(B)), the swing pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 in the operation-compatible swing effect before reach (see FIG. 23(E)), the swing pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 in the operation-incompatible swing effect during SP reach (see FIG. 23(I)), and the swing pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 in the win suggestion swing effect (see FIG. 23(O)).

In other words, in the pre-emptive speed-changing swing effect, the swing effect of the robot-type gimmick 15 is performed in such a way that it appears as if a pre-emptive swing effect, a swing effect that does not correspond to an operation at the start of fluctuation, a swing effect that corresponds to an operation before a reach, a swing effect that does not correspond to an operation during an SP reach, and a swing effect that suggests a win are all being executed in succession, and since the swing speed (swing speed) of the robot-type gimmick 15 differs from one another in these multiple swing effects, when the pre-emptive speed-changing swing effect is performed, it appears as if the swing speed of the robot-type gimmick 15 is changing several times during the process.

Although not shown in the figure, the lamp ROM 122 stores rocking pattern data for the robot-type gimmick 15 corresponding to each of the above multiple rocking effects, as well as rocking pattern data specifically for the anticipatory shift rocking effect. In contrast, if the lamp CPU 121 determines that power has been applied to the lamp control board 120 (step S801: YES), in the processing of step S802, it reads out the rocking pattern data specifically for the anticipatory shift rocking effect from the rocking pattern data for the robot-type gimmick 15 stored in the lamp ROM 122 into the lamp RAM 123, and starts drive control of the robot-type gimmick rocking motor 154 (see Figure 5).

Next, if the lamp CPU 121 executes the processing of step S802 above, or if it determines that it is not time to start power supply (step S801: NO), it determines whether it has received an operation check start command from the sub-control board 90 (step S803). This operation check start command is a command that the sub-CPU 91 sends to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started. The operation check start command sent to the lamp control board 120 is a command that instructs the execution of an operation check of the movable decorative member 14, and is not sent repeatedly like the variable effect start command, but is a command that is sent only once immediately after power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started.

If the lamp CPU 121 determines that it has received an operation check start command from the sub-control board 90 (step S803: YES), it starts the movable decorative element control process (step S804). Specifically, it reads the operation pattern data for the movable decorative element 14 from the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 into the lamp RAM 123 and starts drive control of the movable decorative element motor 141 (see Figure 5) that operates the movable decorative element 14. This allows for an operation check to determine whether the movable decorative element 14 is operating normally.

Next, if the lamp CPU 121 executes the processing of step S805, or if it determines that it has not received an operation check start command (step S803: NO), it determines whether the operation check time has elapsed (step S805). Specifically, when the lamp CPU 121 executes the processing of step S804, it counts the time that has elapsed since that execution timing, and determines whether the operation check time has elapsed based on whether the counted elapsed time exceeds the operation check time stored in the lamp ROM 122.

Here, if the lamp CPU 121 determines that the operation confirmation time has elapsed (step S805: YES), it determines whether the operation confirmation of the movable decorative member 14 has been completed successfully (step S806).

In this embodiment, the movable decorative member 14 is normally positioned in the initial position illustrated in Figure 2. In contrast, when a performance is performed to operate the movable decorative member 14, the movable decorative member 14 drops from the initial position to an operating position that covers most of the display screen 70, and then the driving force from the movable decorative member motor 141 causes the movable decorative member 14 to return to its initial position. In contrast, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with an initial position detection sensor that detects that the movable decorative member 14 is positioned in the initial position, and an operating position detection sensor that detects that the movable decorative member 14 is positioned in the operating position.

In the processing of step S806, the lamp CPU 121 determines whether the operation check of the movable decorative member 14 has been completed successfully, for example, based on whether the operation position detection sensor detects that the movable decorative member 14 is placed in the operating position when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the movable decorative member control processing of step S804, and whether the initial position detection sensor detects that the movable decorative member 14 is placed in the initial position when the operation check time has elapsed.

Here, if the lamp CPU 121 determines that the operation check of the movable decorative member 14 has been completed successfully (step S806: YES), it ends the advance shift swing effect that began in the processing of step S802 above (step S807). Conversely, if it determines that the operation check of the movable decorative member 14 has not been completed successfully (step S806: NO), it executes a movable decorative member error notification (step S808). Specifically, it sends a command to the sub-control board 90 notifying that the operation check of the movable decorative member 14 has not been completed successfully, and the sub-CPU 91 that receives this command issues a movable decorative member error notification using the display screen 70 and speaker 35.

As is clear from the explanation so far, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when power is first applied to the lamp control board 120, the robot-type gimmick 15 first starts a pre-emptive speed-change rocking effect, and then, after a short delay, the movable decorative member 14 starts operating to confirm its operation. Therefore, staff at the hall where the gaming machine 1 is installed can visually confirm whether the robot-type gimmick 15 and movable decorative member 14 are operating normally.

Note that power to the gaming machine 1 (lamp control board 120) does not necessarily begin when a hall staff member turns on the so-called island power supply while the gaming machine 1 is powered on before the opening of the hall in which the gaming machine 1 is installed. For example, lightning may strike while a player is playing on the gaming machine 1, temporarily interrupting the power supply to the gaming machine 1, and then power may be restored and power may begin (restart) to the gaming machine 1 (lamp control board 120).

In contrast, with the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, even when power is turned on (restarted) while the player is playing, as described above, the robot-type gimmick 15 starts a pre-scheduled speed-change swing effect before the operation of the movable decorative member 14 is confirmed, allowing the player to enjoy watching the robot-type gimmick 15 while the operation of the movable decorative member 14 is being confirmed.

In addition, when the operation of the movable decorative member 14 is confirmed, the operation of the display screen 70 is also confirmed, and information that is not directly related to the game is displayed on the display screen 70. In contrast, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the advance speed change swing effect is performed while such information that is not directly related to the game is displayed on the display screen 70, making it possible to guide the player's gaze to the robot-type gimmick 15, and allowing the player to enjoy themselves even while the operation of the gaming machine 1 is being confirmed, which is not at all enjoyable for the player.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 51, when the lamp CPU 121 executes the processing of step S807, when it executes the processing of step S808, or when it determines that the operation confirmation time has not elapsed (step S805: NO), it determines whether or not the specified time has elapsed (step S809). Specifically, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the specified time required for the anticipatory speed change swing effect by the robot-type gimmick 15 is stored in the lamp ROM 122, and the lamp CPU 121 determines whether or not the specified time has elapsed based on whether or not the elapsed time since the anticipatory speed change swing effect was started by the processing of step S802 has exceeded the specified time.

If the lamp CPU 121 determines that the specified time has elapsed (step S809: YES), it determines whether the robot-type gimmick 15 is operating based on whether the movable decorative element motor 141 is operating (step S810). If it determines that the robot-type gimmick 15 is operating (step S810: YES), it returns the robot-type gimmick 15 to its initial position (see Figure 21 (A)) and ends the advance speed change swing effect that began in step S802 (step S811).

Next, if the lamp CPU 121 executes the processing of step S811, determines that the specified time has not elapsed (step S809: NO), or determines that the robot-type gimmick 15 is not operating (step S810: NO), it executes a data reception process to receive data related to image and sound control transmitted from the image and sound control board 100 via the sub-control board 90 (step S812). Based on the data related to image and sound control received by the processing of step S812, the lamp CPU 121 controls the frame lamp 37, panel lamp 5, movable decorative member 14, robot-type gimmick 15, etc., so as to synchronize with the effects produced by the display screen 70 and speaker 38.

Following the processing of step S812, the lamp CPU 121 determines whether it has received a variable effect start command transmitted from the sub-control board 90 (step S813). If it determines that it has received a variable effect start command (step S813: YES), it reads from the lamp ROM 122 the light-emitting pattern data corresponding to the setting information contained in the received variable effect start command and sets it in the lamp RAM 123, thereby setting the light-emitting patterns of the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the LEDs built into the movable decorative member 14, etc. (step S814). The lamp CPU 121 then begins light-emitting control of each light-emitting means based on the set light-emitting pattern data (step S815). At this time, it may also set the light-emitting pattern of the LED built into the robot-type gimmick 15 to perform a light-emitting effect using the robot-type gimmick 15.

Following the processing of step S815, the lamp CPU 121 determines whether or not an instruction to perform a special effect that operates the movable decorative member 14 during this pattern change has been issued based on the setting information included in the received variable effect start command (step S816). If it is determined that an instruction to perform a special effect has been issued (step S816: YES), the operation pattern data corresponding to the setting information included in the received variable effect start command is read from the lamp ROM 122 and set in the lamp RAM 123, thereby setting the operation pattern of the movable decorative member 14 (step S817).

When the lamp CPU 121 executes the processing of step S817 above, or when it determines that no instruction to perform a special effect has been given (step S816: NO), it determines whether or not an instruction to perform a swing effect that swings the robot-type gimmick 15 during the current symbol change has been given based on the setting information included in the received swing effect start command (step S818). If it determines that an instruction to perform a swing effect has been given (step S818: YES), it reads out from the lamp ROM 122 the swing pattern data corresponding to the setting information included in the received swing effect start command and sets it in the lamp RAM 123, thereby setting the swing pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 (step S819).

When the lamp CPU 121 executes the processing of step S819, determines that no instruction to execute a swinging effect has been issued (step S818: NO), or determines that no command to start a swinging effect has been received (step S813: NO), it determines whether or not the movement pattern of the movable decorative element 14 has been set based on whether or not the movement pattern data of the movable decorative element 14 has been set in the lamp RAM 123 (step S821).

Here, if the lamp CPU 121 determines that the operation pattern of the movable decorative member 14 has been set (step S821: YES), it determines whether it is time for the movable decorative member 14 to start operating (step S822), for example, based on the data related to image and sound control received by the data reception process of step S812. Here, if it determines that it is time for the movable decorative member 14 to start operating (step S822: YES), it executes movable decorative member control processing (drive control of the movable decorative member motor 141) (step S823). This executes a reel performance using the movable decorative member 14.

When the lamp CPU 121 executes the processing of step S823, determines that the movement pattern of the movable decorative member 14 has not been set (step S821: NO), or determines that it is not time for the movable decorative member 14 to start moving (step S822: NO), it determines whether the movement pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 has been set based on whether the movement pattern data of the robot-type gimmick 15 has been set in the lamp RAM 123 (step S824).

Here, if the lamp CPU 121 determines that a swing pattern for the robot gimmick 15 has been set (step S824: YES), it determines whether it is time to start swinging the robot gimmick 15 (step S825), for example, based on the data related to image and sound control received by the data reception process of step S812. Here, if it determines that it is time to start swinging the robot gimmick 15 (step S825: YES), it starts the robot gimmick control process (drive control of the robot gimmick swing motor 154) (step S826). This executes a swing effect using the robot gimmick 15.

When the lamp CPU 121 executes the processing of step S826, determines that the swing pattern of the robot-type gimmick 15 has not been set (step S824: NO), or determines that it is not time for the robot-type gimmick 15 to start swinging (step S825: NO), it determines whether it has received a variable performance end command transmitted from the sub-control board 90 (step S827). If it determines that the variable performance end command has been received (step S827: YES), it executes light emission control for a final performance that notifies the winner (step S828). Specifically, it reads light emission pattern data corresponding to the setting information contained in the received variable performance end command from the lamp ROM 122 and sets it in the lamp RAM 123, thereby setting the light emission patterns of the LEDs built into the frame lamp 37, panel lamp 5, movable decorative member 14, etc. Then, the lamp CPU 121 executes light emission control of each light-emitting means based on the set light emission pattern data until the final time has elapsed.

[others]
Below, inventions related to the embodiments disclosed in this specification are disclosed as reference inventions. Note that the parentheses added to each reference invention are added to make the reference invention easier to understand, and it goes without saying that the content of the reference invention is not limited to the content of the parentheses.

(Reference Invention 1)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is:
a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to a player (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 30: see FIG. 5);
a special symbol display control means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the processing of step S311 and step S315 in FIG. 30) that causes a special symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display 41) to variably display a special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) and then causes a special symbol indicating the result of the determination to be statically displayed;
a special game execution means (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes a big prize opening opening/closing control process exemplified in FIGS. 34 to 36) that executes the special game when a special symbol (for example, a big prize symbol X1 or a big prize symbol X2: see FIG. 6(B)) that indicates that the special game has been determined by the determination means to be executed is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display means;
A performance control means (e.g., a sub-CPU 91: see FIG. 5) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means
A performance pattern is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of the special pattern, and a performance pattern showing the result of the judgment is displayed in a stopped state in accordance with the stop display of the special pattern,
It is possible to execute an attention effect that draws attention to the effect pattern (for example, a reach pattern attention effect: see FIG. 9(C), FIG. 13(G) to (I)),
The performance symbols include a first performance symbol (for example, an even number symbol) and a second performance symbol (for example, an odd number symbol),
The performance control means
The feature of this system is that it is possible to execute the attention effect (for example, the reach pattern attention effect exemplified in Figures 13(G) to (I)) that draws attention to the second performance pattern (for example, an odd number pattern), while not executing the attention effect that draws attention to the first performance pattern (for example, an even number pattern) (for example, see Figure 9).

With the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1, a focus effect that draws attention to the second performance symbol may be executed, but a focus effect that draws attention to the first performance symbol is never executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the problem of a focus effect that draws attention to the first performance symbol and a focus effect that draws attention to the second performance symbol being executed together, thereby reducing the effect of drawing attention to the second performance symbol and thereby reducing interest, while still achieving a high performance effect by a focus effect that draws attention to the second performance symbol.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1,
The performance control means
When a reach is achieved by a performance pattern, a focus effect can be executed to draw attention to the second performance pattern (for example, an odd number pattern) (for example, the reach pattern focus effect of Figure 9(C) is executed following the reach achieved effect of Figure 9(B) which notifies the achievement of a reach by an odd number pattern), but a focus effect to draw attention to the first performance pattern (for example, an even number pattern) is not executed (for example, when the reach achieved effect of Figure 9(B) which notifies the achievement of a reach by an even number pattern is executed, the reach pattern focus effect of Figure 9(C) is not executed).

With the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2, when a reach is achieved using a performance symbol, a focus effect is executed that draws attention to the second performance symbol. This makes it possible to achieve a high performance effect through the synergistic effect of the effect that achieves a reach using the performance symbol and the focus effect that draws attention to the second performance symbol.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2,
The performance control means
When the reach effect is not being executed, it is possible to execute other attention effects (for example, the first effect pattern attention effect of Figure 8 (D) or the second effect pattern attention effect of Figure 8 (F)) that are different from the attention effect that draws attention to the second effect pattern.

However, in the configuration of Reference Invention 1-2 above, which executes a focus effect to draw attention to the second effect pattern when a reach is achieved using the effect pattern, it is possible to draw attention to the effect pattern (second effect pattern) when a reach is achieved, but it is not possible to draw attention to the effect pattern at other times, and there is a concern that the full effect of the effect displayed by the effect pattern may not be achieved.

In contrast, with the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 1-3, when a reach effect is not being executed, another attention effect (different from the attention effect that draws attention to the second effect symbol) may be executed. This allows attention to the effect symbol even when a reach effect is not being executed, and as a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect symbol that is displayed, and to obtain a sufficient effect.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3,
The performance control means
The other attention-grabbing effects are characterized in that they can be implemented in both a first performance pattern attention-grabbing effect (see, for example, Figures 8(D) and 12(D)) that draws attention to the first performance pattern (e.g., an even number pattern) and a second performance pattern attention-grabbing effect (see, for example, Figures 8(F) and 12(H)) that draws attention to the second performance pattern (e.g., an odd number pattern).

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is capable of executing both the first performance symbol attention effect and the second performance symbol attention effect, making it possible to execute a variety of other attention effects compared to configurations that can only execute one of the attention effects.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 or Reference Invention 1-4,
The performance control means
It is characterized in that it is possible to further execute another attention effect (for example, a double-digit attention effect: see Figure 9 (R), Figures 15 (D) to (E), Figures 16 (G) to (H)) that is different from both the attention effect that draws attention to the second performance pattern and the other attention effects.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 can further execute a focus effect that draws attention to the second performance symbol and a focus effect that is different from the other focus effects. Therefore, a higher performance effect can be achieved through the synergistic effect of the focus effect that draws attention to the second performance symbol, the other focus effects, and the other focus effects.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5,
The performance control means
When the determination means determines that the special game will be played, the other featured effect is executed (for example, when the winning notification effect of FIG. 9(S) is executed, the double-digit display pattern featured effect of FIG. 9(R) is executed), while when the determination means determines that the special game will not be played, the other featured effect is not executed (for example, when the losing notification effect of FIG. 9(J) is executed, the double-digit display pattern featured effect of FIG. 9(R) is not executed).

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-6, the attention effect that draws attention to the second effect symbol and the other attention effect that is different from the other attention effects are only executed when it is determined that a special game will be executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that a special game will be executed based on the execution of the other attention effect, and can enjoy playing the game while anticipating the execution of the other attention effect.

(Reference Invention 2)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is:
a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to a player (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 30: see FIG. 5);
special symbol display control means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the processing of steps S311 and S315 in FIG. 30) that causes a special symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display 41: see FIG. 5) to variably display a special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) and then statically display a special symbol that indicates the result of the determination;
a special game execution means (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes a big prize opening opening/closing control process exemplified in FIGS. 34 to 36) that executes the special game when a special symbol (for example, a big prize symbol X1 or a big prize symbol X2: see FIG. 6(B)) that indicates that the special game has been determined by the determination means to be executed is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display means;
A performance control means (e.g., a sub-CPU 91: see FIG. 5) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means
A performance pattern is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of the special pattern, and a performance pattern showing the result of the judgment is displayed in a stopped state in accordance with the stop display of the special pattern,
Prior to the winning notification effect (for example, see FIG. 9(S)) that notifies that the special game will be executed, it is possible to execute an expectation effect (for example, a post-reach effect that is started in response to the execution of the reach establishment effect of FIG. 9(B): see FIG. 9) that makes the player expect that the winning notification effect will be executed, and then execute an attention effect (for example, a double-digit effect pattern attention effect: see FIG. 9(R)) that draws the player's attention to the effect pattern that suggests that the special game will be executed,
After the expected performance is started, there are a first time when the performance symbols are displayed in a first display mode (for example, when the reach symbols are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas: see FIG. 9(E)), and a second time when the performance symbols are displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, when a background image showing a very small reach symbol is displayed: see FIG. 9(L)).
The second time is characterized in that the featured effect (for example, a double-digit featured effect: see Figure 9 (R)) is more likely to be executed than the first time (for example, see Figure 19).

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1, when the effect symbols are displayed in the second display mode, it is more likely that a special effect that draws attention to the effect symbols that suggest a special game will be played will be played when the effect symbols are displayed in the second display mode than when the effect symbols are displayed in the first display mode when the effect symbols are displayed in the first display mode. Therefore, by displaying the effect symbols in the second display mode, it is possible to effectively increase the player's sense of anticipation for the execution of the special effect and winning notification effect (and special game).

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1,
The display pattern of the second display mode (see, for example, Figure 14(C)) is characterized in that it is smaller than the display pattern of the first display mode (see, for example, Figure 16(F)).

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2, when a second effect pattern, which is smaller than the effect pattern of the first display mode, is displayed, it is easier to execute the desired effect than when the effect pattern of the first display mode is displayed, so the player can enjoy the expected effect while paying attention to the size of the effect pattern.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2,
The performance control means
It is possible to execute a possibility suggestion effect (see, for example, FIGS. 9(H) and 9(P)) that suggests that the winning notification effect may be executed,
The possibility suggestion effects are characterized by including a first possibility suggestion effect (see, for example, Figures 9 (E) and (H)) that is executed when the effect pattern is displayed in the first display mode, and a second possibility suggestion effect (see, for example, Figures 9 (L) and (P)) that is executed when the effect pattern is displayed in the second display mode.

However, in a configuration in which the featured effect is more likely to be executed when the effect symbols are displayed in the second display mode than when the effect symbols are displayed in the first display mode, there is a concern that displaying the effect symbols in the first display mode will lower the player's anticipation for the featured effect to be executed. In contrast, with the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 above, the first possibility suggestion effect may be executed when the effect symbols are displayed in the first display mode, so it is possible to prevent the problem of the player's anticipation for the featured effect to be executed by displaying the effect symbols in the first display mode from occurring, while still making the player look forward to the execution of (the featured effect and) the winning notification effect.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 above, a second possibility suggestion effect may be executed when the effect symbols are displayed in the second display mode. Therefore, the synergistic effect of the effect displaying the effect symbols in the second display mode and the second possibility suggestion effect can dramatically increase the player's anticipation for the execution of the featured effect and the winning notification effect.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3,
The performance control means
The first possibility suggestion effect is not executed when the effect pattern is displayed in the second display mode (for example, when a background image showing a very small reach pattern is displayed, the first possibility suggestion effect is not executed: see Figures 9 (L) and (H)), and the second possibility suggestion effect is not executed when the effect pattern is displayed in the first display mode (for example, when a reach pattern is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left and right areas, the second possibility suggestion effect is not executed: see Figures 9 (E) and (P)).

However, if, for example, both the first possibility suggestion effect and the second possibility suggestion effect can be executed when the effect pattern is displayed in the first display mode, and both the first possibility suggestion effect and the second possibility suggestion effect can be executed when the effect pattern is displayed in the second display mode, there is a concern that there will be too many effects and that this will actually reduce interest.

In contrast, with the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 above, when the effect symbol is displayed in the second display mode, the first possibility suggestion effect is not executed, and when the effect symbol is displayed in the first display mode, the second possibility suggestion effect is not executed. This makes it possible to execute highly entertaining effects while preventing the above-mentioned problem of excessive effects from occurring.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 or Reference Invention 2-4,
a reservation means (see, for example, FIG. 26) capable of reserving up to a predetermined number of the right to make the judgment;
a pre-determination means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the pre-determination process in step S211 or step S219 of FIG. 28) that performs a pre-determination as to whether or not the special game will be executed before the determination is made on the right reserved by the reservation means,
The performance control means
A reservation suggestion image (e.g., a reservation icon) is displayed to suggest that the right of judgment is reserved, and a change effect (e.g., an icon change effect) is executed to change the display mode of the reservation suggestion image being displayed based on the result of the advance judgment corresponding to the right of judgment;
When the change effect is executed, the possibility suggestion effect is executed with a higher probability than when the change effect is not executed (see, for example, FIG. 19).

With the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5, when a change effect is executed, there is a higher probability that a possibility suggestion effect will be executed compared to when a change effect is not executed. Therefore, by executing a change effect, it is possible to make the player expect that a possibility suggestion effect will be executed, and the synergistic effect between the change effect and the possibility suggestion effect can effectively increase the player's anticipation for the execution of a winning notification effect in the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the pending suggestion image.

(Reference Invention 3)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is:
A movable object for performance (for example, a robot-type gimmick 15: see Figures 1 and 21),
a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to a player (for example, the main CPU 81 for executing the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 30: see FIG. 5);
A special game execution means (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes a special game opening/closing control process exemplified in FIGS. 34 to 36) that executes the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A performance control means (e.g., a sub-CPU 91: see FIG. 5) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means
It is possible to execute a predetermined preceding performance (for example, a performance before the start of an SPSP reach: see FIGS. 22 and 23), a subsequent performance that can be executed after the preceding performance (for example, a performance after the start of an SPSP reach: see FIG. 23), and a swing performance that swings the performance movable body (for example, various swing performances exemplified in FIGS. 21 and 24).
The swing performance includes a first swing performance that swings the performance movable body during the preceding performance (for example, a pre-swing performance (see FIG. 22(B)), a swing performance that does not correspond to an operation at the time of fluctuation start (see FIG. 23(B)), a swing performance that corresponds to an operation before a reach (see FIG. 23(E)), and a swing performance that does not correspond to an operation during a SP reach (see FIG. 23(I))), and a second swing performance that swings the performance movable body during the following performance (for example, a winning suggestion swing performance: see FIG. 23(O)).
When the preceding performance is executed and then the following performance is executed, there are times when the second rocking performance is executed without executing the first rocking performance, and times when the first rocking performance is executed and then the second rocking performance is executed (see, for example, Figures 22 and 23).

With the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1, even if the first shaking effect is not executed during the preceding effect, the second shaking effect may be executed during the following effect. This prevents the player's anticipation for the second shaking effect being reduced due to the first shaking effect not being executed, while achieving a high performance effect through the synergistic effect of the first shaking effect and the second shaking effect.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1,
The performance control means
When the first rocking effect is executed during the preceding performance, the second rocking effect is executed during the following performance with a higher probability than when the first rocking effect is not executed during the preceding performance (see, for example, Figure 24).

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2, when the first shaking effect is executed, the second shaking effect is more likely to be executed during the following performance than when the first shaking effect is not executed. Therefore, by executing the first shaking effect during the preceding performance, it is possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for the second shaking effect to be executed during the following performance.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2,
The second swing time required from the start to the end of the second swing performance (e.g., 10 seconds: see Figure 24) is longer than the first swing time required from the start to the end of the first swing performance (e.g., 1 second, 2 seconds, 3.5 seconds, or 4.5 seconds: see Figure 24).

With the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3, the second time from the start to the end of the second shaking effect is longer than the first time from the start to the end of the first shaking effect. This makes it possible to execute a highly entertaining shaking effect while preventing problems such as the shaking effect becoming monotonous due to the first and second times being the same, resulting in a decrease in entertainment value.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is any one of the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-3,
The present invention is characterized in that during the preceding performance, the first rocking performance is more likely to be executed than the second rocking performance, and during the following performance, the second rocking performance is more likely to be executed than the first rocking performance (see, for example, Figures 22 and 23).

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4, the first shaking effect is more likely to be executed than the second shaking effect during a leading effect, and the second shaking effect is more likely to be executed than the first shaking effect during a trailing effect, which has the advantage of making it easier to generate shaking effects in the order of the first shaking effect and then the second shaking effect.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is a gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-4,
The performance control means
A predetermined operation-responsive effect can be executed in response to an operation by a player,
The operation-responsive effects include a first operation-responsive effect (for example, a dialogue preview: see FIG. 23(D)) and a second operation-responsive effect (for example, a strong cut-in: see FIG. 23(L)) that is different from the first operation-responsive effect,
The second operation-responsive effect (e.g., a winning indication swing effect: see Figure 23 (O)) is more likely to be executed when the second operation-responsive effect is executed than when the first operation-responsive effect is executed (e.g., see Figure 24).

With the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5, the second operation response effect is more likely to be executed when the second shaking effect is executed than when the first operation response effect is executed. Therefore, by executing the second operation response effect, it is possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for the second shaking effect to be executed.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5,
The performance control means
The feature of this invention is that when the operation-responsive effect is not being executed, the first rocking effect (for example, a pre-rocking effect (see FIG. 22(B)), an operation-incompatible rocking effect at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 23(B)), or an operation-incompatible rocking effect during SP reach (see FIG. 23(I))) is executed.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6, the first shaking effect is executed when the operation-responsive effect is not being executed, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the effect executed when the operation-responsive effect is not being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-7 is any one of the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-6,
The swing pattern of the performance movable body in the first swing performance includes a first swing pattern and a second swing pattern different from the first swing pattern (see, for example, FIG. 24 ),
The performance control means
When the first swing performance is executed at the first execution timing, the first swing performance is executed to swing the performance movable body in the first swing pattern (for example, when a swing performance that is not compatible with operation at the start of fluctuation is executed at the start of fluctuation, the robot-type gimmick 15 is swung at high speed for 2 seconds: see FIG. 23(B)).
When the first shaking effect is executed at the second execution timing, the first shaking effect is executed to shake the movable body in the second shaking pattern (for example, when a shaking effect that is not compatible with operation during SP reach is executed during SP reach, the robot-type gimmick 15 is swung at a low speed for 4.5 seconds: see Figure 23 (I)).

With the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-7, the rocking pattern of the effect movable body changes depending on the execution timing of the first rocking effect, making it possible to execute a more entertaining first rocking effect than if the rocking pattern of the effect movable body were fixed regardless of the execution timing of the first rocking effect.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-8 is any one of the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-7,
The performance control means
A predetermined operation-responsive effect (for example, an ally character appearance display effect (see FIG. 23(N)), a victory effect (see FIG. 23(P))) can be executed in response to an operation by the player,
The second swing effect (for example, a winning indication swing effect: see FIG. 23(O)) is executed when the operation response effect is executed.

With the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-8, the second shaking effect is executed while the operation-responsive effect is being executed, so a powerful effect can be achieved through the synergistic effect between the operation-responsive effect and the second shaking effect.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-9 is any one of the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-8,
a reservation means capable of reserving the right to make the judgment;
a pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not the special game is to be executed before the determination is made on the right reserved by the reservation means,
The performance control means
As the first shaking performance, a pre-swing performance (for example, see FIG. 22(B)) based on the result of the pre-determination can be executed,
The presentation is controlled in one of a plurality of presentation modes including a first presentation mode in which the pre-swaying presentation is executed with a first execution probability, and a second presentation mode in which the pre-swaying presentation is executed with a second execution probability different from the first execution probability (see, for example, FIG. 25 ),
In the first presentation mode, when the pre-swing presentation is executed, the second swing presentation (e.g., a winning indication swing presentation: see Figure 23 (O)) is more likely to be executed than when the pre-swing presentation is not executed (e.g., see Figure 24).

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-9, in the first presentation mode, when a pre-swaying presentation is performed, the second swaying presentation is more likely to be performed than when the pre-swaying presentation is not performed. Therefore, by performing a pre-swaying presentation, it is possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for the second swaying presentation to be performed, and a high presentation effect can be achieved through the synergistic effect of the pre-swaying presentation and the second swaying presentation.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-10 is any one of the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-9,
The performance control means
Based on the result of the determination, a winning notification effect (see, for example, FIG. 23(R)) that notifies that the special game will be executed can be executed.
The winning notification effects include a first effect pattern display effect (for example, an effect of displaying three effect patterns representing even numbers) that displays a plurality of first effect patterns to notify that the special game will be played, and a second effect pattern display effect (for example, an effect of displaying three effect patterns representing odd numbers) that displays a plurality of second effect patterns to notify that the special game will be played,
The second swing effect (for example, a winning suggestion swing effect: see FIG. 23(O)) is an effect that suggests that the winning notification effect will be executed,
The performance control means
The second swinging performance when the first performance pattern display performance is executed and the second swinging performance when the second performance pattern display performance is executed can be characterized in that the performance movable body can be swung in a swinging pattern that is common to both (see, for example, Figure 24).

However, if the second oscillation effect when the first oscillation effect is executed and the second oscillation effect when the second oscillation effect is executed are performed using different oscillation patterns, there is a concern that it may be difficult to understand what the second oscillation effect is suggesting.

In contrast, with the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-10 above, the movable effect body swings in a common swing pattern when the first effect symbol display effect is executed and when the second effect symbol display effect is executed. This prevents the above problems from occurring, while making it possible for the second swing effect to clearly indicate that a winning notification effect will be executed.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-11 is any one of the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-10,
The game control device (e.g., a main CPU 81: see FIG. 7) controls a game in one of a plurality of game states including a first game state (e.g., a normal game state: see FIG. 25) and a second game state (e.g., a probability variable game state: see FIG. 25) that is more advantageous to a player than the first game state,
The probability of executing the swing effect in the first gaming state and the probability of executing the swing effect in the second gaming state are different from each other (see, for example, FIG. 25).

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-11, the probability of executing a rocking effect in the first gaming state and the probability of executing a rocking effect in the second gaming state are different, making it possible to execute a rocking effect with a more appropriate execution probability for each gaming state than when these execution probabilities are the same.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-12 is any one of the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-11,
The performance control means
Based on the result of the determination, a winning notification effect (see, for example, FIG. 23(R)) that notifies that the special game will be executed can be executed.
The winning notification effects include a first effect pattern display effect (for example, an effect of displaying three effect patterns representing even numbers) that displays a plurality of first effect patterns to notify that the special game will be played, and a second effect pattern display effect (for example, an effect of displaying three effect patterns representing odd numbers) that displays a plurality of second effect patterns to notify that the special game will be played,
The possibility that the first swinging performance will be executed before the first performance pattern display performance and the possibility that the first swinging performance will be executed before the second performance pattern display performance are different from each other.

In the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-12, the possibility that the first shaking effect will be executed before the first effect symbol display effect and the possibility that the first shaking effect will be executed before the second effect symbol display effect are different, so the player can enjoy playing the game while guessing whether the first effect symbol display effect or the second effect symbol display effect will be executed based on the execution of the first shaking effect.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-13 is any one of the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-12,
The game control means (e.g., a main CPU 81) controls a game in any one of a plurality of game states including a first game state (e.g., a normal game state) and a second game state (e.g., a probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to a player than the first game state,
The probability of executing the first shaking effect in the first gaming state and the probability of executing the first shaking effect in the second gaming state are different from each other (see, for example, FIG. 25).

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-13, the probability of executing the first shaking effect in the first gaming state and the probability of executing the first shaking effect in the second gaming state are different, making it possible to execute the first shaking effect with a more appropriate execution probability for each gaming state than when these execution probabilities are the same.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-14 is any one of the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-13,
a reservation means capable of reserving the right to make the judgment;
a pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not the special game is to be executed before the determination is made on the right reserved by the reservation means,
The performance control means
As the first swing performance, a first first swing performance based on the result of the advance determination by the advance determination means (for example, advance swing performance: see FIG. 22(B)), and a second first swing performance based on the result of the determination by the determination means (for example, a swing performance not corresponding to an operation at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 23(B)), a swing performance not corresponding to an operation before a reach (see FIG. 23(E)), a swing performance not corresponding to an operation during a SP reach (see FIG. 23(I))) can be executed,
The swing pattern in which the performance movable body swings due to the first first swing performance and the swing pattern in which the performance movable body swings due to the second first swing performance are different from each other (see Figure 24).

In the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-14, the swing pattern in which the performance movable body swings due to the first first swing performance and the swing pattern in which the performance movable body swings due to the second first swing performance are different from each other, so the player can easily determine, based on the swing pattern of the performance movable body, whether the first swing performance is based on the results of a pre-determination by the pre-determination means or the results of a determination by the determination means.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-15 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-14,
The swing pattern in which the performance movable body swings due to the first first swing performance (e.g., ultra-high speed swing for 1 second: see Figure 22 (B)) and the swing pattern in which the performance movable body swings due to the second swing performance (e.g., ultra-low speed swing for 10 seconds: see Figure 23 (O)) are different from each other.

In the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-15, the swing pattern in which the performance movable body swings due to the first first swing performance and the swing pattern in which the performance movable body swings due to the second swing performance are different from each other. Therefore, the swing performance becomes monotonous due to the swing pattern of the performance movable body in the first first swing performance and the swing pattern of the performance movable body in the second swing performance being the same, which can prevent problems such as not being able to achieve sufficient performance effects from the swing performance. It is possible to achieve a high performance effect through the synergistic effect of the first first swing performance and the second swing performance.

(Reference Invention 4)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is:
A movable object for performance (for example, a robot-type gimmick 15: see Figures 1 and 21),
a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to a player (for example, the main CPU 81 for executing the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 30: see FIG. 5);
A special game execution means (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes a special game opening/closing control process exemplified in FIGS. 34 to 36) that executes the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A performance control means (e.g., a sub-CPU 91: see FIG. 5) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means
It is possible to execute a swinging performance (for example, various swinging performances exemplified in FIGS. 21 and 24) that swings the performance movable body,
The swinging performance includes a first swinging performance (for example, various swinging performances executed during the preceding performances of FIGS. 22 and 23) and a second swinging performance different from the first swinging performance (for example, a winning suggestion swinging performance: see FIG. 23(O)).
The performance control means
When the first swinging effect is executed at the first execution timing, the swinging movable body is swung in a first swinging pattern (for example, when a swinging effect that is not compatible with operation at the start of fluctuation is executed at the start of fluctuation, the robot-type gimmick 15 is swung at high speed for 2 seconds: see Figure 23 (B)), while when the first swinging effect is executed at the second execution timing, it is possible to swing the swinging movable body in a second swinging pattern that is different from the first swinging pattern (for example, when a swinging effect that is not compatible with operation during SP reach is executed during SP reach, the robot-type gimmick 15 is swung at low speed for 4.5 seconds: see Figure 23 (I)).
The swing time (e.g., 10 seconds: see Figure 23 (O)) during which the performance movable body swings due to the second swing performance is longer than the swing time (e.g., see Figure 24) during which the performance movable body swings due to the first swing performance.

With the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1, the rocking pattern of the rocking movable body changes depending on the timing of execution of the first rocking effect, making it possible to execute a more entertaining first rocking effect than when the rocking pattern of the rocking movable body is fixed regardless of the timing of execution of the first rocking effect. Furthermore, because the rocking time of the rocking movable body in the second rocking effect is longer than the rocking time of the rocking movable body in the first rocking effect, it is possible to prevent the rocking effect from becoming monotonous due to the rocking time of the rocking movable body in the first rocking effect and the rocking time of the rocking movable body in the second rocking effect being the same, while achieving a high performance effect through the synergistic effect of the first rocking effect and the second rocking effect.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1,
The performance control means
A predetermined operation-responsive effect can be executed in response to an operation by a player,
The operation-responsive effects include a first operation-responsive effect (for example, a dialogue preview: see FIG. 23(D)) and a second operation-responsive effect (for example, a strong cut-in: see FIG. 23(L)) that is different from the first operation-responsive effect,
The second operation-responsive effect (e.g., a winning indication swing effect: see Figure 23 (O)) is more likely to be executed when the second operation-responsive effect is executed than when the first operation-responsive effect is executed (e.g., see Figure 24).

With the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2, the second operation response effect is more likely to be executed when the second shaking effect is performed than when the first operation response effect is performed. Therefore, by executing the second operation response effect, it is possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for the second shaking effect to be performed.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2,
The performance control means
It is possible to execute a predetermined preceding performance (for example, see FIGS. 22 and 23) and a following performance (for example, see FIG. 23) that can be executed after the preceding performance,
The first operation-responsive effect (for example, a dialogue preview: see FIG. 23(D)) is an effect that can be executed during the preceding effect (for example, see FIG. 23),
The second operation-responsive effect (for example, a strong cut-in: see FIG. 23(L)) is characterized in that it is an effect that can be executed during the following effect (for example, see FIG. 23).

With the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3, the first operation response effect is an effect that is executed during the advance performance, and the second operation response effect is an effect that is executed during the follow-up performance. Therefore, even if the first operation response effect is not executed during the advance performance, the player can enjoy playing in the hope that the second operation response effect will be executed during the follow-up performance, and it is possible to maintain the player's anticipation for the second rocking effect to be executed for a long period of time.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is any one of the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-3,
The performance control means
A predetermined operation-responsive effect can be executed in response to an operation by a player,
The first shaking effect (for example, a pre-swing effect (see Figure 22 (B)), a shaking effect that does not respond to operation at the start of fluctuation (see Figure 23 (B)), a shaking effect that does not respond to operation during SP reach (see Figure 23 (I))) is characterized in that it is a different effect from the operation-responsive effect.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4, the first shaking effect is different from the operation-responsive effect and is executed regardless of the player's operation. Therefore, by executing the first shaking effect at a timing that is unexpected for the player, it is possible to achieve a high performance effect.

(Reference Invention 5)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is:
A movable object for performance (for example, a robot-type gimmick 15: see Figures 1 and 21),
a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) advantageous to a player (for example, the main CPU 81 for executing the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 30: see FIG. 5);
When the determination is made, a special symbol display control means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the processing of steps S311 and S315 in FIG. 30) that causes a predetermined special symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display 41: see FIG. 5) to variably display a special symbol and then stops and displays a special symbol that indicates the result of the determination;
a special game execution means (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes a big prize opening opening/closing control process exemplified in FIGS. 34 to 36) that executes the special game when a special symbol (for example, a big prize symbol X1 or a big prize symbol X2: see FIG. 6(B)) that indicates that the special game has been determined by the determination means to be executed is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display means;
A performance control means (e.g., a sub-CPU 91: see FIG. 5) for controlling the performance,
The performance control means
Based on the result of the determination, it is possible to execute an action effect (e.g., a swing effect) that causes the effect movable body to operate in a first action pattern (e.g., a swing pattern exemplified in FIG. 24) during the variable display of the special symbol that is executed in response to the determination being made (e.g., for each swing effect in FIG. 24, the processing of step S826 in FIG. 51 is executed),
Prior to the operation performance, after power is turned on to the gaming machine, a pre-operation performance (e.g., a pre-operation swing performance) can be executed in which the performance movable body is operated in a second operation pattern (e.g., a swing pattern for a pre-operation swing performance) different from the first operation pattern (e.g., a pre-operation swing performance is started when "YES" is determined in step S801 of Figure 51).

With the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1, the preceding action performance is executed before the actual action performance, making it possible to check the action of the action-moving object in advance. Furthermore, in the preceding action performance, the action-moving object moves in a different movement pattern from the action performance, making it easy to prevent problems such as players mistaking the preceding action performance for an action performance.

In the above embodiment, a swinging effect is performed by swinging the robot-type gimmick 15 as a motion effect for moving the moving object. However, by changing the motion mechanism of the robot-type gimmick 15, it is also possible to perform a rotation effect in which the robot-type gimmick 15 rotates around the vertical axis, for example, or to perform a combined motion effect that combines a swinging effect and a rotation effect.

Note that multiple inventions from Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 5-1 above may be combined.

[Modification]
In the above embodiment, the present invention has been described as being applied to a type 1 pachinko gaming machine known as a V-ST machine, but the present invention may also be applied to other gaming machines such as a type 1 pachinko gaming machine known as a variable probability loop type, a type 1 pachinko gaming machine known as an ST machine, or a type 1/2 mixed type pachinko gaming machine.

Furthermore, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operating modes of each component described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operating modes. Furthermore, the processing order, set values, random number values, threshold values used for judgment, etc. in the above flowchart are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other orders and values as long as they do not deviate from the scope of the present invention. The drawings, etc. illustrated in the above embodiment are also merely examples, and other modes are possible.

1 Gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), 7 Image display device, 15 Robot-type gimmick, 21 First start opening, 22 Second start opening, 23 Opening/closing member, 26 First large prize opening, 28 Second large prize opening, 41 First special symbol display device, 42 Second special symbol display device, 70 Display screen, 80 Main control board, 81 Main CPU, 90 Sub-control board, 91 Sub-CPU, 100 Image and sound control board, 101 Image and sound control CPU, 211 First start opening sensor, 221 Second start opening sensor, 261 First large prize opening sensor, 262 First large prize opening solenoid, 281 Second large prize opening sensor, 282 Second large prize opening solenoid, 283 V prize opening sensor, 284 Discharge opening sensor, 285 Slide member, 286 V prize opening solenoid, 287 V prize entrance.

Claims (1)

A movable stage body that can be operated,
a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player;
a symbol display control means for, when the determination is made, causing a predetermined symbol display means to variably display a special symbol and then statically display a special symbol indicating the result of the determination;
a special game execution means for executing the special game when a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined that the special game will be executed is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means ;
A gaming machine comprising a performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means
It is possible to execute a predetermined leading performance, a following performance that can be executed after the leading performance, and a swing performance that swings the performance movable body,
The swing performance includes a first swing performance that swings the performance movable body during the preceding performance, and a second swing performance that swings the performance movable body during the following performance,
When the preceding performance is executed and then the following performance is executed, there are a time when the second rocking performance is executed without executing the first rocking performance, and a time when the first rocking performance is executed and then the second rocking performance is executed ,
The performance control means
In accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, a performance symbol that notifies the result of the judgment is displayed in a variable manner,
During the variable display of the performance symbols, a first attention performance that draws attention to the performance symbols when a reach is achieved, and a second attention performance that draws attention to the performance symbols of a mode indicating that the special game will be executed can be executed.
During the variable display of the performance pattern, there are times when the performance pattern is displayed in a first display mode and times when the performance pattern is displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode,
When the performance pattern is displayed in the second display mode, the second swing performance and the second attention performance are more likely to be executed than when the performance pattern is displayed in the first display mode,
The effect symbols displayed when the reach is established include a first effect symbol and a second effect symbol,
The performance control means
The first attention effect that draws attention to the second effect pattern can be executed, but the first attention effect that draws attention to the first effect pattern is not executed,
The first swinging performance swings the performance movable body in a first operation pattern,
The performance control means
A gaming machine characterized in that, prior to the first rocking performance, the performance movable body can be rocked in a second operating pattern different from the first operating pattern after power is turned on to the gaming machine .